TW201222097A - Television receiver and surface light source device - Google Patents

Abstract

Disclosed is surface light source device that, despite using a plurality of point light sources, has almost no uneven luminescence (hot spots) in the vicinity of an incident light surface of a light guide plate and has uniform luminescence across almost the entire light-emitting surface of the light guide plate. Also disclosed is a television receiver that uses the surface light source device as a liquid crystal display device. The television receiver comprises: a surface light source device with a light guide plate that has a light-emitting surface, a facing surface that faces the light-emitting surface, and at least one incident light surface sandwiched between the light-emitting surface and the facing surface, and with a plurality of point light sources arranged in the vicinity of the at least one incident light surface in the light guide plate; a display panel arranged so as to face the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate, with a display area that displays by adjusting light transmission and a shielding frame that demarcates the display area; and a tuner that receives broadcast video signals. The at-least-one incident light surface in the light guide plate has a plurality of concave and convex sections that have openings or bottom surfaces with a long anistropic shape in a direction perpendicular to the light-emitting surface.

Description

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a surface light source device of a so-called end face illumination method, for example, a surface light source device suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device, and a television receiver device using the same. [Prior Art] A surface light source device of an end face illumination method is often used in a liquid crystal display device. The surface light source device of the end face illumination method generally includes: a light guide plate that emits light from a 0 〇 light source toward a liquid crystal display panel side; an LED dight-emitting diode disposed on a side thereof, a light emitting diode) or a ccFL (c) a light source such as a 〇id cathode flU0rescent iamp, a cold cathode tube; and a prism sheet having a direction of light emitted from the light guide plate toward the liquid crystal display panel side (the surface is provided with a ridge having a ridge parallel to the light incident surface of the light guide plate) Structure) and so on. The light guide plate generally includes a light-emitting surface, a facing surface facing the light-emitting surface, and a light-incident surface sandwiched between the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface to emit a light-emitting surface from the side surface (light incident surface) The incident light is reflected and reflected inside the panel, and the guided light is emitted from the light emitted from the opposite side to the liquid crystal display panel side by the light emitting means provided on the opposite surface. However, it has the following disadvantages: when such a light guide plate is used in combination with a plurality of point light sources, even in the region of the central portion of the light-emitting surface (the area where the light sources of the disk are separated by a certain distance), uniform brightness can be obtained. In a region near the light entrance surface of the point source, a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source is darker, and on the other hand, a so-called hot spot in the portion of the point source is extremely bright. (h〇t state, the brightness is not 157266.doc 201222097. Quality, the use of a plurality of point light sources as the light source of the surface light source device has substantially only the center of the light-emitting surface of the light plate. ^ To prevent this (4) An uneven light guide plate, which is disclosed in Patent Document i, that is, the opposite direction to the light-emitting surface, and the traveling direction of the light with respect to the light of the person is crossed in the oblique direction Further, in Patent Document 2, a light guide plate having a trapezoidal concavo-convex structure formed by cutting a square shape having a % square shape is provided on the light incident surface, and Patent Document 3 is disclosed. A light guide plate having a recessed portion in which the opening portion has a substantially square shape and the bottom portion has an arc-shaped corner portion is provided on the human surface. Further, in Patent Document 4, a knurling cut is disclosed on the opposite surface. 'and a micro-cut light guide plate having a lenticular shape or the like on the light-incident surface' is disclosed in Patent Document 5 as an anisotropic light-diffusing adhesive layer containing an adhesive and a acicular filler on the light-incident surface. [Patent Document 1] [Patent Document 1] Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2003-107247 (Patent Document 2) Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. Hei 2 No. Hei. JP-A-2003-215346 [Patent Document 4] JP-A-2006-49286 (Patent Document 5), JP-A-2008-34234, SUMMARY OF INVENTION [Problems to be Solved by the Invention] 157266.doc 201222097 However, in the light guide plate disclosed in Patent Documents 1 to 5, the improvement in luminance unevenness when used in combination with a plurality of point light sources is not sufficient, and the hot spot near the light entrance surface cannot be eliminated. 2, 3 revealed In the operation, the structure of the concavities and convexities formed on the light-incident surface is complicated. Therefore, it is difficult to cope with the small-sized LEDs having a width of 5 mm or less in the light-emitting surface used in recent years (providing a sufficient number of irregularities or depressions on the light-emitting surface). Further, in the technique disclosed in Patent Document 4, it is necessary to apply a knurling cut to the opposite surface of the light guide plate, so that it is difficult to apply to a light guide plate used in a large-sized liquid crystal television, and it is also costly. Further, Patent Document 5 Since the anisotropic light-diffusing adhesive layer in the disclosed technology has a structure in which the acicular filler is dispersed in the adhesive, the accuracy of the anisotropy is low, and the light leakage after the light is incident on the light guide plate is severe and cannot be satisfied. The quality of the display device. The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a plurality of point light sources, and the luminance unevenness (hot spot) is hardly generated in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light guide plate, and is substantially in the light emitting surface of the light guide plate. A surface light source device having a uniform luminance distribution in all regions and a television receiver using the surface light source device as a liquid crystal display device. [Means for Solving the Problems] As a result of intensive studies on the light guide plate, the inventors of the present invention found that a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape long in a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface are provided on the light incident surface. In addition, it can reduce the unevenness of brightness caused by hot spots and other kinds of light sources caused by point light sources. In addition, it was found that if the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or its opposite surface is in the vicinity of the light-incident surface of the 157266.doc 201222097 light-emitting surface, the light scattering degree of the partial region of the face-to-point clip element is lower than the right side. The light scattering processing of the light scattering degree of the partial region between the point light source and the point light source is set to the effect of the light scattering processing by the effect of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions of the #八九面^ ^ Function, which can eliminate hot spots and other kinds of light unevenness caused by point light source, and obtain uniform brightness distribution throughout the light exit surface. Further, it has been found that the light source surface of the light guide plate and/or the region other than the light incident surface of the opposite surface thereof can be suppressed from the light source by performing light scattering processing on a specific region or a partial region. The unevenness of the front side of the display or display device (light-emitting surface) can also be suppressed. [Effects of the Invention] When the light guide plate of the present invention is used, it is possible to provide a surface light source device and a display device which do not have a plurality of uniformities even if they are used. [Embodiment] A specific embodiment of a light guide plate usable in the present invention is as follows. [1] A light guide plate </ RTI> having a light-emitting surface, a surface facing the light-emitting surface, and at least a solid between the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface:

a smooth surface, and at least one of the above-mentioned entangled workpieces H includes an opening or a bottom surface of the light-emitting surface in a direction perpendicular to the county s sω, and a plurality of anisotropic shapes that are longer on the door Concave and convex parts. The light guide plate of [2] 357266.doc 201222097 [] comprises: a substrate; an adhesive layer laminated on at least one end surface of the substrate; and laminated on the adhesive layer, the surface comprising an opening or a bottom surface having A layer of a plurality of recesses or protrusions having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction. [3] The light guide plate of [] or [2], the above-mentioned adhesive layer is formed by the material of the storage elastic modulus G' of 10, _~45, _pa. [4] The light guide plate of any one of (1) to [3] wherein the surface includes a plurality of recesses or protrusions having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape in a direction including a base film layer And a resin layer having a plurality of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction, and the surface includes an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction The resin layer of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions contains an addition polymerization-containing monomer having (A) at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group: 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (B) photopolymerization initiator: 〇1 3% by mass of the cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition, and the (A) addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group contains a biphenyl group and has the following formula (I) ) of the structure shown in the formula, general formula (I) [Chemical 1] 157266.doc .. · (I) .. · (I) 201222097

(wherein 'R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and x represents a part or all of a divalent organic group having at least an alkyl group). [5] The light guide plate of [4] wherein the compound having the structure represented by the above formula (I) has a structure represented by the following formula (II): Formula (II) [Chemical 2]

(In the formula (II), R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, a each independently represents an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, and n represents an integer of 1 to 3). [6] The light guide plate according to any one of [2], wherein the above-mentioned adhesive layer and the surface include a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction. The layer is bonded to one end surface of the base material by using a bonding jig having a slidability providing layer containing a sliding imparting material on the surface, and is provided inside the slidability providing layer, and has a shape following The shape of the material with a rubber hardness of 1 〇 to 7 追 follows the layer. ; [7] 157266.doc 201222097 Such as [2] to [6] _ any one! # &amp; ^ The surface contains open or the bottom surface has a plurality of concave or convex portions in the above-mentioned subsequent layer and the above-mentioned shape, and the anisotropic layer is extended by the following bonding method; The end surface, the bonding method comprises the following steps: a step of preparing a laminated body by a person's laminated layer having an adhesive layer having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction with an opening or a bottom surface of the surface package 3 Or the layer of the convex portion has a width substantially the same as or smaller than the thickness of the one end surface of the substrate;

a layer on the one end surface of the one end surface; and a laminating step of opposing the layered body, and using the layered volume layer in the adhesion step, using a bonding device including a member having shape followability The pressure is applied to include an opening or a bottom on the surface along the longitudinal direction of the one end surface, and the flying surface has a plurality of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction. . [8] a light guide plate of any one of π] to m, wherein #Injecting light from a normal direction into the surface includes a plurality of recesses having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction or In the case of the layer of the convex portion, the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the above one direction is 30. ~ 120. .

The light guide plate according to any one of [1] to [8], wherein the light incident surface has an anisotropic light diffusion property as a whole, and a diffusion angle of incident light from a normal direction thereof in a longitudinal direction of the light incident surface It is larger than the angle of diffusion in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface, 157266.doc •9· 201222097 The angle of the outgoing light of the light incident in the direction of the entrance surface of the light incident surface in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface The light-emitting pattern curve of the entire light-incident surface of the horizontal axis of the intensity axis is the peak of the peak intensity of the intensity of the light emitted from the curve of the light-emitting pattern, and the intensity of the emitted light is the peak intensity. When half of the middle point is 2 points, the normal distribution curve of the 3 points is compared to 'satisfy the following conditions 1. and/or condition 2.: Condition 1. The intensity of the emitted light is an exit angle of 3/4 or more of the peak intensity. The range of production is narrower than the normal distribution curve. Condition 2. The range of the exit angle sound whose intensity of the emitted light is 1/1〇 or more of the peak intensity is wider than the normal distribution curve. [10] The light guide plate according to any one of [1] to [9] wherein the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface has a groove structure substantially parallel to a normal direction of the light-incident surface. [11] The light guide plate of [9], wherein the groove structure is a lenticular lens shape or a random plurality of grooves. The embodiment of the light guide plate of the present invention will be specifically described below using Fig. 1 showing a schematic view of the same. The light guide plate 1 of the present invention includes a light-emitting surface u, an opposing surface facing the light-emitting surface, and at least one light incident 12 ° interposed between the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface. The light guide plate of the present invention is disposed on the light guide plate. The light from the nearby light source enters the light guide plate 12 into the light guide plate, and reflects the light inside the plate to reflect light, and the guided light is directed by the opposite surface (not shown) opposite to the light exit surface. The light exit surface 157266.doc -10· 201222097 11 is emitted from the light exit surface 11 to the outside. In order to reduce the unevenness of the shell, the light guide plate includes a plurality of concave and convex portions on the light incident surface 12 in a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface, and a concave portion or a convex portion on the bottom surface of the light exiting surface. A plurality of concaves 4 or convex ρ having an anisotropic shape having a long opening in the direction of the opening or the bottom surface of the surface, and a groove substantially perpendicular to the light-emitting surface 11 . : concave: when the long diameter of the opening (bottom surface) of the Ρ (convex portion) and the angle perpendicular to the light-emitting surface are 40 degrees or less (even if the Ο (protrusion) is opened"::::= ) The direct view is made as the recess = ^ ^ force 隹 隹 无 无 无 垂直 垂直 垂直 垂直 垂直 , , , , , , , , , , 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无 无6 degrees or less, more preferably 4 degrees or less, the smallest tree area is the smallest, and the long side of the rectangle is externally connected to the opening portion (the bottom portion may have an opening portion (bottom surface) shaped to be perpendicular to the light exit surface, for example 'The opening (bottom surface) is an isotropic shape such as a circle, or (although the portion (bottom surface) is anisotropic, the long diameter is not parallel to the direction perpendicular to the light-emitting surface). And the (bottom surface) has the area of the opening of the concave portion (the area of the convex portion „ mouth portion (bottom surface) of the convex portion □言Γ The ratio of the long diameter to the short diameter of the opening (the upper and lower sides) of the (4) (4)) : 157266.doc 201222097 Diameter, which means that the area of the external connection is the smallest and the short side and the long side of the rectangle. The anisotropic shape is not limited. As an example of (4), for example, the line is shown in Figure 1. , a groove, or a substantially elliptical shape as shown in Fig. 13. The shape of the opening surface (bottom surface) of the concave portion (protrusion portion) can be observed by using a microscope (scanning electron microscope, laser confocal microscope, etc.) OK. ^ The distance between the concave portion (the convex portion) in the direction parallel to the light-emitting surface is not limited, and the average spacing is preferably 2 〇 _ lower, more preferably the following, more preferably H) pm or less. Further, the + average pitch is preferably 58 or more of the center wavelength of the visible light, and more preferably 78 〇 nm (the entire visible light region) or more. Since the size (width) of the light-emitting surface of the commonly used point light source is a degree of bribe, if the average pitch is set to the above value, a sufficient number of concave portions or convex portions can be allocated to the light-emitting surface of the point light source, so that it is not necessary to strictly The alignment accuracy between the source and the light guide plate is required. Further, when the average pitch is set to the above value, the operation of the fingernail or the like in the concave portion or the convex portion during operation is also less. Further, the light diffused by the light guide plate included in the surface light source device of the present invention is visible light (electromagnetic wave of 38 〇 nm to 78 〇 nm), so that the diffusion effect I of the concave portion or the convex portion is sufficiently exhibited, and the average pitch is preferably It is the value as described above. Here, the distance between the concave portions (protrusions) in the direction parallel to the light-emitting surface refers to the bottom (the case of the concave portion) or the top portion (the convex portion) adjacent to any cross section of the light-incident surface parallel to the light-emitting surface. In the case of the case, the horizontal distance (the distance in the direction of the light incident surface) (refer to Fig. 13). Furthermore, in the case of the flat distance between the bottom of the valley (157266.doc -12-201222097), the center is used as the valley bottom (the top of the mountain) to determine the direction of the concave or convex portion of the door. The average is extracted ~, the average of the six pastas. The distance between the concave portions (protrusions) existing in the 100 μm*

Q: The (average) spacing in the direction parallel to the light-emitting surface can be viewed by the (four) mirror (scanning electron microscope or laser confocal microscope, etc.), and the entrance pupil is parallel to the light-emitting surface. Determined by any profile. Each bump. The size (depth, height) of Ρ) is also not limited. For example, the short diameter of the opening (bottom surface) may be 580 nm to 100 Å, or 780 〇 ’ ', or 1 to 20 叫. Further, the long diameter of the opening (bottom surface) may be, for example, 5 μm or more and 2 cm or less. In addition, the depth (height) may be, for example, 500 nm to 5 〇 (four), or may be 7 〇〇 nm to 30 μηι, or 5 to 1 〇 μιη. The average depth (height) of the concave portion or the convex portion is also preferably 5 〇〇 nm to 5 〇 μηι, more preferably 7 〇〇 Μ Μ Μ 更 更 更 更 更 更 ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι ι. Here, the depth (height) of the concave portion (protrusion) refers to the mountain between the top of each mountain and the valley bottom of the concave portion in any of the cross sections of the light incident surface. The vertical distance between the valleys on the sides of the convex part, the valley bottom of the lower valley and the top of the convex part (the distance perpendicular to the direction of the light entrance surface) (the elevation difference between the top and the bottom). (Refer to Fig. 13) In addition, the average depth (height) of the concave portion or the convex portion refers to an arbitrary extraction of 100 μm from any vertical section of the light incident surface, and the depth of the concave portion (convex portion) where the 100 μηι is present (high 157266. Doc -13 - 201222097 degrees) The average. The size of the notch p (convex portion) can be observed by using a microscope (scanning microscopy or a laser confocal microscope, etc.). 』When you enter any part of the first face and the shape of the concave part (protrusion) is a groove (groove), the ratio is greater than the thickness of the light-emitting surface of the point source λ: Γ, Γ ( (4) The length is preferably the thickness direction of the plate of the light-emitting surface of the point source (from the light-emitting surface to the opposite direction: up to: 2 faces) but the length of the groove (dwarf) is not necessary to cross the light into a plurality of concave portions (protrusion) is not the same as the prior art, the plurality of concave portions (protrusions) are shaped to the square of the light-emitting surface = two sizes (depth 'height) and flat ~ mouth J 1 :> &lt; 5 small ^ π a in the spacing, ^ T WJ y random (irregular) == 'The improvement in the degree of non-uniformity reduction (especially the reduction of hotspots), so the so-called random difference, Refers to the sum of the dimension of the two quasi-biased multiples calculated from a plurality of measured values, and the sum of the chest and the convex portion of the g&amp; recessed or convex portion is not limited to the light guide plate. It is suitable to use the light distribution or arrangement of the light source used, and also in the light guide plate included in the surface light source device of the present invention, ::: It may have a portion (region) having no concave portion or convex portion. Preferably, the concave portion 5 is disposed at least in a region t opposite to the light emitting surface of the light source. 157266.doc 14· 201222097 In addition, the density of the concave portion or the convex portion is not limited. In the region where the light-incident surface of the light guide plate faces the light-emitting surface of the light source, it is preferable that the total area of the opening (bottom surface) of the concave portion (protrusion portion) accounts for 25% or more (more preferably 50%) of the area. More specifically, the above is more preferably 7% or more. Specific examples of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions are shown in Fig. 2, Fig. 3, and Figs. 24A to J. In the examples of Fig. 2 and Fig. 3, the concave portion or the convex portion is a groove. The plurality of grooves (groove structure) of 2 have anisotropic diffusion characteristics, and the diffusion angle perpendicular to the groove (defined by FWHM described later) is 60 degrees, and diffusion in a direction parallel to the groove The angle is the twist. The groove structure of Fig. 3 has an anisotropic diffusion characteristic, the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the groove is 30 degrees, and the diffusion angle in the direction parallel to the groove is 1 degree. J diffusion angle, average spacing (perpendicular to the long diameter of the opening of the recess) The average pitch in the direction of (groove) and the average depth are shown in Table 1. In addition, in Table 1, "horizontal" means the direction perpendicular to the long diameter direction of the opening of the recess (perpendicular to the groove). "Longitudinal" means the direction parallel to the direction of the long furnace of the opening of the recess (parallel to the groove). 157266.doc 15- 201222097

Other specific examples of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions are shown in Figs. E3(4) to (4). The example of Fig. E3 is a groove in which the concave portion or the convex portion is a groove. The plurality of grooves (groove structure) of Fig. E3(4) have anisotropic diffusion characteristics, and the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the groove (described later) is 83 degrees, and the diffusion angle in the direction parallel to the groove It is 3 degrees. The groove structure of Fig. 3 (15) has an anisotropic diffusion characteristic, the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the groove is 75 degrees, and the diffusion angle in the direction parallel to the groove is 〇·2 degrees. The groove structure of Fig. E3(c) has an anisotropic diffusion characteristic, the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the groove is 65 degrees, and the diffusion angle in the direction parallel to the groove is 7 degrees. The surface of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions can further reduce the reflection on the light incident surface. The moth-eye structure is provided by efficiently using the incident light. Here, the "moth-eye structure" means that the convex portions having substantially the same shape with a height of 1 μm or less are substantially periodic (for example, at a distance of about 50 to 500 nm, 157266.doc -16 - 201222097 is set. A fine uneven structure provided in a square lattice shape, a rectangular lattice shape, a parallelogram lattice shape, a triangular lattice shape (honeycomb shape) or a hexagonal lattice shape. Here, the "fine concavo-convex structure" means an unevenness having an average height of 1/10 or less of the average depth (height) of the plurality of concave portions (protrusions). The height can be set to 50 to 500 nm' or 1 to 30 〇 nm. The uneven structure preferably includes a plurality of convex portions. The shape of each convex portion is not limited, and examples thereof include a tent type, a cone type, a bell type, a polygonal pyramid type, and a hemispherical type, and the average height thereof is preferably 1 μm or less.

Specific examples of the moth-eye structure and the concave portion (groove) having the moth-eye structure on the surface are shown in Figs. 16 and 17, respectively. A method of forming a plurality of concave portions or convex portions (hereinafter, referred to as "concave-convex structures") having an anisotropic shape that is long in a direction perpendicular to the light-emitting surface in the light-incident surface of the light guide plate of the light guide plate There is no limit. For example, 'the following method can be used: (1) a method of injection molding a light guide plate using a mold having a concave-convex pattern corresponding to the uneven structure; (7) transferring the uneven structure to a guide using a transfer mold having a concave-convex pattern corresponding to the uneven structure And (3) a method of using a light-transmitting adhesive (adhesive agent) or the like to bond a layer having a concave-convex structure on a surface to a certain material. And the soil is further formed, if the layer having the uneven structure is not adhered to the light-incident surface and the light guide is used, the effect of the present invention is not apt to be placed in the light guide: Only when the layer in which the uneven structure is formed is disposed between the light source and the light source, the angle inside the light guide plate cannot be diffused (further, the hot spot or other uneven brightness caused by the point source 157266.doc •17·201222097 cannot be eliminated). . In the method of (1), for example, a stamper having a concave-convex pattern corresponding to the uneven structure can be disposed at a position corresponding to the light incident surface of the mold for forming the light guide plate, and the light guide plate having the uneven structure at the beginning of the injection molding can be formed. This method is suitable for manufacturing a light guide plate for a surface light source device for a relatively small image display device of 32 degrees or less. In the method of (2), for example, a light guide plate (substrate) having no uneven structure (a whole sheet for manufacturing a light guide plate) can be formed by extrusion molding or scavenging molding, and the like, and the corresponding structure can be used corresponding to the uneven structure. The transfer mold of the concave-convex pattern transfers the uneven structure to the light incident surface (the surface that becomes the light incident surface). A specific example of this method is shown in FIG. In the method of FIG. 4, the plurality of transparent substrates 41 cut into a specific size are overlapped, and the transfer roller core having the concave-convex pattern corresponding to the concave-convex structure (here, the groove structure) is heated and pressed to be transparent. The surface of the substrate becomes the light incident surface, thereby transferring the uneven structure. According to this method, it can be transferred together to a plurality of light guide plates, so that it can be mass-produced and the quality is improved. (3) The specific order of the method is not limited, and the layer having the uneven structure on the back layer and the surface may be sequentially adhered to the substrate (the layer having the uneven structure on the surface includes the transparent base film layer and the surface having the uneven structure) In the case of the two layers of the resin layer, the transparent base film layer and the resin layer may be bonded to the adhesive layer, and the adhesive layer, the transparent base film layer, and the resin layer may be bonded in order, and 'may be prepared in advance. A laminate having a layer having an uneven layer and a surface having a concavo-convex structure is bonded to the substrate. When the adhesive layer of the adhesive layer and the surface having the uneven structure is laminated on the substrate, the method of bonding the adhesive layer to the substrate and the surface of the adhesive layer have a concave-convex structure on the surface of the laminate 157266.doc -18-201222097 The method of the layer is not limited. Since the subsequent layer has adhesiveness, it is possible to laminate the layers only, or to use a doctor blade or a lighter hardness to remove the air between the layers, thereby making them intimately adhere. As the above-mentioned dislocation, it is preferable to use a bonding jig according to the fourth invention of the present specification (for example, a slidability providing layer including a sliding imparting material on the surface and an inner side of the sliding layer) having a shape follow-up And the rubber hardness is a bonding fixture of the shape of the material of 〇ι〇~70, etc.). According to the study by the inventors of the present invention, it has been found that if the proportion of the portion in which the air layer is interposed between the layers in the laminated region is 10% by area or less, it is difficult to peel between layers at a high temperature and thirst. Therefore, the air between the layers is squeezed out by the jig until the proportion of the portion in which the air layer is interposed is 10% or less. It is also possible to use the single-area layer (4) as the adhesive layer on the substrate.

The adhesive layer is peeled off as needed, and the release sheet is peeled off, and then a layer having a textured structure on the surface is attached thereto. In addition, it is also possible to bond the adhesive layer to the substrate or to apply a layer having a textured structure to the substrate and/or the adhesive layer, the adhesive layer and/or the surface before attaching the layer having the uneven structure on the surface. The surface treatment of the excimer or the corona treatment is used to cut the molecular bonds of the surface and then immediately close the two, thereby improving the bonding strength. In the case where a laminate having a layer having an uneven layer and a surface having a concavo-convex structure is bonded in advance, and it is adhered to a substrate, it may be as follows (I) Method I57266.doc -19-201222097. Further, this method will be described in detail in the description of the fourth invention of the present specification which will be described later. The above bonding method comprises the steps of: preparing a laminated body having an adhesive layer and a layer having a concave-convex structure on the surface, having a width substantially equal to or narrower than an end surface of the substrate; a laminating step of causing the above-mentioned adhesive layer of the laminated body to face the one end surface to face the laminated layer on the one end surface; and the adhesion step, applying pressure using a bonding jig including a member having shape followability The layer having the uneven structure on the surface is stretched one time or more along the longitudinal direction of the one end surface. Specific examples of the laminate in which the layer having the adhesive layer and the surface having the uneven structure on the surface are prepared and adhered to the substrate are as follows: a. sealing strip type and b. belt type method. a. The sealing strip type is applied to a transparent base film comprising polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, polystyrene or the like, for example, an ultraviolet curable resin layer is applied, and a speckle pattern is used by using a speckle pattern described later. The method of forming a concave-convex structure or the like on the ultraviolet ray hardening tree layer, and forming a layer having a concave-convex structure on the surface. The thickness of the base film is not limited and may be, for example, 2 〇 to 25 Å, preferably 50 to 125 μη. Then, an adhesive (adhesive) is applied to the surface of the base film opposite to the surface on which the uneven structure is formed, and a release film containing polyethylene terephthalate or the like is attached thereto, or 157266.doc -20·201222097 to which an adhesive film is attached is attached, followed by a layer or the like, thereby producing a multilayer film covered with a release film on the adhesive side. A specific example of the layer constitution of such a multilayer film is shown in Fig. 5. 5a and 5b of Fig. 5 are each a multilayer crucible in which a release film is provided on one side. In the multilayer film 5&amp;, a release film 51, an adhesive layer 52, a base film 53, and a resin layer 54 having a concave-convex structure (here, a groove structure) formed on the surface are sequentially laminated from the bottom. Further, in the multilayer film 5b, the adhesive layer 55 and the backing film layer 56 are further provided on the resin layer 54 on which the uneven structure is formed, and the release film layer, the subsequent layer 52, and the base film 53 are sequentially laminated from below. A resin layer adhesive layer 55 ❹ ❹ and a backing paper film 56 having a textured structure are formed. Further, the release film 51 and the release film 56 are used to function as a seal liner or a protective film when the light guide plate is manufactured, and the thickness thereof is not limited, and for example (depending on the material) can be set to 2 〇 1 〇 〇μιη. Among them, in order to make the half cut-through process easier, the backing film is preferably 5 pm or more, more preferably 75 μm or more. Further, the thickness of the subsequent layer 52 can be set, for example, to 1 〇〇 μΓΠ. Considering the balance between performance and cost, it is preferably [5~5〇μΠ1 or so, more preferably about 20~25 μπι". Then, the multi-layer film is cut according to the length (width) of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate...: In the case of the multilayer film 5a, when only the release film 5 remains, the liner film 56 and the adhesive layer 55 remain, and the remaining portions are cut to have the same width as the thickness of the light-incident surface ( Semi-cutting, by this method; the film 51 (in the case of the multilayer film 5a) or the backing film is called a multilayer film, and the A film has the same size and shape as the light surface of the light guide plate. The sealing sheet of the film (concave structure sealing strip). Furthermore, in the case of the structure of the ruthenium film 5&amp;, the side of the layer having the uneven structure is cut by the cutter during the half-cutting process, so that the structure of the 151266.doc •21·201222097 is damaged. The advantage of smallness is m 〇 (4). In the case of the half-cutting process, since the blade of the cutting mechanism cuts from the side of the adhesive layer 52, the adhesive layer can be surely cut, and the adhesive (adhesive) is less likely to occur. Mutual adhesion to each other is the advantage of the so-called "silk stick". As a method of cutting through, for example, a method of cutting a knife in a cutting direction, a method of rotating a roll cutter in a cutting direction, and a laser cutting to a desired evening The method of the degree, etc., but is not limited to these. In addition, the choice of belts such as _3 Shi Dan has the advantage of using no shots. A schematic front view of the sealing sheet produced in this manner is shown in Fig. 6. The vertical lines in Fig. 6 indicate the grooves 61. In the case of the manufacturing process of the light guide plate or the assembly process of the surface light source device including the light guide plate, in the case of the multilayer film 5 &amp; the film (the uneven structure seal) of the above-mentioned uneven structure is formed from the release film. The sheet is peeled off and bonded to the human light surface of the light guide plate (substrate) via the adhesive layer 52. When the If φ is outside the multilayer film, the film having the uneven structure (concave-convex structure seal) is formed: the adhesive layer 55 The peeling film 51 is peeled off one by one, and the peeling film 51 is peeled off, and it adheres to the human light surface via the adhesive layer 52. Finally, the air between the film and the light-incident surface is squeezed by the force of (4), etc. Further, by performing surface treatment such as excimer UV treatment or corona treatment on the adhesive layer 52 and/or the light incident surface before the bonding, the molecular bonds of the surface are cut, and then the adhesive layer 52 is immediately inserted. When the surface is treated in a close contact, the bonding strength can be improved. If the surface treatment is used, the base film of the film having the uneven structure can be bonded to the light guide plate without using an adhesive, thereby reducing the cost and improving the reliability. .doc -22· 201222097 Root "Hai seal formation method, and the surface of the work implement attached becomes easy, use of (the bonding of) the seal is also easier sheet management number, and therefore it becomes easy to manufacture the light guide plate. In addition, the transportation of the material for manufacturing the light guide plate is also easy. Further, when manufacturing the sealing sheet, the multilayer film (5a, 5b) may be cut to be shorter than the length (width) of the light incident surface of the light guiding plate, and when the surface light source device is assembled, two or more multilayer films may be used ( The sealing strip) is attached to the light incident surface. In this case, it is preferable that each of the regions facing the light-emitting surface of the light-incident surface is located at a position on the outer side of 2 mm# (upper and lower than the upper and lower sides) and is covered by each of the multilayer films (sealing strips) ( The positioning is preferably carried out in such a manner that the gaps or seams of the media are located in the region opposite to the light-emitting surface. b. Belt type The method of b. belt type will be described using Fig. 7. In the same manner as in the case of the a_seal strip type, the multilayer film 71» including the layer in which the uneven structure is formed is produced, and then cut into the same width as the thickness of the light incident surface, thereby forming a plurality of strips, Then, it is wound around a reel © (not shown) to be processed into a reel 72. The reel is specifically illustrated in Fig. 25. At this time, as shown in Fig. 25, it is preferable to take up the reel of the structure sandwiched by the two discs so that the taken-up belt does not undergo axial misalignment. Further, the diameter of the taken tape is preferably smaller than the outer diameter of the disk. Then, in the manufacturing step of the light guide plate or the assembly step of the surface light source device or the illumination device including the light guide plate, the tape (belt film) including the layer in which the uneven structure is formed is taken out from the reel 72 to be cut into the light guide plate After the length of the light-incident surface is applied to the light-incident surface or after being bonded to the light-incident surface, the length of the light entering the light 157266.doc -23-201222097 is cut. The fitting can be carried out in the same manner as the a. sealing strip type. In the method described in the method, the cutting length of the tape is determined when the cutting length of the tape is bonded to the light guide plate, so that the reel (the reel including the tape film having the layer in which the uneven structure is formed) can be used for both. The versatility of manufacturing a light guide plate of various sizes is relatively versatile. Further, the multilayer film 71 is bonded and accelerated. The step of forming the first plate is easily formed on the film or the like used in the mold (die) used in the methods (1) and (2), the transfer mold (transfer roller), or the method used in the method (3). The method of the concave-convex pattern or the uneven structure corresponding to the structure is not limited, and for example, it may be formed by machining such as cutting or sand blasting, or may be formed by laser speckle==. The method of exposing with the speckle pattern is suitable for forming a microscopic three-dimensional structure of the hardness of 1 Q ^ m @ &amp; μηι which is difficult to mechanically add, and it is also easy to obtain moderate irregularity. When exposed by a speckle pattern, a random concave-convex structure is formed in a manner. . The following describes, for example, by using interference exposure using laser light to generate a random speckle flower, or a speckle pattern of a striped pattern, which is irradiated onto a photosensitive material such as a photoresist. Then, the exposed photosensitive material is developed by a known method = broadcasted on the photosensitive material to form a random structure corresponding to the above-described speckle pattern. Further, the speckle pattern of the random speckle pattern or the stripe pattern can be generated by, for example, spreading a diffused light such as a diffusion layer having a strong anisotropy. By using the diffusion layer to diffuse the laser light and then irradiate it to the exposure surface, the speckle i57266*d〇c •24· 201222097 is generated in the form of a circular spot. If the diffusion layer is more anisotropic, then The speckle is formed into a speckled pattern or a striped pattern. Further, a desired random speckle/streak pattern can be obtained by appropriately changing the wavelength of the laser light or the condition for diffusing the laser light. Specifically, it can be produced by the method disclosed in paragraphs 47 to 0057 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-508585. In addition, a mold or a transfer mold having a concave-convex pattern corresponding to the uneven structure

Eight can be produced by the following method: The concave-convex structure produced as described above is used as a submaster mQld, and the metal is coated on the sub-master by a method such as electric cymbal, thereby A concavo-convex pattern corresponding to the uneven structure is transferred onto the metal. A method of producing a fine concavo-convex pattern by using a speckle pattern formed by interference exposure is known, for example, in Japanese Patent No. 9 No. 9, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2003-525472, and Japanese Patent No. 2004-508585. . When the method of the above (3) is used as a method of forming a plurality of portions or protrusions on the light incident surface of the light guide plate, the structure of the light guide plate includes: a substrate; an adhesive layer laminated on at least a portion of the substrate; And the surface laminated thereon further comprises a plurality of layers of recesses or protrusions (layers having a textured surface on the surface). :: The area provided with the layer having the back layer and the surface having the uneven structure is eight-faceless. Furthermore, if the layer of the adhesive layer and the surface and the structure having the uneven structure protrudes to the outside of the substrate, the light guide device of the present invention is used to assemble the surface light source device and the like, and the other components are contacted and interfered. The presence of the town I is peeled off by the layer having the uneven structure, or the 157266.doc -25·201222097 is damaged by other members, so it is stored in the surface. . In the laminated layer of the substrate and the layer having the uneven structure on the surface, one or a plurality of fine grooves may be formed for use in the case of the light guide plate under high temperature and high humidity, etc. The bubble generated between the layers is released to the outer ridge. The width, cross-sectional shape, depth, and the like of the groove are not limited, and the width thereof is preferably 〇·5 mm or less, and more preferably 〇3 to 〇〇1 ugly. Further, the depth can be set, for example, to 0.5 to 0.01 mm. The length of the groove is also not limited, and it is preferable to cross-sectionally or vertically cut the area of the layer. The material of the substrate is not particularly limited as long as it is translucent, and for example, polymethyl methacrylate, polycarbonate, polystyrene, methyl methacrylate-stupid material, copolymer, or the like can be used as the optical component. The material generally has high transparency (for example, a total light transmittance of 9 (% or more) and a haze of 1.0 or less), and an inorganic material such as a polymer material or glass. In addition, the substrate may also be in the range of not impairing the object of the present invention. 3 organic or inorganic dyes or pigments, matting agents, heat stabilizers, flame retardants, antistatic agents, antifoaming agents, color formers Additives such as antioxidants, UV absorbers, trapping agents for impurities, tackifiers, surface conditioners and mold release agents. An example of a cross section of such a light guide plate is shown in Fig. E4. In the case of FIG. E4, the substrate is E42, and the layer E43 is a layer having a concave-convex structure on the surface. Next, the layer functions to fix the layer having the uneven structure on the substrate to the substrate. The material constituting the adhesive layer preferably has a storage elastic modulus G' of 40,000 to 180,000 1 ^ at 1 °C. When the light guide plate is incorporated into the surface light source device or the television receiver device, it is locally raised to about l〇 (the high temperature environment of the TC due to the heat of the LED light source 157266.doc -26 - 201222097). , or rise to a wet environment of about % RH%, but if the adhesive layer previously used is used, the layer having the uneven structure on the surface is not sufficiently adhered to the substrate. Therefore, if it is used for a long time, it will appear on the substrate. - a problem that bubbles are generated between the layers having the uneven structure on the surface, or the layer having the uneven structure on the surface is peeled off. However, as a result of intensive studies by the inventors, it has been found that if the material constituting the adhesive layer uses the storage elastic modulus G at 100 C, 40, 〇〇〇~180, 〇〇〇pa, can eliminate this problem. 〇About the material constituting the adhesive layer, except for the storage elastic modulus G at 100 °c, it is 40,000~180,000 ? The adhesive which is usually used can be used without limitation, and examples of such an adhesive include a hot melt adhesive, a thermosetting adhesive, a pressure sensitive adhesive, an energy ray curing adhesive, and a moisture absorbing adhesive. Agent, Dry adhesive, uv hardening adhesive, polymeric adhesive, two-liquid reactive adhesive, anaerobic adhesive, etc. Among these, from the viewpoint of workability, the most preferable pressure-sensitive type is Agent (adhesive). In particular, according to the study by the inventors of the present invention, if the storage elastic modulus of 1 〇〇ec is 40, 〇〇〇~18〇, the adhesive of 〇〇〇, Therefore, it is difficult to cause peeling between the layers of the substrate _ subsequent layer and the layer-surface having the uneven structure. Therefore, it is preferable to use the material as the adhesive layer as described above. The storage elastic modulus of the layer under the layer is further improved. Preferably, the temperature is 40,000 to 120,000 pa, more preferably 65 〇〇〇 to 12 〇〇〇〇 pa, and particularly preferably 65,000 to 95,000 Pa. If the storage elastic modulus is too small, the peeling tends to occur after sticking, and if it is too large, then If the storage elastic modulus is too small, it will foam when the substrate is made of acrylic resin, so it is not good. If it is 100°c, it is not good. The storage elastic modulus G is 4〇, 〇〇 The reason why it is difficult to cause peeling at the temperature of 丨8〇〇〇〇Pa is not clear, and it is presumed that the strain at a high temperature due to the difference in thermal expansion coefficient between the substrate and the layer having the uneven structure on the surface can be absorbed. However, the mechanism is not based on this. Here, 10 (the storage elastic modulus G under rc) refers to a result obtained by measurement under the following conditions, and 9 (TC or more, The value obtained by the average of the storage elastic modulus G' under TC is not reached. Further, as the measuring device, for example, ARES manufactured by TA Instr_nts Co., Ltd. can be used. Deformation mode: Torsing measurement frequency: fixed frequency 1 Hz Heating rate: 5 °C/min Strain: 0.2% • Measurement temperature: measured at a temperature up to 2 附近 from the glass transition temperature of the adhesive • Shape of the measuring part: Parallel plate 8mm # * pattern thickness · 〇. 8~1 mm. Pretreatment: at a temperature of 5 〇. The dryness of the hollowness is -3 MPa in 0.02 Mpa. The conditions under the loot in the present invention have the storage elastic modulus G under the one-to-one correlation relationship as the measurement conditions. The corresponding relationship of the value (G〇') obtained in the same manner as X is shown in Fig. E19. 157266.doc -28. 201222097 • Deformation mode: Torsing • Measurement frequency: fixed frequency 1 rad/s • Heating rate: 5°C/min • Strain: 2% • Measurement temperature: near the glass transition temperature of the adhesive to 2 〇〇(&gt;c is measured at temperature

• Measuring part shape: more than 25 mm parallel plate • Sample thickness: 0.8~2 mm • Pretreatment: No other, in terms of optical properties, the material of the subsequent layer is preferably 90% of the total light transmittance of the adhesive layer Above, the haze is below ^. Further, when the light guiding member is incorporated in the surface power source device or the illumination device or the like, the subsequent layer is disposed in the vicinity of the light source, and therefore the material of the bonding layer is preferably a person who can withstand the influence of the heat of the light source.

From the viewpoint of the above, the material of the adhesive layer (4) M W is a (meth) propylene glycol-based adhesive (hereinafter, simply referred to as "acrylic-based adhesive" X contains (meth)acrylic polymerization. (a polymer containing (a methyl acid as a monomer component) as a base polymer (preferably containing 3 〇 mass% 'more preferably 5% by mass or more of an adhesive) or an amino decanoic acid Adhesives such as vinegar-based adhesives and rubber-based adhesives. Examples of rubber-based adhesives include natural rubber and natural rubber:: copolymer of acrylic acid components such as acrylic acid methyl vinegar, and stupid ethylene. Desirables and their hydrides, 10,000 thiophenes and their hydrides, etc. Among them, the 2 _ _ butyl benzene benzene block copolymer is preferably natural rubber and methacrylic acid 157266.doc -29. 201222097 ester, etc. A copolymer of an acrylic component. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Examples of the acrylic adhesive include those produced by a method described later or a commercially available acrylic adhesive. Examples of the acrylic adhesive to be sold include, for example, MO-30. 06C (manufactured by Lintec), MO-3012C (manufactured by Lintec), 8171JR (manufactured by 3M), 8172JR (manufactured by 3M), and Panaclean PD-Sl (manufactured by Panac) Mastack TR-1801 (manufactured by Fujimori Industrial Co., Ltd.), Mastack TR-1802 (manufactured by Fujimori Industrial Co., Ltd.), CCL/D2-L/T5T5, 3⁄4 (manufactured by New Tac Kasei), CCL/Dl/T3T3 (Manufactured by New Tac Kasei), EXC10-076 (made by Toyo Ink), LUCIACS CS9621T (made by Nitto Denko), LUCIACS HJ9150W (made by Nitto Denko), DH425A (share) Sun A. Kaken), etc., but is not particularly limited thereto. For example, when the surface having the uneven structure is polyethylene terephthalate, the material of the substrate is polydecyl acrylate and at 85 ° C When used in an environment, the above-mentioned adhesive is preferably PD-S1, TR-1801A, CCL/D1/T3T3, MO-3006C, EXC10-076. In addition, it can withstand at a high temperature of 100 〇C. The adhesive to be applied is PD-S1, TR-1801A, CCL/D1/T3T3. The (meth)acrylic polymer as a base polymer of the acrylic adhesive, for example Preferably, the (fluorenyl) acrylic polymer obtained by copolymerizing 0.1 to 10% by mass of a monomer having a radical group or 0.1 to 10% by mass of a monomer having a slow group is 157266.doc. 201222097 As a monomer containing a radical, and can be, w ^ body and δ can be exemplified by: (fluorenyl) 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate, (meth) acrylate 丞 曰 曰, (mercapto) acrylic acid _4 _ hydroxybutyl ester, hydroxymethicone (meth) acrylate, and the like. Among them, when a monomer having a carboxyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms in the side chain is used, heat resistance is improved, which is preferable. These may be used singly or in combination of two or more. The copolymerization ratio when the above hydroxyl group-containing monomer is used is preferably 〇. /. More preferably, it is 0.3 to 7 mass% of the content of the above-mentioned monomer having a warp group.

When there is little, there is a case where the long-term sealing property is lowered. If it is too large, it may be hardened and the durability may be inferior. Examples of the thiol-containing monomer include (iv) acid, methyl (tetra) acid, itaconic acid, and cis is preferably acrylic acid and methacrylic acid. These may be used singly or in combination of two or more. The thiol group-containing monomer is more effective in terms of adhesion enhancement and improvement in heat resistance due to an increase in cohesive force. The copolymerization ratio of the carboxyl group-containing monomer is preferably 〇_丨 to 5 mass%, more Good for 0.2~3 quality. /. . When the amount of the carboxyl group-containing monomer is too small, the adhesion is inferior, and if it is too large, the hardness is deteriorated and the durability is poor, or the compatibility with the tackifier is greatly lowered, and the adhesive is white turbid. The situation is not good. In addition to these, as the monomer component of the (meth)acrylic polymer, a (meth)acrylate monomer having an alkyl group can be used. Examples of such a (meth)acrylate monomer having a burn group include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, propyl (meth)acrylate, and (meth)acrylic acid. N-butyl acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (methyl) 157266.doc -31- 201222097 isoamyl acrylate, hexyl methacrylate, (fluorenyl) Heptyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, (mercapto) acrylic acid m (methyl) propyl-based heterogeneous bean vinegar #. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Among them, in terms of imparting softness to the adhesive, it is preferred to use (meth)acrylic acid n-butyl at this time preferably in the (mercapto)acrylic polymer, 3 〇 to 99% by mass. More preferably 5〇~99% by mass. Further, in the (meth)acrylic polymer, other monomers (monomer components) which are copolymerizable may be appropriately copolymerized. Examples of the copolymerizable monomer include vinyl acetate, acrylamide, dimethylamine-based propylene, glyceryl-acrylic acid, styrene-methyl or methyl group. a fluorene-refractive-index monomer such as a styrene derivative such as styrene, a derivative such as vinyl phenyl or ethylidene toluene, (meth) acetoacetate or (meth) acetoacetate (methyl) Benzyl acetoxyacetate, phenoxy butyl acrylate, and the like. In addition, as the (meth)acrylic polymer, in particular, (meth) propylene having a carboxyl group-containing monomer in an amount of 0.1 to 30% by mass and (meth)acrylic acid n-butyr 30 to 99.9% by mass as a copolymerization component The dilute acid polymer is preferred, and the gel fraction is preferably adjusted to 30 to 90% by mass. In this way, the (meth)acrylic acid polymer can simultaneously achieve both the improvement of the internal cohesive force of the adhesive layer and the improvement of the flexibility. Therefore, the age of the light guiding member is relatively high (4), and the foaming phenomenon or the like occurs at the interface. Peel off the substrate. On the (meth)acrylic polymer, the car's father is 700,000 to 3 million. The weight average molecular weight is usually 600,000. If the weight average molecular weight is too small, 157266.doc -32 - 201222097 is insufficient in durability, and if it is too large, workability is deteriorated, which is not preferable. The (meth)acrylic polymer can be produced by any known method such as solution polymerization, bulk polymerization or emulsion polymerization. For example, in solution polymerization, it is preferred to use a polymerization initiator such as azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN) in an amount of 100 parts by mass based on the (fluorenyl) acrylic polymer, preferably 0.2 parts by mass. Q G5 to Q15 parts by mass are used. The (mercapto)acrylic polymer can be obtained by a reaction using a polymerization solvent such as ethyl acetate under a nitrogen gas stream at 5 Torr to 7 Torr for 8 to 30 hours. 〇 In order to adjust the refractive index of the (fluorenyl) acrylic polymer obtained in this way, the internal coagulation force of the inner port P can be improved or the heat resistance can be improved, and the modification can be carried out. For example, a monomer different from the monomer component of the (meth)acrylic polymer may be added in the presence of one part of the (mercapto) propionate-based polymer 100. 〇~200 parts by mass, preferably 10 to 100 parts by mass, and the medium is adjusted as necessary, and a graft polymerization reaction is carried out using 0.02 to 5 parts by mass of a peroxide, preferably 0. 04 to 2 parts by mass. . Here, the fluorene monomer different from the monomer component of the (fluorenyl) acryl-based polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include (meth)acrylic acid vinegar and (meth)acrylic acid phenoxy vinegar ( Acrylate naphthalene vinegar, (meth) acrylate bismuth: hydrazine: (meth) acrylate monomer, or styrene or α-methyl styrene, etc. A refractive index monomer between a derivative such as α-vinyl anthracene or the like. The refractive index of the (fluorenyl) acrylic polymer can be increased by using the above high refractive index monomer. * As a graft polymerization method, if it is solution polymerization, it is added to a solution of (mercapto) acetonium-based agglomerate, and the desired monomer and viscosity-adjusting solution 157266.doc -33-201222097 are added. After nitrogen substitution, 0.02 to 5 parts by mass of a peroxide, preferably 0.04 to 2 parts by mass, is added, and the mixture is heated at 50 to 80 ° C for 4 to 15 hours to carry out a graft polymerization reaction. In the case of emulsion polymerization, water is added to the aqueous dispersion of the (fluorenyl) acrylic polymer, and then the amount of the solid component is adjusted, and then the desired monomer is added, and the mixture is stirred with nitrogen to make (methyl) After the acrylic polymer particles absorb the monomer, a water-soluble peroxide aqueous solution is added, and the reaction is completed by heating at 50 to 80 ° C for 4 to 15 hours. As described above, by polymerizing the monomer in the presence of the (meth)acrylic polymer, a homopolymer of the monomer is formed, and graft polymerization with the (fluorenyl)acrylic polymer occurs, so that it is formed into A state in which a polymer containing other homopolymer is uniformly present in the acrylic copolymer. When the amount of the peroxide used as the initiator is small at this time, if the graft polymerization reaction is excessively taken, the amount of the monomer is too large, so that a large amount of a monomer homopolymer is formed, which is not preferable. In the adhesive, an adhesive-imparting agent such as an adhesive may be suitably added in addition to the base polymer such as a (fluorenyl)acrylic polymer. The above-mentioned adhesive is not particularly limited, and it is preferably one which is not colored and transparent. The transparency is preferably as follows in a Gardner hue in a 50% by mass solution. As the above-mentioned adhesive, for example, an adhesive having an aromatic ring and having a refractive index of from 1.51 to 1.75 is preferably used. Further, the weight average molecular weight of the adhesive is preferably from 1,000 to 3,000, and the softening point is preferably. It is 9〇c&gt;c or less. If the weight average molecular weight exceeds 3,000, or the softening point exceeds 9 〇χ:, there is a case where the compatibility with the (meth)acrylic acid polymer is lowered, and if the weight is 157266.doc •34·201222097, the average molecular weight is not When it reaches 1000, there is a case where the cohesive force of the adhesive is lowered. Specific examples thereof include a styrene oligomer, a phenoxyethyl acrylate oligomer, a copolymer of styrene and α-mercaptostyrene, a copolymer of vinyl toluene and α-f-styrene, and a C9 system. A hydride of a petroleum resin, a hydride of a terpene phenol resin, a hydride of rosin and a derivative thereof, and the like. In this case, in terms of heat resistance, it is preferable to set the softening point to 4 (the amount of the adhesive to be less than 30 parts by mass, and to use the adhesive having a softening point of 5 〇 ° or more). 2 parts by mass or more. The amount of the adhesive is 10 to 150 parts by mass, preferably 20 to 100 parts by mass, per 100 parts by mass of the solid content of the (meth)acrylic polymer. Therefore, the refractive index is adjusted to a specific refractive index. If the amount is too small, the refractive index rise is insufficient, and if it is too large, the hardness is hard and the adhesion is lowered. Therefore, a crosslinking agent can be suitably used in the adhesive. Especially when used (methyl When the propylene glycol-based polymer is used as the base polymer, it is preferred to improve the cohesive force and durability by crosslinking. 〇 As the above-mentioned crosslinking agent, an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent and an epoxy-based crosslinking agent are mentioned. a reagent, an oxazoline crosslinking agent, a peroxide, etc. Examples of the isocyanate s-based crosslinking agent include toluene diisocyanate vinegar, diphenyl ketone diiso-gas vinegar, and benzoic acid. Diisocyanatoacetic acid, isophorone: isocyanic acid, hexamethylene diisocyanate Diisocyanate s, a diisocyanate s|adduct of various polyols modified to form a polyisocyanate compound I of an isocyanuric acid vinegar ring, a biuret or an allophanate body. When the isocyanate 8 of the fat-reducing ring family is used, the cross (iv) is transparent = 157266.doc • 35·201222097 and can be preferably used. Further, the modified (meth) produced by emulsion polymerization is used. The aqueous dispersion of the acrylic polymer does not use an isocyanate crosslinking agent. In the case of use, since the isocyanate group easily reacts with water, it is also possible to use a blocked heterogas acid S. As the peroxide, it can be used as long as it generates a radical by heating to crosslink the base polymer of the adhesive. For example, peroxydicarbonate-di(2-ethylhexyl) can be used. Ester, peroxydicarbonate _ bis (4 - tert-butylcyclohexyl) S, peroxydicarbonate 2. second vinegar, peroxidation new: acid - butyl peroxy pivalic acid third vinegar, Peroxidic pivalic acid third vinegar, dilauric peroxide, oxidized peroxidation, peroxidation Dongyi f-hexanoic acid-1,1,3,3. Tetramethyl butyl vinegar, bis(4-methyl benzoate), over-emulsified benzophenone, third butyl peroxybutyrate, 1,1-two (third hexyl peroxide) ring hexagram, etc. Among them, Λ Λ ▲ ▲ 卉 ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ ̄ Benzoyl peroxide and the like are preferably used because the crosslinking reaction efficiency is particularly excellent. The above-mentioned peroxides may be used singly or in combination of two kinds, and the content as a whole is relative to Preferably, the base polymer 1 〇 0 夏 份 ' 含有 含有 较佳 较佳 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 If it does not reach 0. 03 parts by mass, then ... the case of the syllabus (four) is insufficient, and the other side, 'there is too much cross-linking, and the poorerness is in the case of the isocyanate compound of the fragrant family. 157266.doc -36 - 201222097 In the case of a cross-linking agent, there is a case where the adhesive is colored after hardening, so transparency is required. In the use (light-guiding member) of the present invention, it is suitable to use an aliphatic or alicyclic isocyanate. The blending amount of the parent binder as described above also varies depending on the type of the (fluorenyl) acrylic polymer to be used, and is usually in the range of 100 parts by mass relative to the (fluorenyl) acrylic polyδ. 3 to 2 parts by mass is preferably used within the range of hi quality damage. If it is too small, the cohesive force is insufficient, and if it is too large, the furtherness is lowered, which is not preferable. 〇 In addition, in the adhesive, it is also possible to add a Shixia burning coupler. Examples of the decane coupling agent include 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxydecane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxydecane, and 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxylate. An epoxy group-containing decane coupling agent such as decane or 2_(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyl decyloxydecane; 3-aminopropyltrimethoxydecane, anthracene-2-(aminoethyl) )_3_Aminopropylmethyldimethoxydecane, 3-diethoxyindolyl dimethyl butyl butyl propylamine, fluorenyl phenyl-3-aminopropyltrimethoxy (A)-containing decane coupling agent such as decane; (meth) propylene fluorenyl group containing 3-propenyl methoxy propyl trimethoxy decane, 3-methyl propylene oxy propyl triethoxy decane A decane coupling agent such as a decane coupling agent; an isocyanate group-containing decane coupling agent such as 3-isocyanate propyl triethoxy decane. The use of such a sulphur coupling agent is preferred for improving the durability of the adhesive. In addition, the adhesion of the adhesive to the glass substrate is also improved. The above-mentioned sulphur coupling agent may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds thereof, and the decane coupling agent is preferably contained in an amount of 100 parts by mass based on the (meth)acrylic polymer. 0 01~2 quality 157266.doc -37· 201222097 parts, more preferably 0.02~1 parts by mass. If the amount is less than 1 part by mass, the effect of improving the durability may be inferior. On the other hand, if it exceeds 2 parts by mass, the adhesion may be excessively increased and the removability may be poor. The adhesive may also contain a very small amount of an organic solvent, for example, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, cyclohexanol, benzyl alcohol, diethyl ether, 14-dioxane, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, gas imitation, toluene, m-xylene, p-xylene, o-xylene, n-hexane, cyclohexane, methyl acetate, Ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, propyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl acetate, pentyl acetate/amyi acetate, isoamyl acetate, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), ring The hexanone, hydrazine, hydrazine dimethyl carbamide (DMF, dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), etc. are not particularly limited. For the (meth)acrylic poly s material, 1 part by mass, such The organic solvent preferably contains from 0.01 to 1 part by mass, more preferably from 0.1 to 0.5 parts by mass, more preferably from 1 to 〇. If the content is more than 1 part by mass, the self-adhesive is present. The organic solvent dissolves the substrate or the layer having the uneven structure on the surface, which is not preferable. When the amount is 0.001 parts by mass, there is a case where drying time and drying cost are relatively expensive. The adhesive may also contain other known additives, for example, may be appropriately added depending on the use: a vulcanizing agent, a powder for imparting adhesion, a coloring agent, a pigment, and the like. , dyes, surfactants, plasticizers, surface lubricants, leveling agents, softeners, antioxidants, anti-aging agents, light stabilizers, UV absorber polymerization inhibitors, inorganic or organic fillers, metal powders, Particles, foils, etc. Alternatively, a redox system with a reducing agent of 157266.doc -38-201222097 may be used within a controllable range. Further, when the light guiding member is manufactured, the (four) agent is Prepared by laminating on the release-treated support. For example, the adhesive is applied to the release-treated support to be dried and cross-linked to form an adhesive layer.

The sheet. Specifically, the plaque I is applied to the release-treated support to be dried, and is placed on the pelt, and the detached film is relatively weak. Make a sheet with an adhesive. Alternatively, the adhesive may be applied to the support after peeling treatment and dried, and then adhered to the base material. As such a support material, for example, a polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate or polybutylene terephthalate containing polyethylene naphthalate or ethylene diacetate may be contained by electromagnetic radiation such as ultraviolet rays or electron beams. Resin, acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, thermoplastic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin, polymethylpentene resin, etc. 'containing polyester acrylate, amide amide, epoxy A transparent substrate such as a resin obtained by curing an ionizing radiation-curable resin such as an oligomer such as a propyl acrylate or an acrylate-based monomer, and a polyphenylene terephthalate is generally used from the viewpoint of economy. Ethylene formate. Further, as the release treatment, a polyfluorene oxide layer may be applied, or an embossed shape or the like may be given. As a method of applying the adhesive, any coating method such as a reverse coating method, a knife coating method, a lip coating method, or a slit extrusion coating method can be used to adhere to the usual drying. The treatment is carried out in such a manner that the thickness of the agent is 2 to 5 Å μηι, preferably 5 to 100 μηη. In the case where the adhesive contains a crosslinking agent, it may be applied to a support which has been subjected to stripping on a 157266.doc •39·201222097, and the gel fraction of the adhesive after crosslinking is used. It is 30 to 90% by mass, preferably 4 to 9 % by mass, more preferably "~ by mass%. If the rate of gelation is too small, the cohesive force is poor. If it is too large, then it is continued. If it is inferior in properties, when it is placed in this range, it can suppress the occurrence of moisture or residual monomers from the substrate when it is bonded to an acrylic substrate or the like, thereby suppressing the interface between the two materials (4). Foaming phenomenon. The gel fraction of the so-called "adhesive" refers to the ratio of the substance which is not dissolved in the ethyl acetate in the adhesive, and indicates the ratio (% by mass) of the cross-linker. Determination of fractions) The gel fraction can be measured as follows. Adhesive g is taken at room temperature (about 25 〇 under immersion in acetic acid in acetonitrile 7 曰. Thereafter, it will be impregnated The adhesive (insoluble matter) was taken out from ethyl acetate and dried at 130 ° C for 2 hours. The mass is 霄26. The gel fraction is calculated by the gel fraction (% by mass) = (1^2/|1)\1〇〇. The material constituting the adhesive layer is TMA at 100t (thermomechanical analysis, thermo The mechanical analysis) is preferably in the range of ~2, more preferably squeaking, more preferably 〇~〇.5. If the shift of τμα is too small, then (4) is prone to stripping. If it is too large, it will be It is not good due to heat, so it is not good. (Measurement of displacement of thermomechanical analysis (ΤΜΑ)) Thermomechanical analysis is carried out under the following conditions: • Device: TMa/ssi2〇157266.doc manufactured by Seikolnstrumems Co., Ltd. • 40· 201222097 • Detector: needle detector (tip diameter: 1 mm) • Load: 10 mN (1.02 g) • Environment: air • Temperature range: 30 ° C ~ 200 ° C • Heating time: 5 ° C / Min • Measurement sample: Cut the thickness of 25 μηι into 5 mm square and stick it on the quartz disk (10mm#). The TG/DTA (weight reduction rate) of the material constituting the adhesive layer at 10 °C 〇 preferably is in the range of 0 to -0.4%, more preferably 0 to -0.3%, more preferably 0 to -0.2%. If the above TGA is too large, it will be hot The deterioration of the adhesive layer is unsatisfactory. (Measurement of thermogravimetric analysis) The thermogravimetric analysis was carried out under the following conditions: • Apparatus: TG/DTA220 manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. • Environment: nitrogen (flow: 250 ml) /min) • Temperature range: 30 ° C ~ 200 ° C ❹ • Heating time: 10 ° C / min • Sample preparation: The thickness of 25 μπι of the back layer is folded in a total mass of 10 mg, set in the sample In the container. The peeling strength of the material constituting the adhesive layer is preferably in the range of 0.3 to 1.5 N/mm, more preferably 0.4 to 1.2 N/mm, still more preferably 0.5 to 1.0 N/mm. When the peeling strength is too small, peeling or the like is likely to occur after sticking, and if it is too large, the workability (reworkability) is lowered, and manufacturing is difficult, which is not preferable. (Measurement of peel strength) 157266.doc -41 - 201222097 The peel strength was measured under the following conditions. • Device: RTG-1210 manufactured by A&D Company • Peeling angle: 90° • Peeling speed: 50mm/min. Measuring distance: 50 mm • Test environment: temperature 23 ° C, humidity 50% • Adhesive sample: After bonding the adhesive layer on the polyethylene terephthalate film (Cosmoshine A43 00 manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., thickness 75 μm), the width was cut to 3.5 mm and bonded to an acrylic plate (Kanase Industrial, Kanase Lite 1300, Thickness: 2 mm, size 25 cm&gt;&lt; 3 cm), which was placed in an environment of a temperature of 23 ° C and a humidity of 50% for one day, and was obtained as a measurement sample. The refractive index of the material constituting the adhesive layer is preferably in the range of 1.40 to 1.70, more preferably 1.45-1.65, still more preferably 1.45 to 1.60. (Measurement of Refractive Index) The measurement of the refractive index was carried out under the following conditions. The sodium D line (589 nm) was irradiated at 25 ° C, and the refractive index was measured using an Abbe refractometer (manufactured by ATAGO, DR = M4). The thickness of the layer is not limited, and for example, the total light transmittance of the layer can be adjusted to 90% or more, and the haze is 1.0 or less. If the thickness of the adhesive layer is 5 to 200 μm, the substrate is laminated between the layers. It is preferable that the layer having the uneven layer structure on the surface layer and the surface is less likely to be peeled off. The thickness of the layer is more preferably 10 to 1 μm, more preferably 15 to 50 μm, and even more preferably 20 to 30 μm. When the thickness of the adhesive layer is too thin, when the fine unevenness is present on the substrate 157266.doc -42 - 201222097, the adhesive layer cannot follow the unevenness (the unevenness cannot be absorbed), and the probability of occurrence of poor adhesion increases. On the other hand, if the thickness of the subsequent layer is too thick, the area of the cross section is increased. Therefore, when the light guide plate is manufactured, the probability of occurrence of defects such as extrusion of the adhesive or agglomeration increases. Further, if the thickness of the adhesive layer is too thick, there is a case where the length of the same reel diameter is shortened when the subsequent layer is wound into a roll shape and operated in the squeezing step. A purlin or a plurality of strips may be formed on the side of the adhesive layer on the side opposite to the substrate (4) for separating the bubbles generated at the high temperature and multi-ordering the light-emitting plate into the fine grooves which are released to the outside by the substrate-sublayer layer. groove. The width, cross-sectional shape, depth, and the like of the groove are not limited, and the width thereof is preferably 〇 5 _ or less and more preferably 0.3 to O.Oi mm. Further, the depth can be set, for example, to 〇5 to 〇〇ι. The length of the groove is also undefined, and (iv) is the length of the cross section or the longitudinal section. Hereinafter, the layer having the uneven structure on the surface will be described. The thickness of the layer having the uneven structure on the surface is not limited, and is preferably about 25 to 5 μmη from the viewpoint of adhesion between the subsequent layers. If it is too thin, ❹ is insufficient in rigidity, and the workability when it is bonded to the substrate is lowered. On the other hand, if it is too thick, the rigidity is excessively strong, and the workability of the bonding is lowered, so that it is more preferably 50. ~300 μηη. The layer having the uneven structure on the surface has a multi-layered structure comprising: a transparent base film layer, and a resin layer having a plurality of concave or convex portions on the surface laminated thereon. In this case, the material of the resin layer having a textured structure on the surface is not limited. Examples 157266.doc • 43. 201222097 A cured product of a photopolymerizable resin composition, and the like. In addition, the material of the transparent base film layer, the thick ancestors, the rhythm, and the like are not limited, and examples of the material are as follows: for example, poly-ply, bismuth, sputum, polyethylene, polystyrene, etc. are highly transparent ( For example, a polymer material having a total light transmittance of not less than or equal to a standard and having a haze of 1,0 or less may have a thickness of, for example, 125 Q μηι, more preferably 50 to 125 μπι. The photopolymerizable resin composition is preferably the same as the resin layer of the diffusion sheet of the first invention of the present specification, that is, the addition polymerization property of (4) / having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group. Monomer 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (Β) photopolymerization initiator: 〇Buchuan mass%. As the addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, for example, a compound represented by the following formula (1) containing a biphenyl group can be used. Formula (I) [Chemical Formula 3]

(I) (In the formula (I), R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and X represents a part or all of a divalent organic group having at least an alkyl group.) A compound having a structure represented by the above formula (I) is preferred. The compound in which the substituted position of the biphenyl group is an ortho or para position and X is a divalent organic group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (II). Further, in the formula (II), R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and hydrazine is independently 157266.doc -44 - 201222097 represents an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, and η represents an integer of 1 to 3. General formula (II) [Chemical 4]

In addition, as an addition polymerization monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, it may be used in addition to the compound represented by the above formula (1). A compound of an acrylate group or an allyl group, for example, a nonylphenol acrylate, an alkoxylated (1) o-phenylene acrylate, a 2-hydroxy-3-phenoxypropyl acrylate, β -Hydroxypropyl-β,-(propylene decyloxy)propylphthalate, 1,4-butanediol di(meth)acrylate vinegar, 1,6-hexanediol di(methyl) Acrylate, iota, cyclohexanediol di(decyl) acrylate, octadecyl di(decyl) acrylate, glycerol (methyl) acrylate vinegar, 2-di(p-hydroxybenzene) Propane di(meth) acrylate, propylene glycol di(meth) acrylate, tri-propyl propyl propyl tris(decyl) acrylate vinegar, polyoxypropyl trimethylolpropane tri Methyl) acrylate, polyoxyethyl dihydroxy decyl propane tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa Acrylate, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether tri(meth)acrylate, bisphenol quinone diglycidyl ether di(indenyl) acrylate, diallyl phthalate, polyethylene glycol Di(meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, bis(triethylene glycol methacrylate) nona-propylene glycol, bis(tetraethylene glycol methacrylate) polypropylene glycol, double (triple-triethyl Glycol methyl acetoacetate) polypropylene glycol, bisaryl derivative, 157266.doc -45- 201222097 bis(diethylene glycol acrylate) polypropylene glycol, bisphenol octa (meth) acrylate single The molecule of the body contains a compound of both an oxyethylene chain and an oxypropylene chain, etc. Among the above, from the viewpoint of refractive index, alkoxylated (1) o-phenylphenol acrylate is preferable, and particularly preferred is ethoxylation ( 1) o-phenylphenol acrylate (for example, 'product name A-LEN-1〇, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.). In addition, hexamethylene diisocyanate, toluene diisocyanate, etc. can also be used. Cyanate vinegar compound and (mercapto)acrylic acid _2 A urethane compound of a hydroxy acrylate compound. The urethane compound at this time is preferably a polystyrene-equivalent number average molecular weight obtained by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). 10,000. The monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The content of the (4) addition polymerizable monoterpene in the photopolymerizable resin composition is preferably the total mass of the photopolymerizable resin composition. The basis is 70 mass/〇 or more and 99.9% by mass or less, more preferably 75 f% by mass or more and 95 mass% or less. From the viewpoint of sufficiently hardening, it is preferably 7 () mass. 4 or more, considering The content of the compound represented by the above formula (I) is preferably from 50 to 95% by mass. The content of the compound represented by the above formula (I) is preferably 99.9% by mass or less. From the viewpoint of increasing the refractive index of the resin layer, it is preferably 50% by mass or more, and is 95% by mass or less from the viewpoint of preventing a decrease in photocurability. (B) Photopolymerization initiator in the above photopolymerizable resin composition, 157266.doc • 46- 201222097

For example, benzophenyridinyl ketal, benzoin diethyl ketal, benzoin dipropyl condensate, benzoin diphenyl ketal, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin yoke, benzoin Shout, benzoin benzene bond, ^ oxygen sulphate, 2,4_ dimethyloxosulfuric acid (tetra), 2,4_diethyloxosulfide ~ star, 2_isopropyl oxo-star, 4 -iso@基_9_oxygen. Hawthorn, 2,4_diisopropyl oxazepine, 2-fluoro·9·oxysulfide·f, 4 prepared 9_oxysulfur-f, 2_gas_9_oxythiopurine, 4- Gas-9-oxopurine, 丨-chloro-'propoxy- 9-oxythione, benzophenone, 4,4'-bis(dimethylamino)benzophenone [micilenone] ], 4,4'-bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone, 2-cysyl-2-methyl-phenyl-propyl Aromatic (four) such as small ketones; 2_(o-phenyl) 4,5, a merimidin dimer, etc.; acridines such as phenyl η acridine, α, α-dimethoxy Base-α-morpholinyl-nonylthiophenylacetophenone, 2,4,6-trimethylphenylnonyldiphenylphosphine oxide, stupid glycine acid, hydrazine-styl glycine; And ι_phenyl_丨, 2_propanedione_2_〇_benzamide, 2,3-di- oxy-3-phenylpropionate ethyl ester 2_(〇_benzothymidine Anthracene esters such as carbonyl hydrazine; p-didecylaminobenzoic acid, p-diethylaminobenzoic acid, p-isopropylamine basic decanoic acid, and the acetate with benzoic acid, 3-mercapto-1,2,4-tris-tris, etc.; tetrasal; phenylglycine, N-methyl-N- N-phenylglycines such as phenylglycine, N-ethyl-N-phenylglycine, and 1-phenyl-3-phenylethenyl-5-phenyl-π-pyrene Iv_(4-Terbutyl-phenyl)-3-styryl·5-phenyl than 嗤 丨, 丨 phenyl _ 3-(4·t-butyl-styryl)-5-( 4-tert-butyl-phenyl)-D is more than a salidyl group such as oxazoline. Among them, 2-hydroxy-2-indolyl-1-phenylpropanone is preferred (Example 157266. Doc • 47· 201222097, for example, DAROCURE 1173, Ciba Specialty Chemicals). The content of the photopolymerization initiator (B) in the photopolymerizable resin composition is preferably the total mass of the photopolymerizable resin composition. The basis is 〇丨% by mass or more and 30% by mass or less, and more preferably j% by mass or more and 2% by mass or less. If the content of (B) is 〇% by mass or more, sufficient light hardening sensitivity can be obtained. In the following, the storage stability of the liquid resin before photohardening can be obtained. In order to improve thermal stability and storage stability, it is preferred to include the photopolymerizable resin composition. Free radical polymerization inhibitor Examples of such a radical polymerization inhibitor include p-nonoxyphenol, hydroquinone, pyrogallol, naphthylamine, t-butyl catechol, cuprous vapor, 2,6- Di-t-butyl-p-cresol, 2,2,-methylenebisethyl-6-tert-butylphenol, 2,2,_methylenebis(4_methyl_6_ Tributylphenol) and the like. The content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 〇·〇〇 1% by mass or more and 1% by mass or less based on the total mass of the photopolymerizable resin composition. The photopolymerizable resin composition may contain a small amount of an organic solvent, and for example, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, cyclohexanol, benzaldehyde, diethyl ether, 1,4-dioxane, ethylene glycol may be used. Monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl _, ethylene glycol mono-acetic acid acetate, chloroform 'toluene, m-diphenylene, p-diphenyl, o-diphenyl, n-hexane, ring Hexane, decyl acetate, ethyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, propyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl acetate, pentyl acetate/amyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, 157266.doc -48 - 201222097 Acetone, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), cyclohexane, dimethyl ketoamine (Qing), dimethyl sub-brain, etc., are not particularly limited. The organic solvent preferably contains 0.00 parts by mass, more preferably 〇〇〇1 to 〇5 parts by mass, still more preferably 0.00!~0" parts by mass. When the content of lf or more is contained, the organic solvent produced from the photopolymerizable resin composition dissolves the other materials to be contacted, which is not preferable. When the content is less than lf, the drying time and drying cost are relatively low, so it is not preferable.

The refractive index of the photopolymerizable resin composition after curing is preferably in the range of 1.4 to 70, more preferably 145 to 165, still more preferably 145 to 16 Å. When the right refractive index is lower than 1.4 G', the light guide plate of the present invention is made into a surface light source device, and the resin layer having the uneven structure on the surface of the material has a reduced ability to achieve uniformity of brightness due to the light source. If the refractive index is higher than 17 Å, it is difficult to manufacture. (Measurement of Refractive Index) The measurement of the refractive index was carried out under the following conditions. The sodium lanthanum line (589 nm) was irradiated under the ring of 25 C, and the refractive index was measured using an Abbe refractometer (manufactured by ATAGO Co., Ltd., DR = M4). In addition, when the thickness of the resin layer having the uneven structure on the surface is too thin, the uneven structure cannot be formed, and if it is too thick, the resin layer becomes brittle and cracks occur, and when it is left at a high temperature for a long time. The color change is beyond the scope of the valley. In view of the above, the thickness can be set to 2 to 5 μm η °. Further, in the resin layer having the uneven structure on the surface, it is also possible to mix, for example, fine particles having an average particle diameter of about 2 μηι for improving optical performance. Give I57266.doc -49- 201222097 internal diffusion performance. Further, in the examples, an ultraviolet curable resin which does not have such internal diffusion properties is used. In the light guide plate of the present invention, the human face is at least! It can be 2 or more. When the surface of the light guide plate is included, the shape of the light guide plate is preferably a flat rectangular parallelepiped having a light exit surface and a counter surface as a main surface, and it is preferable that the two light incident surfaces face each other. At this time, since the lengths of the two light-incident surfaces are the same, the advantages of the parts can be achieved by making the number or type of the point light sources the same. The thickness of the light guide plate (the distance between the light exit surface and the opposite surface to the light guide surface) is not limited, and may be, for example, about 2. 〇 5 5 mm. (4) of the light guide plate of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it has a translucent core. For example, poly(acrylic acid), polycarbonate, polystyrene, methyl methacrylate styrene A filament material or the like which is generally used as a material of two optical materials (IV) an inorganic material such as glass. The light guide plate of the present invention may also be used as an organic or inorganic dye or pigment which does not impair the object of the present invention. Matting agent, heat stabilizer - agent, flame retardant antistatic agent, defoamer, color former, antioxidant, ultraviolet absorber, chowder and mold release agent, etc. In the light guide plate of the present invention, in the concave-convex structure (a plurality of concave portions or convex portions) in which a plurality of concave portions (protrusions) have a long anisotropic shape, the opening portion (bottom portion) has a specific portion. In one direction, the surface shape is displayed in a direction perpendicular to the specific one direction (that is, the direction of the opening (bottom surface) of the concave portion (the convex portion 157266.doc -50 - 201222097 portion)) Max, with the above specific Small scattered angle. °Diffuse angle in the direction parallel to the most diffuse angle (the ray is perpendicular to the degree (the FWH is perpendicular to the angle of the divergence angle of the outgoing light when entering the first plane, / no limit) is perpendicular to the above-mentioned specific direction. The diffusion angle in the direction of the light-emitting surface is preferably 3 Å, more preferably 40 or more, more preferably %, and more preferably 50 or more, and particularly preferably 65 or more. Preferably, it is 12 〇. Ο Ο 9 〇〇 or less. J Feng 丄 00 or less, or in another aspect, the diffusion angle in one of the specific directions (perpendicular to the direction of the light exiting surface) is recommended to be 1 〇. Next, the optimum is .5. The following. Preferably, the value of 5 or less is more preferably 丨. In addition, the comparison of the maximum value of the diffusion angle with respect to the minimum value is preferably more than 400. When the ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle to the minimum value is within the above range, the luminance unevenness can be further reduced. Further, the ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle to the minimum value will be described later with respect to the third invention of the specification. The description will be described in detail. The diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the parallel direction can be adjusted by changing the shape, depth (height), pitch, and the like of each concave portion (protrusion portion), and when the groove structure is formed by the speckle pattern In addition, the diffusion characteristics are preferably substantially constant in the entire region in which the uneven structure is formed, except for the case where the diffusion conditions of the laser light are appropriately changed. 157266.doc •51· 201222097 Here, the term “diffusion angle” refers to the angle at which the transmitted light intensity is attenuated to one-half of the peak intensity (half-value angle) (FWHM: Full Width Half Maximum) Amplitude)) (refer to Fig. 8). The diffusion angle can be changed, for example, by using Phnt〇n manufactured by Photon Inc., or NanoScan of a beam analyzer, or GC5000L manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. An analysis of the angular distribution of the transmitted light intensity of light incident on the concave-convex structure from the normal direction of the surface on which the uneven structure is formed (the distribution of the transmitted light intensity with respect to the exit angle) In particular, the measurement of FWHM of 1 or less is most suitable for measurement using Nano Sc an. Here, the normal direction of the surface on which the uneven structure is formed refers to the direction shown in FIG. 'The definition of the above diffusion angle is preceded by the fact that the angular distribution of the transmitted light intensity has a maximum peak near 0 degrees and monotonically decreases toward both sides of the maximum peak, but when (1) the maximum peak exists outside the center, or (2) The transmission intensity of the peak exists at a specific angle, that is, the maximum width (width of the root) of the peak is 10. When the peak is below, the fundamental meaning of the diffusion angle can be referred to, and (1) transmission near 0 degree is used respectively. The half-value width of the value of the light intensity, (2) The half-value width of the transmission intensity obtained by taking the moving average in the range of 15°. Further, in the theory (Snell's law), if the substrate does not have internal diffusion properties, the diffusion angle is not affected by the refractive index of the substrate, but depends on the refractive index of the material forming the surface on which the uneven structure is formed. Therefore, if the method of the above (3) is used as a method of forming the uneven structure on the light incident surface of the light guide plate, 157266.doc •52-201222097, the diffusion angle is measured regardless of the film having the uneven structure, or There was no change in the measurement of the measurement of the diffusion angle in the state in which it was bonded to the final form on the light guide plate. Further, according to the method of the above (1) and (2), a thin moon can be formed by cutting the surface parallel to the light incident surface, and the diffusion angle of the sheet can be measured. In addition, when the surface opposite to the surface to be measured is not smooth, measurement may be performed by cutting the surface or the like to form a smooth surface, or transferring the surface shape of the surface to be measured to The material having the same refractive index on the surface was measured using this material (even if the unevenness was reversed, the angular distribution of the transmitted light intensity incident from the twist direction did not change), and the diffusion angle did not change. Further, it is preferable that the light emission angle is 0 when the light is incident from the normal direction to the light incident surface on which the uneven structure is formed. The transmitted light intensity of light is 90°/min. the above. Specific examples are shown in FIGS. 1S(A) and (B). Fig. 15 (A) and Fig. 15 (B) show the angular distribution of the transmitted light intensity of the film having the embossed structure measured by GC5 〇〇〇 L manufactured by Sakamoto Denshoku Co., Ltd. The transmitted light intensity of the ◊ (hollow) portion in the figure is 90% of the peak intensity or more in any angular distribution at the exit angle = 〇. The transmitted light intensity is 90% or more of the peak intensity. As described above, the surface shape of the light incident surface on which the uneven structure is formed is preferably such that the angular distribution of the transmitted light intensity of the light when the human light is emitted from the normal direction does not have a plurality of peaks, but changes smoothly. In the light guide plate of the present invention, it is presumed that the anisotropic diffusion property generated by the plurality of concave portions 157266.doc •53-201222097 or the surface shape of the convex portion as described above can improve the unevenness of brightness such as hot spots. effect. Furthermore, the technique disclosed in Patent Document 5 also utilizes anisotropic diffusion characteristics. However, the method of dispersing the filler is difficult to obtain an anisotropic flaw with high precision, and does not necessarily diffuse in the direction of the light guide plate. The angle is the largest. If such a member having such an anisotropic accuracy is placed on the light incident surface, the light guiding efficiency is deteriorated. Further, since the anisotropy is insufficient, the light leakage after the light is incident on the light guide plate is also intensified, and the quality suitable for the display device or the surface light source device cannot be obtained. Further, in the technique disclosed in Patent Document 5, the anisotropy is imparted by the refraction between the adhesive and the filler, but since the refractive index difference between the two is small, the profit method is used to remove the lead plate. - The diffusion angle in the direction is a sufficiently large value. In contrast, the light guide plate of the present invention achieves anisotropic diffusion characteristics by the surface shape of the uneven structure, so that it is possible to stably obtain anisotropic diffusion characteristics with high precision by controlling the surface shape thereof. In the present invention, in which the anisotropic diffusion property is realized by the surface shape, the refractive index of the anisotropic diffusion occurs in air (the refractive index is about (10) the material constituting the uneven structure (resin or resin composition). (Between the refractive index and the refractive index is approximately m 6 ), the length of the opening (bottom surface) of the concave portion (protrusion portion) can be made as compared with the technique disclosed in Patent Document 5 in which the refraction between the adhesive and the filler is used. The diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the radial direction is a large value. If the human light surface of the light guide plate of the present invention is further filled with the necessary conditions as described below, the luminance unevenness is further reduced. The light diffusion characteristic is derived from the normal angle of the incident light of 157266.doc •54·201222097. The diffusion angle of the incident light in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface is larger than the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. The exit angle of the light emitted from the normal direction of the light incident surface in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface is the horizontal axis, and the light exit pattern of the light incident surface having the intensity as the vertical axis is passed through the exit curve. The intensity of the outgoing light in the pattern curve is the peak point of the peak intensity, and the intensity of the outgoing light is the middle point of one-half of the peak intensity. The normal distribution curve of the total of 3 points is compared to 'satisfy the following conditions丨. And/or condition 2.: Ο

Condition 1. The range of the exit angle where the intensity of the emitted light is 3/4 or more of the peak intensity is narrower than the normal distribution curve; Condition 2. The range of the exit angle of the intensity of the emitted light is 1/1〇 or more of the peak intensity than the normal distribution. The curve is wide. These necessary conditions will be described in detail in the description of the second invention of the present specification which will be described later. Next, the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the present invention will be described. In the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the present invention, a groove structure substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light-incident surface may be provided. When such a groove structure is provided on the wire exit surface, the straightness of suppressing the diffusion of light emitted from the light-emitting surface can be improved. Therefore, the light guide plate can be made suitable for local dimming dd dimming. It is preferred that the 4 groove structure on your soil is preferably a lenticular lens shape or a random complex groove. Which of the above-mentioned groove structure is placed on the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface can be appropriately determined in consideration of ease of manufacture, ease of handling, and the like. . - when placed on both the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface, but for example, when the opposite surface is provided with I57266.doc • 55· 201222097, the light scattering processing described later is preferably provided only on the light-emitting surface. . Further, from the viewpoint of reducing the hot spot in the region near the light incident surface, the groove structure is preferably disposed such that the distance from the light exit surface and/or the opposite surface to the inner side of the light incident surface side is 1 to 50 mm. The position begins and extends in the opposite direction to the light entrance surface. The flat ugly lens shape is preferably arranged to extend in a direction substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light incident surface, and is plural in parallel. The shape of the lentil lens is preferably 20 to 500 μm, and the depth is preferably 2 to 5 μm (see Fig. G19). If the pitch is too small, it is difficult to process the lenticular lens with high precision. If the pitch is too large, it is easy to generate mosquitoes with the pixels of the liquid crystal panel (". If the depth is too shallow, the straightness of the light is lowered, and if the depth is too deep, It is difficult to perform high-precision machining or to be easily damaged. Hereinafter, a plurality of random grooves are described. The plural groove irregularity refers to at least one of a sectional shape, a pitch, and a depth of a plurality of grooves. Random (irregular) different. Figure (1)" shows an example in which a plurality of random grooves are arranged substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light-incident surface, and the cross-sectional shape of each groove is limited to macro. ,

Glyph. ...Limited, for example, can be formed into a V-shape or U. The so-called groove spacing refers to the water between the valleys of adjacent grooves (with the surface of the groove having a random number of s ^ T set &lt; direction level distance). Furthermore, when the bottom of the valley is flat, ^ M uses the center as the bottom to determine the spacing. The shape or width of the groove can also be. The direction of the groove is changed by 157266.doc -56 - 201222097. In addition, the depth of the groove refers to the vertical distance between the mountain top of the mountain which is the upper side of each of the mountains and the valley bottom of the groove (the distance perpendicular to the plane having the random plurality of grooves) ( The height difference between the top of the mountain and the bottom of the valley). The depth of the groove may vary gently or steeply along the direction of extension. Alternatively, there may be a portion where the groove is interrupted in the middle, but it is preferably unchanged if it is achievable. Specific examples of the random plurality of grooves which can be preferably utilized in the present day and month are shown in Figs. G21A and G21B_. Figure G21A shows a random plurality of grooves having an anisotropic light diffusion characteristic with a diffusion angle (described later) perpendicular to the direction of the groove of 3 degrees and a diffusion angle of 1 degree parallel to the direction of the groove. A surface distribution diagram of a specific example of the groove. Fig. G21B shows a specific example of a random plurality of grooves having an anisotropic light diffusion characteristic in which the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the groove is 60 degrees and the diffusion angle in the direction parallel to the groove is 1 degree. Surface map. The average pitch of the plurality of random grooves is not limited, and is preferably 3 〇 μηη 〇 or less, more preferably 20 μπι or less, more preferably 1 5 μιη or less, and particularly preferably i 〇 μιη or less. Further, the average pitch of the random plurality of grooves is preferably 58 〇 nm (the center wavelength of visible light) or more, more preferably 78 〇 nm (the entire visible light region) or more. The pixel pitch of the display panel used in combination with the light guide plate or the structural pitch of the optical sheet is about 1 〇〇 600 600 。, and the average pitch of the random plurality of grooves is set to the above value, It can prevent the occurrence of embossing due to the spatial interference of the display panel or the optical sheet used in combination with the light guide plate. Further, if the average pitch is set to the above value, the number of fingers or the like stuck in the groove during operation is small, and the operability is improved. In addition, since the light guided by the light guide plate of the present invention is visible light (electromagnetic wave of 38 〇 nm to 780 nm), the direct evolution effect of the random plurality of grooves on the light is fully exerted, and the average pitch is below The limit value is preferably a value as described above. The average depth of the random plurality of grooves is also not limited, and it is preferable that the spell Km' is more preferably 5 to 10 μm. The angle of the bevel of the groove has a large influence on the straightness of the light. In other words, in the case where a groove structure is provided on the light-emitting surface or the opposite surface, in the light guide plate, the slope of the groove reflects the light to be diffused outward, and returns it to the light guide plate, thereby improving the light. Straightforward. Therefore, the angle of the slope of each groove is preferably from 40 to 60 degrees. Therefore, in the random plurality of grooves provided on the light-emitting surface or the opposite surface, the ratio of the slope angle of the groove to the range of 4 〜 to 6 较佳 is preferably 5% or more. More preferably, it is more than 1%. In addition, the more the proportion of 45±5 degrees, the more it helps to improve the straightness. Here, the "bevel angle" is a general term for the angle formed by the tangential line forming the surface of each groove and the surface having the groove structure on the cross section of the groove having a random number of grooves. In addition, the ratio of the slope angle in the range of 40 degrees to 60 degrees can be determined by the following methods: by microscopic observation (scanning electron microscope or laser confocal microscope, etc.) Any vertical section of the face of the plurality of grooves (perpendicular to the section of the groove structure) arbitrarily 157266.doc • 58 · 201222097 The extraction distance is in the range of 300 μηι, and then, from the end of the range, The point of the gap of 5 μιη is used as the tangent of the tangent point, and the angle (an acute angle) formed by the plane of the plurality of grooves having the benefit gauge is measured. Further, in the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the present invention, a light-scattering process having a gradual direction toward the light-incident surface can be formed to make the light-distributing light distribution uniform. Further, in the display device, it is considered to be preferable because the uniformity of the light distribution is improved and the light distribution of the uniform type Z of the highest luminance in the center of the pupil plane is formed.

As the light scattering addition I, for example, a dot pattern or a concave-convex shape is formed so as to gradually increase in area as the surface is separated from the human light surface, or a point or a concave-convex shape of the same size is narrowed as it leaves the light source. Gradient pattern. The shape of the point or the unevenness at this time may be _, a square or the like, and the size thereof may be, for example, about 0.1 to 2. 〇mm. In the light guide plate having a concave-convex structure on the human light surface of the present invention, the degree of arrival of the light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the disk (the direction of propagation of light) is different from that of the light incident surface. That is to say, there is a tendency that the light-emitting surface from the vicinity of the light-incident surface is increased in comparison with the light guide plate whose smooth surface is smooth, and on the other hand, it is white heat, since The amount of light emitted from the light exiting surface in a region farther apart from the light surface is reduced as compared with the leading surface in which the light incident surface is a smooth surface. Therefore, it is preferable to make the reflection surface close to (Μ ^ ^ ', which is formed into a shape more difficult to scatter than before (for example, a point or a point), compared with the X ^ ^ ν μ lead plate whose smooth surface is smooth. The shape of the concave and convex is determined to be sparse. The product is smaller, or the density is set. However, when the direction of light propagation from the light exiting surface is excessively large, 157266.doc •59·201222097 changes. The effect of having a gradual pattern is limited (for example, when changing the area, the area can only vary from 〇% or more to less than 1%). Figure D16 is the brightness of the illuminating surface. The distance (the direction of light propagation, the direction of the arrow 16 in Fig. 1) is taken from the χ axis, and the brightness is taken from the 0 mm of the X axis as the light incident surface of the light guide plate. The area from the side to the inner side of the 16.5 mm is fixed by a light-shielding plate to fix the distance between the light guide plate and the light source. Therefore, the brightness is zero. A light guide plate having a smooth surface for the normal light incident surface (Reference example) The light guide plate of the present invention (Production Example D-20), and The brightness of the light guide plate (Production Example D-37) in which the light-incident surface of the light plate is adhered to the normal diffusion sheet is compared, and it can be seen that the vicinity of the light-incident surface is compared with the reference example, the manufacturing example 〇 2〇 and Ο The brightness of the film is relatively the same, and the brightness of the manufacturing example D_2〇&amp;D_37 is relatively low at a distance from the light-incident surface. In the light guide plate of the present invention, it is preferable that the brightness and the smoothness of each position on the light-emitting surface are The value in the case of flat α is in the range of 1503⁄4 or less, more preferably 60% or more, 14% or less, more preferably 7〇% or more and 13% or less. The light scattering pattern of the reflecting surface can be easily designed in comparison with the value of the smoothing case. Alternatively, the light guiding plate of the present invention can also be used in the light emitting surface and/or the opposite surface by the frame ( The area B′ in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light-shielding portion of the light-shielding frame (the light-receiving device) and/or the light-shielding frame (the television receiving device) is disposed such that the light scattering degree of the partial region facing the light source is lower than between the light source and the light source. Part of the 157266.doc -60- 201222097 part of the light scattering of light scattering By the light-scattering process in which the light scattering degree of the partial region facing the light source is lower than the light scattering degree of the partial region between the light source and the light source is set in the region B near the light incident surface of the light shielding portion, It can complement the concave-convex structure provided on the light-incident surface (the light scattering processing in the vicinity of the light-incident surface provided on the light-emitting surface and/or its opposite surface, and the uneven structure provided on the light-incident surface compensate each other for uneven brightness unevenness) Insufficient effect), the brightness uniformity of the light-emitting surface is dramatically increased, and the ρ/G described later is increased.

In addition, the stomach is facing the point source (or part of the portion between the point source and the point source), which means that the direction of the light exit surface parallel to the light incident surface is set to the X axis 'will be perpendicular to the light incident surface. When the direction is set to the γ-axis, the partial light source (or the portion between the point source and the point (4)) has substantially the same X-coordinate partial region, and the partial light-scattering degree of the partial light source is lower than (or A light scattering degree that is substantially equal to a partial region of a portion between the point source and the point source "" means a partial region of the point source (which is substantially opposite to the light source) when the partial regions having the same γ coordinate are compared with each other The light scattering degree of the same X coordinate of the 4 knives 11 domain is lower (or approximately equal) to the point source 〇: between the original. The light scattering degree of a partial region of the p-score (a partial region having a substantially identical X coordinate with the point source and the point source). = the light surface and / or the opposite side of the frame (surface light source device) or blackout frame (electric

In the shading portion of the masking device, the light scattering degree of the partial region where the partial area of the point source is IA &quot;&quot; is less than 2 between the point source and the point source is implemented. -B near the light incident surface of the light scattering processing is preferably a strip-shaped region parallel to the light incident surface in the light shielding portion, but 157266.doc -61 - 201222097 is not required to be self-into the light side end portion (γ=〇 )Start. As a configuration in which the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source is lower than the portion (four) sub-regional radiance of the pair of point light: the body state, for example, the following aspect: a. Light scattering processing is performed on a region other than the portion of the light source of the light source (light scattering processing is performed on a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source); b. light scattering is performed over substantially the entire area near the light incident surface The illuminating is performed, and the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source is lower than that of the other partial regions (the partial light scatter of the portion between the point light source and the point light source is higher than that of the other partial regions). The light scattering processing is not limited, and those generally used in the field of optical materials can be used. For example, # may be provided by laminating or printing a pattern of a plurality of diffusing dots including a reflective or diffusing material; or a pattern of a plurality of solid dots such as a concavo-convex shape. The shape of the dots is not limited, and examples thereof include a circular shape, a square shape, and the like. The size thereof can be set, for example, to about 2 〇. The degree of light scattering can be controlled, for example, by adjusting each of the following: the concentration of the reflective (diffusing) substance in the diffusing point including the reflective (diffusing) material. The higher the degree, the higher the degree of light scattering; The shape of the solid point of the shape (for example, the higher the degree of light scattering when the same degree is over the surface); the area ratio of the part that forms a part (hereinafter referred to as the "dot density". Further, when the point density changes stepwise within the area The dot density of the region means a polygon 262 surrounded by the vertical bisectors 26a to 26f of the line # from the center of the connection point 26 and the center of the adjacent points A to F as shown in FIG. The ratio (%) of the area, the higher the dot density, the higher the light scattering degree, etc., and the dot density can be adjusted, for example, by the following methods: 157266.doc -62·201222097: the number of dots per unit area Fixed to change the area of each point; or 'reversely make the area of each point fixed so that the number of points per unit area (the distance between points) changes; or change the above two °

In the present invention, the region A of the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate that covers at least the non-light-shielding portion that is not shielded by the frame (surface light source device) or the light-shielding frame (television receiving device) may be included (including at least non-shielding). The portion may also include a light-shielding portion as a peripheral portion thereof to perform light-scattering processing. In this case, the range of the area A 较佳 is preferably set so as to have a region c to be described later between the area A and the area B. Further, it is preferable that at least the non-light-shielding portion of the region A has a light scattering degree of a partial region of the point-to-point light source and a light scattering degree of a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source. The region C sandwiched by the region A and the region B is preferably a strip-shaped region parallel to the light incident surface. In this case, the width of the region c is preferably 〇2 mm or more, more preferably 0.5 mm or more, and most preferably i. Mm or more. Further, the upper limit of the width © of the region c is preferably 3·〇 mm or less, more preferably 2.0 mm or less, and most preferably 1.5 mm or less. In the region C, the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source is not provided with light scattering processing, and the light scattering processing may not be provided at all in the entire region C. 70. Specific examples of the above-described light scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface. In addition, in the example of FIG. 18, the light-scattering processing is not performed on the partial region of the point light source in the region B near the light incident surface, and 157266.doc -63 - 201222097 is made to face the point in the vicinity of the light incident surface. The light scattering degree of a partial region of the light source is lower than the light scattering degree of a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source. In addition, in the example of FIG. 19, the spot light source is in the region B near the light incident surface. The area of each point of the partial area is set to be small, and the area of each point of the portion of the knife area between the point source and the point source near the human surface is set to be large, so that the surface is smooth. The light scattering of the partial region of the point source in the vicinity is lower than the light scattering of the portion of the portion between the point (4) and the point source. Fig. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the surface light source device and the television receiver of the present invention. The light-emitting area of the surface light source device is defined (limited) by a frame (BL_ackiight frame), and the display area of the television receiving device is defined (limited) by a light-shielding frame (black matrix). Fig. 28 shows another specific example of the above-described light-scattering processing of the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface in the present invention. In the example of Fig. 28, a region B (a strip-shaped region parallel to the light incident surface) in the vicinity of the light incident surface in the light shielding portion (that is, the display region or the outer side of the light emitting region) is configured to be a portion of the point light source The light scattering of the region is lower than the light scattering of the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source, so that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point source is lower than the right In the light eccentricity processing of the partial scattering of the partial region between the point source and the point source, the area of each point of the σ 卩 sub-region of the point source is set to be smaller in the region near the entrance surface. And the area 5 of each point of the partial region between the point source and the point source in the region near the entrance surface is larger, and the point 157266.doc -64 is in the region near the entrance surface. - 201222097 The light scattering of a partial area of the light source is lower than the light scattering of a part of the area between the point source and the point source. The non-light-shielding portion (that is, the display region or the light-emitting region) is such that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source and the partial light region of the portion between the point source and the point source are substantially The light scattering process is performed in an equal manner. Specifically, when the spot density is used to control the light scattering degree, the dot density of the region with the lowest dot density and the dot density of the region with the highest dot density in the region of the same distance from the light incident surface (the region having the same γ coordinate) The ratio of P2 (P2/P1) is preferably p/pGU, more preferably ^2 is p2/pl = l. By light-scattering processing and light-shielding/non-shielding portions configured to make the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source lower than the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source The positional relationship is as described above (that is, the light scattering processing is performed such that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source is lower than the partial light transmittance of the portion between the point source and the point source) In the light-shielding portion, it is possible to realize not only the positive G-plane but also the uneven brightness of the light-emitting surface/display surface from the oblique direction. Fig. 29 shows another specific example of the above-described light-scattering processing of the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface in the present invention. In the example of FIG. 29, the area B in the vicinity of the light incident surface set on the outer side (light incident side) of the light-shielding portion at a distance of a few mm from the non-shielding portion (display area or light-emitting area) is parallel to In the strip-shaped region of the light-incident surface, only a portion of the portion between the point light source and the point light source is formed at a density of 2 to 20 times the point of the non-light-shielding portion. In addition, the density 157266.doc -65- 201222097 is more suitable for 5-15 times, and most suitable is about 1 times. In this way, by performing light scattering processing only on a portion of the region B in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light-shielding portion that faces the point light source and the point light source, a virtual light source can be generated between the point light source and the point light source. The light source overlaps with the image of the actual light source, thereby reducing the brightness unevenness caused by the point light source. Further, in the example of FIG. 29, the non-light-shielding portion and its peripheral region (the boundary region in the vicinity of the boundary between the light-shielding portion and the non-light-shielding portion) are subjected to light scattering degree and partial light source of a partial region of the point light source A light scattering process in which a portion of a portion between the point light source and the point light source is substantially equal in light scattering forms a region A. Further, between the area A and the area B, there is a region C (a strip-shaped region parallel to the light incident surface) where no light scattering processing is provided. Further, the above-mentioned region B preferably starts from the outer side of the boundary between the distance-shielding portion and the non-shielding portion by 1 mm or more. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the user from visually recognizing the above-mentioned virtual light source when using the surface light source device or the television receiver. Further, light scattering processing (light scattering processing of a virtual light source) is performed on a partial region of a portion between the point light source and the point light source in the region B near the light incident surface, and it is preferable to impart a light scattering degree toward it. The gradual rise of the center (the middle of the light source and the light source). Thereby, the light from the left and right sides of the light source reaching a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source can be more strongly scattered toward the center portion, and is not scattered by the virtual light source processing portion. The Shenyang produces a dark part, thereby setting a natural virtual light source part. Further, as the density distribution of the gradation, it is preferable to set the density of the vicinity of the partial region of the 157266.doc -66 - 201222097 (the both ends in the direction parallel to the light incident surface of the light source of the virtual light source). It is more suitable for a gradation in a range of about 5% to 80% with respect to a partial region in the middle of the point light source and the point light source (the central region which is a direction in which the light source of the virtual light source is struck in the direction of the light incident surface) 10%~70°/. More suitably, it is 20%~50%, and most suitable is 30%~40%. When the light scattering degree is controlled by the dot density, it is preferable that the dot density pl of the lowest dot density region in the partial region of the direct-point light source in the region B near the light incident surface, and the region near the light incident surface The ratio (p2/pl) of the point density p2 of the highest dot density region in the partial region between the point source and the point source in B, and the p/g described later satisfy the following relationship, and adjust the dot density p1. P2 〇2.9^ l-4x(P/G)-p2/pl^ 3.1 where the point density p(%) of a region is the center point of the specific point (26) to be connected by the region, and adjacent to A vertical bisector (26a to f) of a line segment at a center point of a point (A to F) at a specific point is formed, and an area of a polygon (263) surrounding the special point is formed as a denominator, and the specific point is 26) The area as a numerator, and the value obtained by the area ratio of the other is expressed in % (refer to Fig. 26). Other specific examples of the above-described light scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface are shown in Figs. A1 to 10 . In addition, in the following table, the light-scattering process of FIG. 33 used in the light-scattering process and the manufacturing example A-11 mentioned later, the LED arrangement pitch, and the optical sheet (diffusion sheet laminated on the light-guide plate) are shown. A preferred combination of DS), prism and 157266.doc 67·201222097 Reflective Polarizer (DBEF). = When there is no special case in the table, the light enters the light incident surface of the lead plate from the normal direction (the opening (bottom surface) has a plurality of concave portions (convex _, and light output 5) having a shape perpendicular to the light exit surface The above diffusion angle is preferably 100 or less, more preferably 60 or more, 7 inches or more, or 80 or less. The following is suitable for the other table. In the case where it is not specifically described, the light-incident surface of the light guide plate (the opening portion (the anisotropy shape of the upward direction of the bottom line is incident, and the vertical direction of the light surface is perpendicular) (the table shows " :( The diffusion angle of the protrusion and the light emission of 20 Å or less, more preferably ^β") is preferably 1 or less, and most preferably 0.5 or less. 157266.doc -68- 201222097 Ο Ο 157266.doc DS Prism(V) DS .5 &lt; ^ 2 ® ^ ^ 4? ®ir iW Si W湓H ® ^ • «: &lt; ^ • Figure A8 • Figure 33 DS Prism(H) DS . Figure A4 • Figure A9 • Figure A10 DBEF Prism (V) DS _ € &lt;柃2 ® tts&lt; ^ 4? Lingju Si wurious @ ® ^ • ^ &lt;J5: m • Figure A8 • Figure 33 DBEF Prism(H) DS • Figure A4 • Figure A9 • ΒΙΑΙ DS Prism(H) Prism(V) DS _ Back? &lt; s ® ΰί&lt; ^ 4? ® 4r 举 2 W铤H ® History! Take "c -i . Figure A7 Figure 33 DS Prism(H) Prism(V ) „ Έ 0A &lt;松 2 ® ^ it 4? ®S: Lift ^ i ^- • Take jh: Take. Figure A6 Figure 33 13.4 mm 16.0 mm 19.2 mm Birthday 31. f&gt;^±rj:-r^ Ro^-f&gt;¥iKr^sd^&lt;®14 ^There is a Jai-Kr^I 硪 耜 耜 f FT f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f f璀^蛴阳^费采〆^·^©,-!^^-^^^^^^·#※ 蜞 蜞 ^ ^ target 08, 1-^^0/.嫦-蜞^" Chain ^^«铡58,1&quot;«Target 09嫦^«Thank ^τ.^ The rose is .k3⁄4^^i?3w^3⁄43^45ί00I,τ3⁄43⁄4&lt;0ς嫦3⁄4&lt;Pylon lr^¢柃vsw^^瀹Tε3⁄4s:r¥v食·(灌^slt·-33⁄45:3p·3ol·aπ)d{yΊ矣涅·t^琪tc)lfo^^#^4*※ .. (h)ss£ „ Eel - 69-201222097 The effect of the virtual light source between the light source and the light source formed by the light scattering processing shown in Fig. A9 will be described. The light scattering process of Figure A9 is performed on the opposite side of the light guide plate (material: polymethyl methacrylate, thickness: 3.0 mm, width: 409 mm, length: 721 mm), which will contain diffusion particles. A circular diffusing point with a diameter of 8.8 mm to 1.3 mm of the adhesive is arranged in a zigzag configuration (triangular lattice shape) at a distance of 2 to 5 mm from the end portion of the light incident surface (light-shielding portion, light-incident surface) In the vicinity of the area B), a partial area between the light source and the light source, p=50~100. /. 'In the region of the light-incident side end portion 4 5 to 6 mm (light-shielding portion (junction area), area A), p = l〇%, 6 mm or more at the end side from the light-incident side (non-shielding portion, The area of the area A), p = 9%, and no diffusing point is set in the other areas. The light-incident surface of the light-guide plate that has been subjected to the light-scattering processing of FIG. 9 is bonded to the front surface of the sheet to form a pair having a groove structure having a surface distribution as shown in FIG. 24C and having an average thickness of 125 μm. Ethylene phthalate film, LEDs are arranged along the entrance surface at an arrangement pitch of 丨6 〇mm

)).

I57266.doc In the range of 1_5 to 2·5 mm of the light-incident end portion, -70-201222097 is also compared with the light guide plate having the same density ρ as the range of 2.5 to 3·5 nun to form a diffusing point. The virtual light source region formed by the light scattering processing between the light source and the light source suppresses the hot spot more effectively, that is, functions as a virtual light source. In the above case, the light-scattering processing of the light-emitting surface side end portion i5 surface ~25 _ does not contribute much to the hot spot suppression, and it is suggested that the light reaching the light-incident side end portion is reduced by 2.5 to 3.5. This results in a reduced effect as a virtual light source.光 光 The light scattering shown in Fig. A2 to Fig. 33 can also be achieved by simply connecting the ends of the light incident surface between 2.5 _ and 3.5 _ (the size of the diffusing point implemented in the same is equivalent) The pattern of the portion of the column of the column is replaced by the pattern of 2.5 mm to 3.5 mm of Fig. 8 9 to obtain the above effect. At this time, because the point is listed as a simple column, the design is relatively easy, which helps to improve the development speed. Further, it is also preferable to perform the processing by attaching only the point of the column to another step or by attaching the additional dot seal to the face. = the light distribution of the light-emitting surface achieves higher uniformity, and the light-scattering processing in the light-incident surface = region and the light in the other regions can be imparted to the light-scattering direction in a direction away from the light-incident surface, for example, With the gradation of the area of the gradation of the gradation of the gradation of the gradation of the surface of the illuminating surface, the gradation of the gradation of the gradation of the surface of the illuminating device is as follows: 'It is formed as the highest brightness in the center of the picture. 157266.doc •71 - 201222097 The light distribution in the picture is easy to see and is considered to be better. Therefore, light scattering processing is provided on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface. Further, it is also possible to configure the central portion to have a high degree of light scattering. The light-scattering processing in the vicinity of the light-incident surface may be provided on the light-emitting surface or the opposite surface, or may be provided in both. Among them, it is preferable to provide only the opposite surface in the case where the light scattering processing is easy to visually recognize. Further, the above-described groove structure which is substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light incident surface may be provided in the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface in which no light-scattering processing is provided. If such a groove structure is provided on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface, the diffusion of light emitted from the light-emitting surface can be suppressed, so that the light guide plate can be made suitable for local dimming. Further, as another aspect, the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate of the present invention and the region near the light-incident surface of the alkali opposing surface may be disposed such that the light scattering degree of the wrong region of the right-point light source is lower than the right direction. Light scattering processing of light scattering in a partial region of a portion between the point source and the point source. By providing such a light-scattering process on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface, the concave-convex structure disposed on the light-incident surface can be complemented (the light-scattering processing is placed on the light-incident surface to compensate for uneven brightness unevenness The effect is not: Part), the brightness of the U-light surface is dramatically improved, increasing the latter

In addition, the "partial region of the point source (or the point between the point source and the point source)" refers to the area where the light emitting surface is flat; the direction of the light incident surface is X. The axis, which will be perpendicular to the Y-axis of the light-incident surface, has a portion of the area that has approximately the same coordinates, and is approximately the same as the point source 157266.doc •72· 201222097 (or the portion between the point source and the point source) Part of the same x coordinate. The region where the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface are subjected to light-scattering processing (hereinafter also referred to as "light-scattering processing region") is configured to be a portion of the light source surface that is adjacent to the light-incident surface. The light scattering degree of the region where the light scattering degree is lower than the partial region between the point source and the point source is not limited, and the light scattering processing region does not have to start from the light side end portion (Υ=0). For example, when the surface light source device includes a frame (a frame having an opening in which the light emission angle 1 is defined), when the outer peripheral portion of the light-emitting surface is covered by the frame, etc., only the center portion of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate can be used as a light-emitting region. In the case of the average brightness in the in-plane (in the light-emitting region), it is preferable that the light-scattering processing region on the light-incident surface side overlaps the frame by 10 or less (more preferably, it is 6 mm or less). The position starts from light scattering processing. In particular, when S is used in a display device or the like, from the viewpoint of preventing the start line of the light-scattering process from being recognized, it is preferable to have a certain degree of overlap, and it is preferably 1 mm or more, and more preferably about 2 mm. The specific aspect of the composition of the region near the light entrance surface, the light scattering degree of a portion of the point light source is lower than the partial light scattering degree of the portion between the point source and the point source, for example, The following equations can be cited: a. Light scattering processing is performed on a region other than a partial region of the point light source in a region near the light incident surface, and b. a point light source and a point light source are only in the region near the light incident surface. Part of the area between the portions is subjected to light scattering processing; c. light scattering processing is performed on substantially the entire area of the light exit surface and/or the opposite surface, and light scattering of a portion of the area adjacent to the light source in the vicinity of the light incident surface 157266.doc •73·201222097 The degree of light scattering is lower than that of other parts of the area and/or the part of the area near the entrance surface that is facing the point source and the point source is higher than the other parts. The light scattering processing is not limited, and those generally used in the field of optical materials can be used. For example, II may be provided by laminating or printing a pattern of a plurality of diffusing dots (hereinafter, also referred to as A "points") containing a reflective or diffusing material; or forming a plurality of carcass dots such as a concavo-convex A. #. The shape of the dots is not limited to, for example, a circular shape, a (five) angular shape, or the like, and the size thereof can be, for example, about 1 to 2.0 mm. The degree of light scattering can be controlled, for example, by adjusting each of the following: a concentration of a reflective (diffusion) substance in a diffusing point including a reflective (diffusing) material (the higher the concentration, the higher the degree of light scattering); The shape of the solid point of the shape (for example, the higher the height, the higher the light scattering degree); the area ratio (hereinafter referred to as "dot density") which forms a part of the dot (the higher the dot density, the light scattering degree of Vietnam). The dot density can be made, for example, by the following method: the number of dots per unit area is fixed to change the area of each dot; or, conversely, the area of each dot is fixed to make the point per unit area The number (the distance between points) changes; or both. Specific examples of the light scattering processing are shown in Figs. (1) and C19. In addition, in the example of (1), the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source in the region near the light incident surface is lower than that of the partial region of the point light source in the region near the light incident surface. The luminosity H of the partial region between the point source and the point source is the same as the area of each point of the partial region of the point source in the vicinity of the entrance surface. J57266.doc -74 · 201222097 is smaller 'and the area of each part of the part of the area between the point source and the point source in the area near the human face is set larger, so that the point source is in the area near the face The light scattering of the partial region is lower than the light scattering of a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source. When the light scattering degree is controlled by the dot density, it is preferable that the dot density ρ1 of the lowest dot density region in the partial region of the direct-point light source in the vicinity of the light incident surface in the £ field is near the light incident surface. In the region, the ratio of the point density port 2 in the region where the point density is the highest in the partial region between the point source and the point source, and the method of touching the m system, which will be described later, adjust pi and p2. 2.9^ 1.4χ(Ρ/〇-ρ2/ρ1 ^3.1 -中中 When the point is reached and the degree changes stepwise in each part of the area, the point density of a part of the area is determined by the part of the area to be connected The center point of the specific point (26) is formed by a vertical bisector (26a-f) of a line segment of a center point of a point (A to F) adjacent to the specific point, and is formed as a polygon (10) surrounding the specific point. The area of the basement as the denominator 'the area of the specific point (26) is taken as the numerator, and the % is indicated by the singularity of 26). (4) The value obtained by the area ratio (see the figure for achieving a higher uniformity of the light distribution of the light surface, and further imparting a gradient of light scattering to the light scattering process in a direction away from the light incident surface (for example, ' As the distance from the entrance surface increases, the point of the same area becomes narrower as the distance from the entrance surface becomes smaller. 157266.doc -75- 201222097 八布之: Display device ❹ light source device In the case of the situation, if the light emission == syllabic is formed, and the brightness of the center of the screen is the highest, the light surface of the hook is the distribution of the light, and it is easy to visually recognize that it is better. Therefore, light scattering is provided on the 5 opposite faces. The processing (4) can form a high degree of light scattering in m. The light scattering processing can be performed on either the light-emitting surface or the opposite surface, or both. In the middle, scattering in 7b in ice When the processing is easy to visualize, it is preferable to set it only on the opposite side. One: in the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface in which no light scattering processing is provided, the above-mentioned light and human light can also be set. The normal direction of the surface is roughly parallel, and the structure is right. Such a groove structure is provided on the surface and/or the opposite surface to suppress the diffusion of light emitted from the light exit surface. The light guide plate can be made suitable for local dimming. 2 other aspects can also be used in the present invention. a region of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or a region near the light-incident surface of the light-shielding portion shielded by the frame (surface light source device) and/or the light-shielding frame (display device), and a partial region of the light source facing the point light source The light scattering degree is lower than the light scattering degree of the light scattering degree of the partial region (4) between the point source and the point source. This configuration is provided by the region near the light incident surface of the light exit surface and/or the opposite surface. In order to make the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source lower than the light scattering degree of the partial region between the point source and the source light source, the concave and convex structure disposed on the light incident surface can be complemented (so The arrangement of the Z or "opposite surface is such that the partial area of the point source is 'scattered' is less than the partial dispersion between the point source and the point source. 157266.doc -76 - 201222097 Radiation light scattering processing, and setting The concave-convex structure of the light-incident surface compensates for the insufficiency of the brightness unevenness reduction effect, and the brightness of the light-emitting surface is dramatically increased, and the p/G described later is increased. Further, the so-called "point-to-point light source (or The partial region between the point source and the point source refers to a region in which the direction parallel to the light incident surface of the light exit surface is set to the X axis, and the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface is set. In the case of the γ-axis, the portion of the region having substantially the same Y coordinate, and the point source (or the portion between the point source and the point source) has substantially the same 胄 coordinate G 胄 sub-region, the so-called "point-to-point source" The light scattering of a partial region of light (or approximately equal to) the partial scattering of the portion of the point source between the point source and the point source refers to a portion of the point source (the point and the source have substantially the same X coordinate portion) The light scattering of the region is lower (or approximately equal to) a partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source (a portion of the region having substantially the same coordinates as the portion between the point source and the point source) Light dispersion Degree. The light-shielding portion that is shielded by the frame (surface light source device) or the light-shielding frame (display device) on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface is configured such that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point-to-point light source is lower than the opposite point The light scattering processing of the light scattering degree of the partial region between the light source and the point light source may be performed in at least a portion of the region near the light incident surface of the light shielding portion, for example, preferably parallel to the light shielding portion. The strip-shaped region of the light-incident surface or the strip-shaped region parallel to the light-incident surface of the outer side (light-incident surface side) of the boundary of the distance from the non-shielding portion is 1 mm or more. In addition, the light scattering processing is not necessarily required to start from the side end side (γ = 〇) 157266.doc -77 - 201222097. For the light-shielding portion of the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface, the light-scattering degree of the partial region of the direct-point light source is set to be lower than the light-scattering degree of the partial region of the portion between the source and the point source. An area other than the area of the light-scattering process (for example, 'the gap between the non-shielding portion and the vicinity of the human light surface (located near the boundary between the light-shielding portion and the non-light-shielding portion), or the light entering the light guide plate The area parallel to the side perpendicular to the plane" may or may not be provided with light scattering processing. "About the portion of the light-emitting surface (opposite surface) between the point source and the point source, due to the in-plane The light-shielding portion and the non-shielding portion) 'the light scattering degree is preferably not changed sharply in the γ-axis direction (continuously, the light scattering degree is continuous), so it is preferable that the light scattering degree does not change sharply in the γ-axis direction. Preferably, the light scattering processing is provided in a manner of the light scattering processing. Further, in the boundary region, a light scattering degree of a partial region of the point light source and a partial region between the point source and the point light source are preferably used. The light scattering degree is substantially equal. A specific aspect of the configuration of "the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point source is lower than the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source" is exemplified. The following is the same: a. Perform light scattering processing on a region other than a partial region of the point source (light scattering processing is performed on a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source); b near the entrance surface The light scattering process is performed on substantially the entire area of the region, and the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point source is lower than that of the other partial regions (the light scattering degree of the partial region between the point source and the point source is high) In other parts 157266.doc -78- 201222097 sub-area) Light scattering processing is not limited, and can be used in the field of optical materials, for example, 'exemplary: by stacking or printing a plurality of reflective or diffusive materials The pattern of the diffusing point (hereinafter, also referred to as "point") is not set or a pattern of a plurality of solid points such as a concave-convex shape is formed. The shape of the dot is not limited, for example, The circular shape, the square shape, and the like are exemplified, and the size thereof can be, for example, about 1 1 to 2 · 0 πιπι. The light scattering degree can be controlled, for example, by adjusting the following: diffusion of the material including the 〇 reflection (diffusion) material The concentration of the reflective (diffusing) substance in the spot (the higher the concentration, the higher the light scattering degree); the shape of the solid point of the concave-convex shape (for example, 'the higher the two degrees, the higher the light scattering degree); forming a part of the The area ratio (hereinafter referred to as "dot density". Further, when the dot density changes stepwise within the region, the dot density of the region means that the area of the dot 26 is relative to the connection point 26 as described in FIG. The ratio (%) of the area of the polygon 262 surrounded by the vertical bisectors 26a to 26f of the line segment of the center of the adjacent points a to F (the higher the dot density, the higher the light scattering degree). The dot density can be, for example, The following methods are used to adjust: the number of points per unit area is fixed to change the area of each point; or, conversely, the area of each point is fixed so that the number of points per unit area (the distance between points) Change; or make Both changes. In this aspect, in the region of the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate that includes the non-light-shielding portion that is not shielded by the frame (surface light source device) or the light-shielding frame (display device), the light source is preferably a point-to-point light source. The light scattering of the partial region is substantially equal to the light scattering of a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source. The light scattering processing may or may not be provided in the non-light-shielding portion, but 157266.doc -79-201222097 About the portion of the light-emitting surface (opposite surface) between the point source and the point source, due to the It is preferable that the in-plane 'light scattering degree does not change sharply in the γ-axis direction (continuously, the light scattering degree is continuous), and therefore it is preferable to appropriately set the light scattering degree so as not to change sharply in the γ-axis direction. Light scattering processing. Specific examples of the light scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface are shown in Figs. C18 and C19. In addition, in the example of FIG. C18, the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source in the region near the light incident surface is not provided by the light scattering processing in the region adjacent to the light source in the region near the light incident surface. Light scattering below a portion of the area between the point source and the point source. In addition, in the example of FIG. C19, the area of each point of the partial region of the point light source in the region near the light incident surface is made smaller, and the money and the point in the region g near the light incident surface are opposite. The area of each part of the partial region between the light sources is set to be larger, so that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source in the region near the human light surface is lower than that between the point source and the point source. The light scattering of a partial area. Fig. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a surface light source device and a display device of the present invention. The light-emitting area of the surface light source device is defined (restricted) by a frame (bl frame), and the display area of the display device is defined by a light-shielding frame (black matrix) (in the limit diagram F28, the partial area of the point-point light source is configured The light scattering is lower than the positional relationship between the light scattering of the partial light source disk and the partial source between the point source and the point source, and the positional relationship between the edge and the non-shading portion. In the example of the image F28 in the display region or the light-emitting region, the strip-shaped region parallel to the light-incident surface of the light-shielding portion (that is, the outer side of 157266.doc 201222097) is configured to be a partial region of the point-to-point light source. The light scattering degree is lower than the light scattering degree of the light scattering degree of the partial region between the point source and the point source, so that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point source is lower than the right In the light scattering processing of the light scattering degree of a partial region of a portion between the point source and the point source, the area of each point of the partial region of the point light source in the region near the entrance surface is made smaller and will be Area near the light surface CKS portion of the area of each dot of the area between the portion of the spot light source and the point light source to a more

❹ is large, so that the light scattering degree of a portion of the region facing the point source in the region near the entrance surface is lower than that of the portion of the portion between the point source and the point source. The non-light-shielding portion (that is, the display region or the light-emitting region) is such that the partial transmittance of the partial region of the point light source and the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source are substantially different in light scattering. The light scattering process is performed in an equal manner. Specifically, when the light scattering degree is controlled by the dot density, a portion of the region belonging to the same region (a partial region having a 4 mesh and a γ coordinate) has a portion where the dot density of the dot density is the highest. The ratio of the dot density p2 (p2/pl) is preferably 2, more preferably p2/pl $1 · 1, and most preferably p2/p1 = ;l. By light-scattering processing and light-shielding/non-shielding portions configured to make the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point light source lower than the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source The positional relationship is as described above (ie, the light scattering of the partial region of the portion of the point source between the point source and the point source is 157266.doc • 81 · 201222097 The light scattering processing of the degree is terminated in the light-shielding portion 'J is not only from the front side but also from the oblique direction and does not recognize the unevenness of the light-emitting surface/display surface (4), indicating that the light source is configured to be a point-to-point light source The light scattering degree of the portion 'region is lower than the light scattering of the partial region between the point source and the point source, and other specific examples of the positional relationship between the light-shielding portion and the non-non-light-shielding portion. In the example, as in the case of FIG. C18, the region near the light incident surface in the light-shielding portion is only subjected to light-scattering processing to a partial region (part-part) of the portion between the point light source and the point light source. Point source In the light-shielding portion, the light-scattering processing is not performed. Specifically, the boundary between the distance and the non-light-shielding portion (display area or light-emitting area) is set to be outside the boundary 例如_ (for example, number _: degree). The strip-shaped region 平行 parallel to the light-incident surface, only in a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source, has a density that is 2 to 10 times higher than the dot density of the non-shielding portion. Forming a point. Thus, by performing light scattering processing only on a portion of the portion of the light-shielding portion that faces the portion between the point source and the point source, a virtual light source can be generated between the point source and the spot light, the virtual source and the actual point. The image of the light source is superimposed, thereby reducing the unevenness caused by the point light source. Further, in the example of Fig. F29, the region (junction region) near the boundary between the light-shielding portion and the non-light-shielding portion is implemented to make the point-to-point light source The light scattering degree of the partial region is substantially equal to the light scattering degree of the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source, and the non-shielding portion is formed in the same region A ^ 157266.doc -82· 201 222097 The area B is preferably set to be 1 mm or more away from the boundary between the light-shielding portion and the non-light-shielding portion, thereby preventing the user from visually recognizing the virtual light source when the surface light source device or the display device is used.

Further, it is preferable that the light-scattering processing portion (the light-scattering processing performed on a portion of the portion between the point light source and the point light source in the region near the light incident surface) in the region near the light incident surface is directed to the light scattering degree toward the center thereof ( The gradient of the rising point between the point source and the point source. Thereby, the light from the right and left point light sources reaching the portion between the point light source and the point light source can be more strongly scattered toward the central portion, and the dark portion can be generated in the center of the virtual light source scattering processing portion. The virtual light source part of nature. When the light scattering degree is controlled by the dot density, it is preferable that the dot density pi of the partial region having the lowest dot density among the partial regions of the direct-point light source in the region near the light incident surface and the region near the light incident surface are preferable. The ratio of the point density p2 (p2/p 1) of the partial region where the dot density is the highest in the partial region between the point source and the point source, and the p/G described later satisfy the following relationship, and the dot density is adjusted. Pi, p2. 2.9$ 1.4x(P/G)-p2/pl$3-l where, when the point density changes stepwise in each part, the point density of a material area is defined by the connection of the sub-area The center point of the specific point (26) containing the second point, and the point adjacent to the specific point (a~2

The vertical bisector (26a) of the line segment of the point is formed, and the area of the polygon (263) surrounding the specific point is formed as the denominator, and the area of the specific point (4) is taken as the numerator of the area ratio of %. Value (Yuan 26). *''' M 157266.doc -83- 201222097 In order to achieve a higher uniformity of the light distribution of the light surface, light scattering near the light entrance surface can be enhanced, and other suitable implementations The light scattering processing further imparts a gradation in which the light scattering degree is increased in a direction away from the light incident surface (for example, 'the gradient of the dot area increases as the distance from the light incident surface increases, and the point of the same area follows the light entering surface. In the case of the surface light source device for the display device, the uniformity of the light-emitting knife cloth is increased, and the light distribution of the uniform mountain type having the highest brightness at the center of the kneading surface is formed. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize that it is preferable. Therefore, the light scattering processing provided on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface may be configured such that the light scattering degree in the central portion is high. Any one of the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface may be provided in both of them. In the case where the light-scattering process is easy to visually recognize, it is preferably provided only on the opposite surface. In the case where the light-scattering processing is not provided in the facing surface, the groove which is substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light-incident surface, and the 'σ structure may be provided. The right side is disposed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface. The groove structure can suppress the diffusion of light emitted from the light-emitting surface, and the light guide plate can be made suitable for local dimming. Hereinafter, the surface light source device of the present invention will be described. Fig. 9 shows the surface of the present invention. A schematic diagram of an example of a light source device. The surface light source device 9 of the present invention includes a light guide plate 91, a plurality of point light sources 92 disposed in the vicinity of the light incident surface 93 of the light guide plate, and a light source surface 91 disposed opposite to the light guide surface of the light guide plate 91. The frame to the direction (not shown in the point source is not limited to 'better LED (light-emitting diode). led 157266.doc -84- 201222097 can obtain high-brightness light with low power consumption, and at a lower temperature It can also be illuminated brightly, so it is available A surface light source device and an illumination device having sufficient illumination immediately after illumination. The type of LED is not limited, and for example, a single-wafer type virtual white LED that emits green and red phosphors by a blue LED; A green/blue LED is combined to produce a white light multi-wafer type; and a single-wafer type virtual white LED in which a near-ultraviolet LED and a red/green/blue phosphor are combined. FIG. 10 shows that the present invention can be used. The outline of the LEDI 箱 例 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED LED 1. 〇111111 (thickness) left and right 'the lateral width 102 of the light-emitting surface 101 is 5 mm or less. The distance between the light-emitting surface of the point source and the light-incident surface of the light guide plate is preferably 〇1 mm or more and 1.5 mm or less. More preferably 〇·3 mm or more,! 〇 mm or less. If the distance between the light guide plate and the light-emitting surface is pulled apart, the amount of light incident on the light guide plate is reduced according to the inverse square law, and as a result, the total amount of light emitted from the light-emitting surface is also reduced. Therefore, the distance between the light emitting surface of the point source and the light incident surface of the light guide plate is preferably ❹. On the other hand, since the light guide plate is expanded by the generation of heat around the point light source, it is necessary to leave a gap which can withstand expansion. The arrangement method of the point light source is not limited, and it is preferably arranged on the straight line along the light incident surface (parallel to the light exit surface) of the light guide plate at equal intervals ("equal interval" includes ±1% error). At this time, the arrangement pitch ρ of the point light source is usually set to, for example, the width (outer shape) of the point light source to about mm. From the viewpoint of preventing uneven brightness, it is preferable to arrange the point light sources as densely as possible, and it is preferable to separate a certain distance from the viewpoint of mounting restrictions on the substrate. Point light source 157266.doc •85· 201222097 The arrangement pitch is preferably 5 mm to 200 mm, more preferably 1 〇~1 〇〇 mm. However, in the surface light source device of the present invention, since the light guide plate uses the light guide plate whose luminance unevenness near the light incident surface of the light exit surface is reduced, even if the arrangement pitch of the spot light sources is slightly larger, the light exit surface without the hot spot can be realized. Specifically, for example, the brightness unevenness can be suppressed within an allowable range as long as it is 20 mm to 50 mm, 30 mm to 50 mm, or 40 mm to 50 mm or so. The above description will be based on the assumption that the LED is a Lambert type LED as shown in Fig. κ. The Lambertian type LEd is a LED having a light-emitting surface which is substantially flat and includes a layer in which a diffusing phosphor is dispersed, and is characterized in that light is emitted in a light distribution close to a Lambert model for all directions. The effect of the concave-convex structure provided on the light-incident surface of the light guide plate of the present invention is not only the light diffusion by the uneven structure, but also the following aspects: it can prevent the original led to a wider range. When the light emitted from the direction is incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the light incident surface as shown in FIG. K4, the diffusion is suppressed by the refraction, so that it can be maintained at a wide angle as shown in FIG. If a high-diffusion LED having a lens having a surface as shown in FIG. K2 is used as the point source, the angular distribution of the luminous intensity of the LED can be made as shown in FIG. K3, and high-intensity light can be distributed in a wide angle direction. The light in the wide-angle direction can be incident into the light guide plate at a wide angle through the concave-convex surface as shown in FIG. 5, and in the present invention, the surface is included in the cross-section cut parallel to the longitudinal direction of the light-incident surface. The 151266.doc -86- 201222097 led (high-diffusion LED) lens is also preferred as a point source. And adding the concave-convex structure of the light surface of the light guide plate to the high-diffusion LED. (For example, Figure K6) 'The hot spot suppression capability that greatly exceeds the effect obtained by the combination of the Lambertian LED and the concave-convex' structure can help reduce the led and contribute to the narrow frame. Further, by combining with the light-scattering processing represented by the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface represented by Fig. 33 and the like, the effect can be further increased. The surface light source device of the present month further includes a light-emitting region disposed to face the light-emitting plate Φ opposite to the light guide plate. Frame of the illuminated area). The frame is formed of a material that does not transmit light of the point source, and the region corresponding to the light-emitting region is constituted by, for example, an opening. The frame may further have a wrap portion in which the light guide plate or the point light source is housed, and the light source or the like may be hidden in the order to obtain a clean appearance of the surface light source device. The frame is constructed such that the light-emitting area starts from the inner side of the light surface of the light guide plate. Further, in the case where the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate are subjected to light scattering processing as described above, it is preferable to form the light-emitting region from the inner side of the lower region, that is, the light guide plate. The surface and/or the vicinity of the light incident surface in the opposite surface is configured such that the light scattering degree of the partial region of the opposite point light source is lower than the light scattering degree of the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source. Light scattering processing area. In other words, the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate subjected to the light-scattering processing on at least one of the light-incident surface sides is in the range of the opening portion of the frame 157266.doc • 87 · 201222097 The outer side is preferably 0 to 10 mm (excluding 〇mm), more preferably 6 mm, more preferably 4 mm, and particularly preferably 2 outside. In this way, there is no 起 from the starting line of the visible light side scattering processing, and the average brightness in the high in-plane (in the light-emitting area) can be ensured. In the surface light source device of the present invention, in addition to the light guide plate, the point light source, and the frame, an optical element generally used in a surface light source device of a so-called end face illumination method such as a diffusion sheet or a reflection sheet may be further included. Specifically, the diffusion sheet may be disposed above the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate, or the reflection sheet may be disposed below the opposite surface of the light guide plate. In addition, in addition to the diffusion sheet, a concentrating sheet such as a cymbal or a lenticular lens sheet or a lenticular sheet may be disposed above the surface of the light guide plate, or a polarized reflection for avoiding optical loss in the polarizing plate of the liquid crystal panel may be disposed. Film and so on. The upper surface of the light-emitting plate is disposed above the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate, and the surface of the laminated layer is provided with a lens sheet having a groove structure which is substantially perpendicular to the ridge line of the light-emitting surface of the LED having the LED, and the brightness of the present invention can be obtained very strongly. The unevenness is low in effect, and therefore, the lens sheet is preferably a slab whose groove structure is composed of a substantially triangular prism. In addition, it is preferable that the combined surface has a lens sheet having a groove structure having a ridge line substantially parallel to the light incident surface on which the led light is disposed, and the unevenness in brightness when viewed from the oblique direction is improved. Further, in this case, if a diffusion sheet is inserted between the cymbal sheet and the light guide plate, it is difficult to visually recognize the light-scattering process of the light guide plate, and it is preferable that even unevenness can be improved. Further, in order to prevent damage to the optical sheet due to interference with the display panel used in combination, it is preferable to be Jiang Yu #. D seeks to occupy the diffuser (the diffusibility is better than I57266.doc • 88 · 201222097 is better than the diffusion of the diffuser) on the outermost side. In the surface light source device of the present invention, in particular, at least a diffusion sheet is sequentially laminated on a light-emitting surface of the light guide plate, and a surface having a groove structure having a ridge line substantially perpendicular to a light-incident surface on which the LED is disposed, The surface is provided with a gusset having a groove structure substantially parallel to the ridge line on which the LED light incident surface is disposed, and four optical sheets (see FIG. 23) of the diffusion sheet, so that almost no luminance unevenness can be obtained, and A surface light source device having a very high quality such as light scattering processing provided on the light guide plate is not recognized. 〇 As the cymbal sheet and the diffusion sheet, a person who is usually used in a surface light source device or the like can be used. For example, as a diffusion sheet that is in contact with the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate (hereinafter referred to as a "lower diffusion sheet"), a diffusion sheet having a total thickness of 215 μηι ', which has a detailed thickness of 188 μm, can be used. Transparent particles such as oxidized dream particles on the display surface side of the pET (Polyethylene terephthalate) substrate on the display surface side, and uv or heat hardening on the above particles The resin is applied as a binder to a thickness of about 1 〇μηι (here, most of the particles are applied in such a manner that the particles are outcrops from the binder, thereby obtaining moderate diffusibility and condensing properties), and The side of the display side is viewed as the opposite side, and a coating for preventing electrification or adhesion is provided at a thickness of about 10 μm (the coating is prevented from being in contact with the light guide plate, etc.), in the coating, Add a small amount of particles, or a fatty acid salt to reduce the surface resistance). As the diffusion sheet disposed on the display surface side (hereinafter referred to as "upper diffusion"", a diffusion sheet having a total thickness of 22 〇 Pm, which is formed in detail on a PET substrate having a thickness of 188 μm, can be used. Display surface 157266.doc •89- 201222097 Side 'dispersion less than the number of lower diffusion sheets μιη~ tens of dozens of transparent particles such as dioxy-cut particles' on the above particles, using υν or thermosetting resin as a binder The coating thickness is about 10 μm (wherein, the coating is applied in such a manner that most of the particles are buried in the binder, thereby suppressing moderate diffusibility and preventing damage due to interference with a panel or the like). On the opposite side as viewed from the display surface side, a coating for preventing electrification or adhesion is provided in the same thickness as the lower diffusion sheet at a thickness of 1 〇 μη &amp; (from the coating to prevent adhesion to the cymbal sheet) Bad conditions, etc. The coating is added with a small amount of particles or a fatty acid salt for lowering the surface resistance. In the case of the upper diffusion sheet, it is prevented from being in close contact with the panel, and in many cases, on the display surface. side The same design is used. As a crepe sheet, for example, it can be used for the non-face side of the ΡΕτ substrate having a thickness of 25 μm, and is formed by a thickness of about 50 μm*υν hardening resin as a thickness ^μ^η~20 The optical sheet having an apex angle of about 90 Å. The opposite side of the optical sheet is viewed from the side of the display surface, and the thickness 5 of 15 μ1 η to 20 μm is used in the same manner as the diffusion sheet to prevent electrification or adhesion. The coating is applied to prevent the ruthenium from being in close contact with other optical sheets of the laminated layer, or damage caused by an increase in the friction coefficient, etc. The coating is added with a small amount of particles or a fatty acid salt for lowering the surface resistance. In addition, the surface light source device includes a power source for supplying electric power to the point light source, and may also include a control circuit for controlling the amount of current or on/off. The surface light source device of the present invention may also be used as a general illumination device. In the following, a case where the surface light source device of the present invention is used as a general illumination device will be described. 157266.doc 90-201222097 FIG. C2-11 shows one of the devices of the present invention. A cross-sectional view of (indoor ceiling illumination), and a schematic view of the inside thereof is shown in Fig. 9. The illumination device (1) of the present invention includes a frame C2 having an opening portion 0: 2-901 defining a light-emitting region (irradiation region), (Fig. 9 is not shown); the light guide plate and a plurality of point light sources disposed in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light guide plate (the back surface of the frame) (the surface light source device of the present invention is not shown as the f-pass illumination device in FIG. In the case of use, the point light source is not limited, and it is preferable to use an LED (Light Emitting Diode). The LED can obtain high-intensity light with low power consumption, and can also brightly emit light when the room temperature is low. Therefore, it is possible to provide a lighting device having sufficient illumination immediately after lighting. The type of LED is infinitely ^, for example, a single-wafer type virtual white in which a green, red phosphor (or a yellow phosphor such as YAG (yttrium_ alumini Um_garnet)) is excited by a blue LED. LED; install two or more blue LED chips in one LED package to excite a two-in-one (2 in 1) virtual white LED of green, red phosphor (or yellow phosphor such as yag); Green/blue 〇LED to produce self-coloring multi-color crystal Μ ; and a single-chip type virtual white LED formed by combining near-ultraviolet LED and red/green/blue phosphor. Fig. 1A is a schematic view showing an example of a box-type LED 10 that can be used. The size of the LED outer shape or the light emitting surface is not limited. In a backlight such as a liquid crystal display device, a shape of 5 6 mm (width) x 3 〇 mm (height) χ 1. 〇 mm (thickness) is generally used, and a lateral width i 〇 2 of the light-emitting surface 101 is 5 mm or less. However, in a general illumination device, it is preferably slightly larger than an LED used in a backlight of a liquid crystal display device or the like, and preferably has a shape of 6.〇157266.doc.91 · 201222097 mm (width)χ5· 0 mm (tfj degrees) xl, about 5 mm (thickness), and the horizontal width 102 of the light-emitting surface ιοί is 5.5 mm or less. In addition, the supply current of a normal LED is about 2 mA to 160 mA, but a large-chip type high-power LED with a supply current of 2 mA to 1 A can be used in a general illumination device. In the case of using such a high-power LED, the number of LEDs used is remarkably reduced and the manufacturing cost is lowered, but on the other hand, the problem of hot spots becomes large. Therefore, the effect of the present invention, that is, the reduction of hot spots, becomes more important. The distance between the light-emitting surface of the point source and the light-incident surface of the light guide plate is preferably 〇1 or more and 1.5 mm or less. More preferably, it is 0 3 or more and l.o mm or less. The reason for this is that if the distance between the light guide plate and the light-emitting surface is pulled apart, the pupil incident on the light guide plate is reduced according to the inverse square law, and as a result, the total amount of light emitted from the light-emitting surface is also reduced. Therefore, the distance between the light emitting surface of the point source and the light incident surface of the light guide plate is preferably close. Further, since heat is generated around the point light source to expand the light guide plate, it is necessary to leave a gap which can withstand expansion. The method of arranging the point light sources is not limited, and is preferably placed on the straight line along the light incident surface (parallel to the light exit surface) of the light guide plate at equal intervals ("equal interval" includes ±1% error). In this case, the arrangement pitch p of the point light sources can be, for example, about the width (outer shape) of the point light source to about 2 (9). In order to prevent uneven brightness, it is preferable to arrange the point light sources as densely as possible, and it is preferable to separate a certain distance from the viewpoint of mounting restrictions or manufacturing costs on the substrate. The arrangement pitch of the point light sources is preferably 6 _ to 200 mm ' more preferably 1 〇 to 100 mm. However, in the present invention, since the light guide plate is provided with a light-emitting surface, the light guide plate having a reduced brightness unevenness is attached, so that even if the arrangement pitch of the point light sources is large, it is even 80 mm to 200 mm, 100 mm to 200 mm, or 120 mm to 200 mm or so, the light-emitting surface that can suppress the hot spot can also be formed so that the light guide plate or the point light source can be accommodated therein, thereby The light source or the like is hidden behind the frame to give the lighting device a neat appearance. Since the brightness unevenness occurs near the light incident surface of the light guide plate, the frame is

The opening portion is preferably designed such that the light-emitting region starts from the inner side of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate. That is, it is preferably designed to ensure a horizontal distance G between the light incident surface 93 of the light guide plate 91 and the opening portion of the frame (this will be the area 94 when the region 94 corresponding to the frame opening portion is projected/on the light guide plate 91). The distance from the light incident surface 93 (see Fig. 9) is a certain level or more. However, since the light guide plate of the present invention has a reduced brightness unevenness in the vicinity of the light incident surface, it is necessary to form the light emitting region on the inner side of the extent of using the previous light guide plate in the ordinary illumination device using the same (no need to g is set to larger). Specifically, the horizontal distance G between the light incident surface of the light guide plate and the display region may be set to G<lt;p(p/G&gt;l) with respect to the arrangement pitch P of the point light source, and may further be set to G&lt;; P / 2 (P / G &gt; 2), or G &lt; p / 4 (p / G &gt; 4). If the relationship between P and G can be designed as described above, it is possible to realize a frame-less illumination device, and it is also possible to save power by reducing the number of point sources used. Furthermore, regarding the size of G, as described above, 157266.doc •93-201222097 is determined by taking p as 0.1 to 10 mm. For example, it can be set to 0.1 to 3 mm, 0.1 to 20 mm or further, as shown in the embodiment described in I, even if the arrangement pitch P of the point source is changed, or the light incident surface and the light emitting area of the guiding plate are changed. The horizontal distance between G ', but as long as P / G is the same value, the same brightness unevenness performance can be displayed. When the light guide plate has two light incident surfaces, the arrangement pitch of the point light sources disposed in the vicinity of the first light incident surface is ρι, and the arrangement pitch of the point light sources disposed near the second light incident surface is set to be ! &gt;2, when the horizontal distance between the first light incident surface and the opening is G1', when the horizontal distance between the second light incident surface and the opening is G2, preferably at pi/Gi : P2/G2 = 100:90 to 100:110, more preferably in the range of pi/Gi:p2/G2=100:95 to 100:105, more preferably pi/G1=p2/G2. In addition, G1 and G2 are not necessarily set to be the same. In the general illumination device, in addition to the light guide plate and the point light source, optical elements such as a diffusion sheet or a reflection sheet may be further included. Specifically, the diffusion sheet may be disposed to face the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate, or the reflection sheet may be disposed to face the opposite surface side of the light guide plate. Further, on the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate, a concentrating sheet such as a cymbal sheet or a lenticular lens sheet or a microlens sheet may be disposed in addition to the diffusion sheet. Further, the general illumination device includes a power source for supplying power to the above-mentioned point light source, and may also include a control circuit for controlling the amount of current or turning on/off. In the device, in the device, a cover may be provided on the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate to prevent contamination or the like. 157266.doc -94· 201222097 In addition, when it is used as an evacuation indicator (Fig. C2-12), a panel that indicates the direction of indication of the evacuation person is placed on the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate. When the surface light source device of the present invention is used as a general illumination device, the maximum brightness thereof is not limited. The brightness unevenness of the surface light source device of the present invention is improved, and the difference between the bright portion and the smaller portion is smaller. Therefore, as long as the brightness of a large part of the brightness is equal to or lower than the surface brightness of a HCFL (hot cathode fluorescent lamp, a so-called fluorescent lamp) widely used in general lighting devices, as a general picture The performance of Ming is sufficient, and on the contrary, it will not make the user feel dazzled. In view of the above, in the general illumination device using the surface light source device of the present invention, it is preferable that the maximum luminance of the light-emitting surface when a plurality of point light sources are turned on is measured from any direction to be 10,000 cd/m 2 or less, more preferably It is 8 000 cd/m 2 〜1 〇, and 〇〇〇 cd/m 2 is more preferably 9, _ cd/m 2 〜 1 〇〇〇〇 cd/cm 2 . Hereinafter, the display device of the present invention will be described. A display device according to the present invention includes: a display panel including a display region for displaying light transmitted by adjusting a surface light source device; and a light shielding frame for defining the display region; and a surface light source device configured to The back of the display panel. In the display device of the present invention, the above-described surface light source device can be used as the surface light source device β: if the brightness is uneven in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light guide plate, sufficient display quality cannot be ensured. The active area is preferably designed to start from the inner side of the light incident surface of the light guide plate. 157266.doc -95-201222097, that is, preferably designed to ensure a horizontal distance G between the light incident surface 93 of the light guide plate 91 and the display area (the area 94 corresponding to the display area is projected onto the light guide plate 91) The distance between the region 94 and the light incident surface 93 (see FIG. 9) is a certain distance or more. However, since the brightness unevenness in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light guide plate of the present invention has been reduced, it is not necessary to open/form the display area in the display device of the present invention using the light guide plate as before. Inside (no need to set G to be large). Specifically, in the display device of the present invention, the horizontal distance G between the light incident surface of the 彳胄 light guide plate and the display area is set to be 1 P from the arrangement of the point light sources, and 5 G &lt; P / 2.5 (P / G &gt; 2.5), and further may be set to G &lt; p / 3 (P / G &gt; 3) &gt; G &lt; P / 4 (P / G &gt; 4) 〇 μ can design the relationship between P and G as described above Therefore, it is possible to realize a so-called edge=that is, a stylish display device in which the frame portion is thinner than the display area of the display panel, and the power consumption can be reduced by reducing the number of point sources used. Furthermore, the relationship between Ρ and G in the previous display device is at most P/GS^.7. Further, regarding the size of G, as described above, ρ, ' can be set, for example, to 0.1 to 30 mm, 0.1 to 20 mm, or 0.1 to 10 mm, and even if the arrangement pitch P of the point light source is changed, or the guide is changed. The horizontal distance G between the light incident surface and the display area of the light plate is as long as it is. /G=: Significant brightness unevenness reduces performance. The light guide plate included in the display device of the present invention has two light-incident surfaces, and the arrangement pitch of the point light sources disposed near the first light-incident surface is I57266.doc • 96·201222097. The arrangement pitch of the point light sources in the vicinity of the smooth surface of the two persons is preferably such that the horizontal distance between the first light incident surface and the display region is set to G2 when the horizontal distance between the first light incident surface and the display region is G2. For the range of P1/G1:P2/G2 = 100:90~1〇〇:11〇, more preferably 卩1/〇1:卩2/〇2=1〇〇:95~1〇〇: Within the range of 1〇5. In addition, G1 and G2 are not necessarily set to be the same. For example, a speaker or the like may be provided on the lower edge portion of the display device, and the G of the lower edge portion may be set to be small or the like to secure the space.显 The display panel is preferably a liquid crystal display panel. As the liquid crystal display panel, a conventional one can be used, and an outline of an example of the configuration is shown in Fig. u and will be described below. Fig. 11 is a front elevational view showing an example of a liquid crystal display panel 1; The outer side of the broken line iii is a light-shielding frame (black matrix 13 and the inner side is the display area i12. Panel wiring (not shown) is present on the back side of the light-shielding frame (black matrix) 113. In Fig. u, 114 and 11 5 are respectively A driver IC (integrated circuit) that is a source line (not shown) is used as a source wafer, and a driver for applying a voltage to a gate line (not shown) is used. That is, a gate wafer. In a transmissive liquid crystal display panel, generally, a plurality of pixel electrodes arranged in a matrix on a transparent substrate are driven by active matrix elements disposed on a transparent substrate. On the active matrix substrate provided with the active matrix element and the pixel electrode, a liquid crystal layer is provided in a laminated state, and a counter substrate is provided so as to sandwich the liquid crystal layer so as to face the active matrix substrate. Transparent substrate with counter electrode, 157266.doc •97- 201222097 The counter electrode is opposite to the display area in the liquid crystal layer. It is also provided in the active matrix element on the active matrix substrate. a TFT (thin film transistor) of an active device connected to each of the pixel electrodes. Further, the active matrix device is provided with a plurality of gate lines arranged in parallel with each other in the column direction, and an edge orthogonal to each gate line The plurality of source lines arranged in parallel with each other in the row direction are disposed in the vicinity of the intersection of the respective source lines and the source lines, and the TFTs and the gate lines and the source lines forming the intersections of the adjacent TFTs Each of the TFTs is configured to be supplied with a source signal supplied from a source line connected thereto by a source L number supplied from a gate line connected thereto to a pixel electrode respectively connected thereto. In the liquid crystal display panel, the gate signals (horizontal synchronization signals) are sequentially supplied to the gate lines arranged in the column direction on the active matrix substrate in a row-by-line manner, thereby sequentially The gate signal is continuously supplied to the gate line adjacent in the row direction. The display panel of the display device of the present invention includes a light-shielding frame that defines a display area of the display device. The _ 疋 次 次 适 适 适 适 适 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 次 对应 对应 对应 对应 对应 对应 对应A glass substrate or the like in which a color filter containing a light-shielding agent such as carbon black is provided in a region other than the display region (frame portion), etc. / k special frame structure is formed so that the kimono kiln 1 is not self-guided. Starting from the inner side of the light surface of the light plate, the structure is configured such that the display area starts from the inner side of the light 157266.doc -98·201222097, that is, the light exit surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate The light scattering near the light surface is configured such that the light scattering degree of the region facing the light source is lower than the light scattering degree of the region between the light source and the light source. In other words, on at least one of the light incident surface sides, the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate is subjected to the light-scattering processing from the outer side of the line of the inner frame of the light-shielding frame, preferably 0. ~10 mm (which does not include melon (4), more preferably 16 mm, more preferably 1 to 4 mm, especially preferably 2 mm from the outside. 〇So, there is no visible light scattering processing from the screen side The starting line is 'and can ensure a higher in-plane (in the display area) average brightness β. The display device of the present invention can be used for various purposes such as a portable information terminal or a computer screen. For example, by using the present invention A television receiver of the present invention can be obtained by combining a display device with a spectrometer that receives a broadcast image, and an example of the configuration of the television receiver 12 is shown in Fig. 12. The television receiver 12 of Fig. 12 is The display device 121 of the invention is combined with the following parts: a casing 122 provided with a speaker 1221, a circuit board 123, a power circuit board 124, a control circuit board 125, and the like; a rear casing 126 and a bracket 127 and so on. Hereinafter, the first invention of the present specification will be described. The invention of the present specification is also preferably used as a light incident surface of a light guide plate to be used in the present invention, and the surface includes an opening or a bottom surface having a direction in one direction. A light diffusion layer of a diffusion sheet of a resin layer (light diffusion layer) having a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having a long anisotropic shape. The first invention of the present invention relates to a backlight of a liquid crystal display device or the like 157266.doc -99- The diffusion sheet used in 201222097 (back lighting), especially regarding its light diffusion layer. Currently, the liquid crystal display device is used in mobile phones, PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) terminals, digital cameras, televisions, and personal computers. In a wide range of fields, such as a display and a notebook computer, the light source unit used in the liquid crystal display device has a configuration in which a plurality of light sources are disposed directly under the liquid crystal display panel when the liquid crystal display panel arrangement side is set upward. a direct-type light source unit; the light source is disposed on a side end surface of the light guide body disposed directly below the liquid crystal panel Surface light source unit. The light source unit for various liquid crystal display devices as described above is required to supply uniform light to the liquid crystal display panel, and to supply as much light as possible to make the display image clear. The light source unit is required to have excellent light diffusibility and to obtain optical characteristics of high luminance. However, in the above-described end surface illumination type light source unit, since the light source is disposed on the side end surface of the light guide body, the light source unit itself can be made thinner. However, on the other hand, there is a disadvantage that the brightness is lowered by the light guide body. On the other hand, the above-described direct type light source unit has an advantage of being able to obtain a high brightness, but on the other hand, it has a surface on the liquid crystal display panel. There is a disadvantage that the brightness tends to become uneven between the upper portion of the light source and the upper portion between the light sources. Therefore, in the direct type light source unit, the light source and the liquid crystal display panel are separated to a certain extent, and an optical sheet having a function of diffusing light, for example, a diffusion plate, is disposed between the light source and the liquid crystal display panel. As the diffusing plate, a 157266.doc 201222097 resin plate containing particles or bubbles that diffuse light is known, or a fine layer is provided on the surface of the transparent substrate to obtain a higher brightness, more preferably... Behind the heart shape. ^ 1 is preferably the first loss of transmittance as a method of the above-mentioned uneven shape of the surface material of the diffusion plate, a method of injection molding the resin with a specific mold; or using a diamond knife to form a concave-convex structure on a roll, using the A method in which a roll is subjected to extrusion molding. However, the method of forming the irregularities mechanically as described above has a problem of a large amount of time and a high cost. In addition,

The method of forming the concavities and convexities by mechanical means as described above is the limit of the structure in which the nucleus is in the tens of degrees, and it is not easy to improve the uniformity of the shape. In view of the above, (4) there is a technique in which a concave-convex shape is recorded on a photosensitive medium by a speckle of a laser beam to manufacture a mold for pattern transfer, and a light guide plate for a large-sized liquid crystal display device using the mold is used. A holographic light guide plate is formed on the surface of the embossed surface (for example, see Fig. 41 in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. Hei. No. Hei. No. 23-23422). On the other hand, in recent years, the thinning of liquid crystal display devices has progressed, and there is a need to further reduce the distance between the light source and the optical sheet from which the light from the light source is diffused (for example, the above-described hologram light guide plate and the diffusion plate). Requirements. In addition, in order to reduce costs and reduce power consumption, there is also a demand for reducing the number of light sources of the light source unit. However, as shown in a schematic manner in FIGS. B1(a) and (b), the ratio of the distance (H) between the light source (P) and the light source B1 to the optical sheet B2 in the light source unit ( The larger p/h), that is, the smaller h (ha of Fig. B1(a)) and/or the larger p (pa of Fig. B1(b)), the more significant the luminance unevenness. 157266.doc •101- 201222097 Here, the term “unevenness in brightness” refers to the phenomenon of light and dark due to the distribution of the illuminance of the light source on the surface of the liquid crystal display panel. The liquid crystal display device is required to reduce the unevenness in brightness. The prior art disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2001-23422 is still unable to sufficiently reduce the unevenness in brightness, and is incapable of coping with the reduction in the thickness of the liquid crystal display device and the reduction in the number of light sources. Accordingly, an object of the first invention of the present specification is to provide a diffusion sheet and a light source unit which can reduce unevenness in brightness in view of the problems of the prior art described above. The inventors of the first invention of the present invention have intensively studied to solve the above problems concerning the prior art of the diffusion sheet, and as a result, have found that a diffusion sheet having a specific refractive index formed of a specific material by the light diffusion layer can solve the above-mentioned first Then the problem of the technology 'completes the first invention of the present specification. The first invention of the present specification is as follows. [1] A diffusion sheet which is a resin layer having a concavo-convex structure in at least one main-area layer of a sheet-like substrate, wherein the resin layer has a refractive index of 1.55 to 1.70, and the resin layer contains (A) An addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group: 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (B) a photopolymerization initiator: 0.1 to 30% by mass of a cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition, and the above (A) The addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group contains a compound having a biphenyl group and having a structure represented by the following formula (I): 157266.doc •102-201222097 Formula ( i) [Chemical 5] Ο

(In the formula (I), R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and χ represents a divalent organic group having at least an alkyl group. Some or all of the compounds having the structure represented by the above formula (I) are preferably the compounds represented by the following (II).

General formula (II) [Chemical 6]

In the formula (Π), R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and A each independently represents a stretching group of 1 to 4, and η represents an integer of 1 to 3. [2] The diffusion sheet according to the above [1], wherein the (4) addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group has a compound having a structure represented by the above formula (1) or (Π) The content is other than ~% mass [3] The diffusion sheet according to [1] or [2] above, when a human light is incident along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the diffusion sheet, the diffusion angle is periodic along a specific direction in the plane of the diffusion sheet. Change sexually. [4] The diffusion sheet according to [3] above, wherein the relative position in a specific direction in the plane of the diffusion sheet is taken on the horizontal axis, and the diffusion angle of the relative position is taken from the diffusion angle distribution on the vertical axis. In the figure, there are a plurality of peak points indicating the peak of the diffusion angle and a valley point indicating the valley value of the diffusion angle, and an arithmetic mean value of the peak value and the valley value indicated by the adjacent peak point and the valley point is larger than the distribution. The arithmetic mean of the diffusion angles of all points between the adjacent peak points and valley points. [5] The diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [1] to [4] wherein the diffusion angle is controlled by the above-mentioned uneven structure. [6] The diffusion sheet according to any one of [1] to [5] wherein the uneven structure is a concave-convex structure formed by using a speckle pattern formed by interference exposure, and the diffusion angle is the concave-convex structure The average size and shape of the speckle is controlled. [7] A light source unit comprising: two or more light sources; and a diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [1] to [6], which is disposed opposite to the light source. [8] The light source unit of the above [7] wherein the light source is a linear light source. [9] I57266.doc -104-201222097 The light source unit according to [7] above, wherein the light source is a point light source. [10] The light source unit according to any one of [7] to [9] wherein the period of the diffusion angle distribution of the diffusion sheet is substantially equal to the period of the illuminance distribution of the light incident surface of the diffusion sheet. [11] The light source unit according to any one of the above [7], wherein a diffusion plate containing a diffusing agent is disposed between the diffusion sheet and the light source, and is opposite to a side of the arrangement of the Ο diffusion plate. A reflection sheet is disposed on the side of the light source. [12] The light source unit according to any one of [7] to [11] wherein a surface-formed diffusion sheet is further disposed on the diffusion sheet arrangement side. [13] The light source unit according to any one of [7] to [12] wherein, on the side of the diffusion sheet arrangement, a gusset is further disposed. [14] The light source unit according to any one of [7] to [13] wherein the reflective polarizer is further disposed on the diffusion sheet arrangement side. [15] A liquid crystal display device comprising: a liquid crystal display panel, and a light source unit according to any one of [7] to [14]; wherein the light source unit is disposed on the liquid crystal display panel On the back side, display is performed by injecting light from the light source unit. According to the first invention of the present specification, a diffusion sheet, a light source unit, and a liquid crystal display device using the same can be obtained. The following description will be made on the basis of the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as an embodiment). In the drawings, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the repeated description is omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the positional relationship such as up, down, left, and right is based on the positional relationship shown in the drawings, and the dimensional ratio of the drawings is not limited to the ratio shown in the drawings. In addition, the term "substantially" is used in this specification to mean that the meaning of the term "substantially" is removed from the technical knowledge of the practitioner. It also includes the meaning of the word "substantially". [Diffuser] The diffusion sheet of the embodiment is a resin layer having a concavo-convex structure in at least one main area layer of the sheet substrate. The resin layer has a refractive index of 155 to 17 Å, and the resin layer contains (A) an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, 70 to 99% by mass, and (B) light. Polymerization initiator: a cured product of a photopolymerizable resin composition of 3 % by mass, and the addition polymerization precursor of the above (A) having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group contains a biphenyl group A compound having the structure of the following formula (1)*. General formula (I) 157266.doc 201222097 [Chem. 7]

In the formula (1), 'R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, X represents a part or all of a divalent organic group having at least a stretching group, and a compound having a structure represented by the formula (I) preferably has the following formula: (II) Structure shown. General formula (II) [Chemical 8]

In the formula (II), 'R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and A each independently represents an alkylene group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, and η represents an integer of 1 to 3. (Substrate) The base material constituting the diffusion sheet of the embodiment is a sheet-like base material, and may be a light-transmitting substrate formed of a material such as resin or glass, and particularly preferably a light transmittance of the substrate monomer. More than 75%. In this case, the term "light" is not particularly limited as long as it is visible light, and is, for example, light emitted from a light source in a light source unit using the diffusion sheet of the embodiment. For the above light transmittance, for example, an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (MPC-2200) manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation can be used, and a substrate is disposed between the light source and the detector to detect incident light intensity and transmitted light intensity at a wavelength of 550 nm. 157266.doc -107- 201222097 After 'calculated using the following formula (II). Transmittance (%) = (transmitted light intensity at 550 nm) / (incident light intensity at 550 nm) χ 100... (ΙΙ) The thickness of the substrate is not particularly limited 'usually in the range of 50 μm to 500 μm . The resin material of the base material is, for example, a polyester such as polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate or polyethylene naphthalate by electromagnetic radiation such as ultraviolet rays or electron beams. Resin, acrylic resin such as polymethyl methacrylate, thermoplastic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polystyrene resin or polymethylpentene resin, including polyester acrylate, urethane acrylate, epoxy acrylate, etc. A resin obtained by curing an ionizing radiation curable resin such as an oligomer and/or an acrylate monomer. Further, as the glass, soda glass, borosilicate glass or the like can be used. (Resin layer) &lt;Concave-convex structure> The resin layer is formed on at least one main surface of the above-mentioned base material, and has a concavo-convex structure. The above-mentioned main surface excluding the thickness portion of the above-mentioned substrate means the surface and the back surface when the substrate is regarded as a flat surface. The uneven structure is a structure obtained by providing a plurality of protrusions on the surface. The shape of the large-rise portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a substantially spherical shape, a substantially spherical shape, a substantially ellipsoid shape, a substantially lenticular lens shape, and a substantially parabolic shape. The protrusions may be regularly arranged or irregularly arranged. In addition, the protrusions 157266.doc Ο ο 201222097 can also be connected by a curved surface. The structure = the use of a continuous surface to connect the irregular irregularities of the irregular bumps. The virtual random structure is preferably a fine three-dimensional structure characterized by non-planar speckles. In order to obtain better characteristics in terms of light diffusion performance, the height of the protrusions is in the range of (4) to 15, and the spacing is preferably! The model is characterized by non-planar speckles. The three-dimensional structure of the disc is suitable for forming fine concavo-convex structures of 10 μηι or less which are difficult to achieve by mechanical addition. The use of non-planar speckles to form irregularities The β 楯 method is particularly suitable for forming a situation in which the diffusion angle is changed depending on the region. Note that the manufacturing method of forming the uneven structure by non-planar speckle will be described later, and the isotropic concave-convex structure such as a microlens or the lenticular lens may be preferably used as a resin for the diffusion sheet. The uneven structure of the layer. The concave and convex structure formed on the resin layer of the diffusion sheet is preferably irregular in height and pitch from the viewpoint of suppressing the rubbing or the like. If the surface of the diffusion sheet has a concavo-convex shape, the light incident on the diffusion sheet can be diffused. In the diffusion sheet of the embodiment, it is preferable that a portion having a function of arranging the concavo-convex shape as described above and diffusing light is provided in a portion of the sheet surface, and a portion having a function of diffusing is not required. At the end, you can also store smooth parts. 157266.doc 201222097 &lt;Refractive Index&gt; The refractive index of the resin layer of the diffusion sheet of the embodiment is 1554.7 Å. The refractive index of the resin layer can be measured in accordance with JIS Κ 7142, and specifically, it can be measured using a refractometer M〇DEL 2 〇1〇 pRISM COUPLER (manufactured by Metricon Co., Ltd.) manufactured by Metricon. If the refractive index of the resin layer is 1_55 or more, the light from the light source can be effectively raised, and the unevenness in brightness can be effectively reduced. When the refractive index is 1.70 or less, the following methods may be used in the production: (1) introducing a gas or a ruthenium such as bromine into the addition polymerizable monomer molecule; introducing an inorganic molecule into the composition; and (3) combining A large amount of addition polymerizable monomer having a specific structure such as a bisphenol skeleton or an anthracene skeleton is added to the product. Further, in the above case, there is a disadvantage that the load on the environment is high, and in the case of the above (2), there is a disadvantage that the compatibility or the formability of the resin is deteriorated, and in the above case, the resin viscosity is increased and the operation is difficult. The hardening shrinkage is too large, so that the p眭 is poor, and the resin after hardening is too hard and the impact resistance is poor. The refractive index of the resin layer is preferably, more preferably! Play 7〇. , * When the refractive index is in the range of ^~(10) and the case where the refractive index is low = ratio, even if it is a concave-convex structure having the same size and shape, the diffusibility of light is + south, so that it can be realized more easily. Diffusion sheet of diffusion angle. Further, by using a diffuser having a refractive index of the above-described refractive index to form a diffusing sheet in the form of a direct-type light source unit, the effect of suppressing uneven brightness can be improved. In the case where the radiance of the tree layer having the uneven structure is in the range of L55 to ❹, even if it is a concave-convex structure having the same size and shape, it is easier to enter from: i57266.doc 201222097 The light is lifted upwards, so that the brightness of the backlight can also be increased in, for example, an end-illuminated light source unit. &lt;Material of Resin Layer&gt; The resin constituting the resin layer of the diffusion sheet of the embodiment contains a cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition. The photopolymerizable resin composition contains (A) an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group: 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (B) a photopolymerization initiator of 0.1 to 30% by mass. 〇 As the (A) addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, a known compound having a (meth) acrylate group or an allyl group can be used. For example, fluorenyl phenol acrylate, alkoxylated (1) o-phenyl phthalate acetate, propionate _2 _ -3- phenoxy propyl vinegar, β-propyl propyl ketone -(Allyloxy)propyl phthalate, 1,4-butanediol bis(indenyl) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth) acrylate, 1,4- Cyclohexanediol di(meth) acrylate, octapropylene glycol di(meth) acrylate, glycerol (meth) acrylate, 2-di(p-hydroxyphenyl) propane bis (methyl) ) decyl acrylate, glycerol tri(methyl) propionate, trimethylolpropane tris(meth) acrylate, polyoxypropyl trimethylolpropane tri(meth) acrylate, poly Oxyethyl tris- mercapto-propenyl tris(fluorenyl) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth) acrylate, trimethylol propyl triglycidyl ether (mercapto) acrylate, bisphenol quinone diglycidyl ether di(meth) acrylate, diallyl phthalate, polyethylene glycol bis(indenyl) acrylate, polypropylene glycol bis ( Base Acrylate, bis(triethylene glycol methacrylate) nona-propylene glycol, bis(tetraethylene glycol methacrylate) polypropyl 157266.doc -111. 201222097 diol, bis(triethylene glycol methacrylate) Polypropylene glycol, bisaryl hydrazine derivative, bis(diethylene glycol acetoacetate) polypropylene glycol, and both oxyethylene chain and propylene oxide chain in the molecule of the double A-type (meth)acrylic acid vinegar monomer Compounds and the like. Further, a urethane compound of a hydroxy acrylate compound such as a polyvalent isocyanate compound such as hexamethylene diisocyanate or toluene diisocyanate or hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate may be used. The urethane compound at this time is preferably not more than 10,000 in terms of polystyrene-converted number average molecular weight obtained by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The above-mentioned (A) addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more types are combined, for example, copolymerization with methyl methacrylate may be used, and the (A) having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group as PMMA (p〇lymethylmethaCrylate, polymethyl methacrylate) may be used. An addition polymerizable monomer of a side chain component of a polymer. For example, oxidized phenylphenol acrylate can be used as a side chain component of the PMMA polymer. From the viewpoint of high-sensitivity hardening under the light to be irradiated, it is preferred to have three or more (meth) acrylate groups. For example, a tripropyl acrylate obtained by adding an average of 3 moles of ethylene oxide to trimethyl methacrylate (A-TMPT_3EO, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., product name), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate vinegar (Xinzhongcun) Chemically manufactured A-TMMT, product name), pentoxide tetraol tetraacrylate (ATM-35E, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., product name), dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate (SR399 manufactured by Sartomer, product name), ethoxylation (4) Pentaerythritol tetrapropyl acrylate (SR494, manufactured by Sart〇iner, manufactured by Π2-157266.doc 201222097). From the viewpoint of improving the adhesion between the cured resin and the substrate, 2-phenoxyethyl acrylate (SR339A, manufactured by Sartomer), and methylphenoxy-2-phenoxy group are preferred. Ethyl S (SR340, manufactured by Sartomer), burnt tetrahydrofuran sulphate (CD611 manufactured by Sartomer, product name), tetrahydroanthracene acrylate (SR285, manufactured by Sartomer), A From the viewpoint of imparting flexibility to a cured product after light irradiation, it is preferable to contain a urethane bond or a hetero-cyanide from the viewpoint of imparting flexibility to the cured product after light irradiation. The monomer of the acid bond. For example, pentaerythritol triacrylate-hexamethylene diisocyanate-amino phthalate prepolymer (UA306H manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., product name), ε-caprolactone modified tris (propylene oxy group) Ethyl)isocyanurate (Μ-327, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), polyol modified bifunctional urethane urethane (Μ-1600, manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., product name), bifunctional Aliphatic acrylamide phthalate (CN9001, manufactured by Sartomer), polyester modified bifunctional Q urethane (CN981, manufactured by Sartomer), polyester modified trifunctional acrylate Formate (CN929, manufactured by Sartomer, product name), etc. Further, from the viewpoint of the refractive index, it is preferably (nonyl)acrylic acid-2-phenoxyalkyl ester, nonylphenol modified (mercapto) acrylate, and iso-cyanuric acid modified (methyl Acrylate, tricyclodecane modified (mercapto) acrylate, hydrazine modified (meth) acrylate. Examples of the (nonyl)-2-phenoxyalkyl acrylate include propionate-2-phenoxyethyl S (product name: 157266.doc-113-201222097 SR339A' manufactured by Sartomer), 曱2-phenoxyethyl acrylate (SR340' product name by Sart〇mer); as an example of decyl benzene-modified (meth) acrylate, ethoxylated (4) nonyl phenol acrylate Ester (M-113, manufactured by East Asia Synthetic Co., Ltd.), 4-mercaptophenyl heptanediol dipropylene glycol acrylate (LS-100A, manufactured by Emu Oil), modified as iso-cyanuric acid (曱Examples of the acrylates include Ethylene Cyanide Ethylene Oxide (Ethylene Oxide) modified di- and triacrylate (M_315, M-313 'product name manufactured by East Asia Synthetic); Examples of the alkene-modified (meth) acrylate include tricyclodecane dinonyl didecyl acrylate (DCP manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and tricyclodecane diacetate diacrylate (new A-DCP manufactured by Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., product name); as an example of tamper-modified (meth) acrylate' , 9-bis[4-(2-propenyloxyethoxy)phenyl] (trade name A-BPEF manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., or BPEF-A manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals) and its derivatives (〇 Manufactured by saka Gas Chemicals, Ogsol EA-0200, Ogsol EA-0500, 〇gs〇i EA-1000, Ogsol EA-F5003, Ogsol EA-F5503). Further, a compound represented by the following formula (X) is also preferred. General formula (X) [Chemical 9]

(wherein, 1 and 112 are each independently Η or CH3. In addition, A and B are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Al, a2, bl and b2 are 0 or a positive integer, 157266.doc -114- 201222097 The total of al, a2, bl, and b2 is 2 to 40.) As an example of the compound represented by the formula (X), 2,2-bis{(4-acrylic oxy-properylene B) Alkoxy)phenyl}propane or 2,2-bis{(4-f-based acryloxypolyethyloxy)phenyl}propane. Preferably, the polyethyloxy group of the compound is a compound selected from any group consisting of a monoethyloxy group, a di-ethyloxy group, and a tri-ethyl group. Oxy, tetraethyloxy, pentaethyloxy, hexaethyloxy, heptaethyloxy, octaethyloxy, hexaethyloxy, decyloxy Indenyl, eleven-ethyloxy, dodecylethyloxy, thirteen-extended ethyloxy, tetradecylethyloxy and pentadecylethyloxy. Further, 2,2-bis{(4-propenyloxypolyalkyloxy)phenyl}propane or 2,2_bis{(4-mercaptopropene-based oxygen-based polyalkylene) can be mentioned. Oxy)phenyl}propane. The polyalkyleneoxy group of the compound may, for example, be a mixture of an ethyloxy group and a propyloxy group, preferably a block structure of an octaethyloxy group and a di-propyloxy group. Addition of an adduct or a random structure, and an addition product of a block structure of a tetraethyl ethoxy group and a tetrapropyl propyloxy group or a random structure of an addition hydrazine An adduct of a block structure of a radical with a dipropyloxy group or an adduct of a random structure. In the formula, a3, a4, b3 and b4 are 0 or a positive integer, and the total of a3, a4, b3 and b4 is preferably 2 to 30. Among these, ethoxylated bisphenol A didecyl acrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., BPE-100, BPE-200, BPE-500, BPE-900, BPE-1300 N, product name), B Oxidized bisphenol A diacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., ABE-300, A-BPE-10, A-BPE-20, A-BPE-30, A-BPE-4, product name), propoxylated bisphenol A Diacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., 157266.doc • 115· 201222097 A-BPP-3 'product name), ethoxylated bisphenol a diacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., A-B1206PE 'product name) and 2,2-bis{(4-methylpropenyloxypentaethyloxy)phenylhydrazine. In the above, from the viewpoint of the refractive index, a compound represented by the following formula (1) is preferred, and a compound represented by the following formula (π) is preferred. General formula (I) [Chemical 10]

(wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorenyl group, and χ represents a part or all of a divalent organic group having at least an alkyl group). The formula (II) [Chemical Formula 11]

(II) (wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, A each independently represents an alkyl group having a carbon number of oxime, and η represents an integer of 1 to 3) as a formula (I) Examples of the compound include alkylated (1) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, alkylated (2) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, and alkylated (3) o-phenylphenol (曱). Acrylate, alkylated (4) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, alkoxylated (1) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, alkoxylated (2) o-phenylphenol (methyl) Acrylic vinegar, alkoxylated (3) o-benzene 157266.doc -116· 201222097 phenol (meth) acrylate, alkoxylated (4) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate 8 曰 oxidized (5) o-phenyl Phenol (methyl) propionate, oxidized (6) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, alkenylated o-phenylphenol (mercapto) acrylate 1 曰, alkylation (1) alkaneization ( 1) o-phenyl phenol (fluorenyl) acrylate, alkylated (2) alkoxylated (2) o-phenylphenol (fluorenyl) acrylate, alkylated (2) alkoxylated (3) ortho-benzene age · (Meth) acrylate. Among these, from the viewpoint of the refractive index, alkoxylated (1) o-phenylphenol acrylate is preferable, and particularly preferred is ethoxylated (1) o-phenyl isopropyl acrylate (for example, product name) 1 〇, Fuxin Nakamura Chemical Manufacturing). Further, in the compounds, in addition to the ortho position of the biphenyl group, a compound obtained by bonding a residue at a meta or a para position, such as an ethoxylated phenylphenol acrylate, or an ethoxylated (1) phenyl group. Phenyl acetoacetate is also preferred. Examples of the compound represented by the formula (π) include methoxylated p) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, (2) o-phenylphenol (methyl) acrylate vinegar, and methoxylation. (3) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, ethoxylated (1) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, ethoxylated (2) o-phenylphenol (methyl) 〇@ oleic acid vinegar, ethoxylated ( 3) o-phenylbenzene (meth)acrylic acid vinegar, propoxylated (p-o-phenylphenol (fluorenyl) acrylate, propoxylated (2) o-phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, propylated (3 o-Phenylphenol (meth) acrylate, buty oxidized (1) o-phenyl benzene (Yin Ke) acrylic vinegar, butyl oxidation (2) o-phenyl benzene (meth) acrylate vinegar, butyl oxidation (3 O-phenyl-phenyl-(methyl)-propyl acetoacetate, etc. Among them, ethoxylated (1) o-phenyl benzopyrene (for example, product name A-LEN-10, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) is preferred. 157266.doc •117· 201222097 The above (A) an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, represented by the above formula (1) or („) The content of the compound is preferably from 50 to 95% by mass. From the viewpoint of increasing the refractive index of the resin layer, it is preferably 5% by mass or more, and from the viewpoint of preventing reduction in photocurability, it is preferably 95% by mass or less. As the above-mentioned (A) addition-complexing monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, a known compound other than the compound represented by the above formula (I) or (H) may be used. A compound having a (fluorenyl) acrylate group or an allyl group. For example, a mercapto benzoate propionate, a propionate via a benzyloxypropyl acrylate, a β hydroxypropyl _β , _(propylene oxy) propyl o-dicarboxylate, 1,4-butanediol bis(indenyl) acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol bis(indenyl) acrylate, 1 , 4-cyclohexanediol di(meth) acrylate, octapropylene glycol di(meth) acrylate, propylene triacetate (meth) acrylate, 2 bis (p-hydroxyphenyl) propane bis(indenyl) Acrylate, glycerol tri(meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane bis(indenyl) acrylate, polyoxypropyl tris-propyl propyl triacetate (methyl) Acrylate, polyoxyethyltrimethylolpropane tri(indenyl)acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta(indenyl)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, dimethicone triglycidyl Ether tri(meth) acrylate, bis-dioxa diglycidyl ether di(meth) acrylate, diallyl phthalate phthalate, polyethylene glycol di(meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol di(曱) Acrylic, bis(triethylene glycol methacrylate) nona-propylene glycol, bis(tetraethylene glycol methacrylate) polypropylene glycol, bis(triethylene glycol methacrylate) polypropylene glycol, double (two) Ethylene glycol acrylate) Polypropylene glycol, a compound containing both an ethylene oxide chain and an oxypropylene chain in a molecule of a bisphenol A type (methyl) 157266.doc -118-201222097 A acrylate monomer. Further, an amino acid such as a polyvalent isocyanate compound such as hexamethylene diisocyanate or decyl diisocyanate or an acrylic acid such as 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate may be used to oxidize the compound with an amino acid of the vinegar compound. The urethane compound at this time is preferably not more than 10,000 in terms of polystyrene-converted number average molecular weight obtained by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). The above-mentioned (A) addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In the above-mentioned photopolymerizable resin composition, (1) the addition polymerizable monomer is 1,3-mass/〇 or more and 99.9% by mass or less based on the total mass of the photopolymerizable resin composition. It is preferably 75 mass. /〇 above, 95 quality 0/〇 or less. From the viewpoint of sufficiently hardening, it is set to 7% by mass or more, and it is set to 99% by mass or less in consideration of the preparation of the initiator component, the polymerization inhibitor, the dye, and the like. ❹ The (B) photopolymerization initiator in the photopolymerizable resin composition may, for example, be benzoin dimethyl ketal, benzoin diethyl ketal or acetoin dipropyl ketal. Benzene oxime diphenyl ketal, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin propyl ether, benzoin phenyl ether, 9 oxopurine p star, 2,4-dimethyl-9-oxopurine, 2, 4-diethyl_9_oxythiopurine, 2-isopropylidene-9-oxo-puppet p-mountain, 4-isopropyl- 9-oxopurine p-star, 2,4-diisopropyl _9_ oxysulfuron, 2·fluoro-9-oxopurine p, 4-fluoro-9-oxopurine, 2-gas-9-oxopurine

ttS main, 4-gas-9-oxosulfonium V* star, 1-gas·4_propoxy _9_ oxysulfide, second stupid 157266.doc •119- 201222097 A, 4,4·-double (dimethylamino)benzophenone [micelle], 4,4, bis(diethylamino)benzophenone, 2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylbenzene Aromatic ketones such as ketone, 2_hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propan-1-one; 2_(o-phenyl)-4,5-diphenyl taste ° siting dimer π π sitting compound; 9_ phenyl 0 acridine and other acridine; α, α-dimethoxy-α- morpholinyl-nonylthiophenyl acetophenone, 2,4,6-tridecyl Phenyl phenyl diphenyl phosphine oxide, phenylglycine, Ν-phenylglycine; and 1-phenyl-1,2-propanedione 2 〇 苯 苯 醯 2, 2, 3 - Bis-oxo-3-phenylpropionate ethyl ester-2 - (0-benzylidenecarbonyl) hydrazine; dimethylamino benzoic acid, p-diethylaminobenzoic acid , p-diisopropylaminobenzoic acid and esters thereof with alcohol, p-benzoic acid esters; triazoles such as 3-mercapto-1,2,4-triazole; tetrazole; Benzene glycine, Ν-methyl-Ν-phenylglycine, Ν_ethylphenylglycine, etc. Glycosyl acid; and 1-phenyl-3-styryl-5-phenyl-pyrazoline, ^(4-second butyl-phenyl)_3-phenylethenyl-5-phenyl-α More than salivary, 丨_phenyl_3_ (4-second butyl-styryl; tert-butyl streptozolyl oxazoline, etc.. ° ° sitting in the class. Among these, preferably 2-hydroxyl -2-methyl- phenyl phenyl-propane ketone (for example, product name DAROCURE 1173, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals). Regarding the content of the (B) photopolymerization initiator in the photopolymerizable resin composition, light is used. The total mass of the polymerizable resin composition is 〇丨% by mass or more and 3% by mass or less, preferably 1% by mass or more and 20% by mass or less based on the total mass of the polymerizable resin composition. By setting the content of (B) to 〇"% by mass In the above, a sufficient photocuring sensitivity can be obtained, and the storage stability of the liquid resin as 157266.doc -120·201222097 before photocuring can be obtained by setting it as 3 G% by mass or less. To improve thermal stability and storage stability. Preferably, the photopolymerizable resin composition contains a radical polymerization inhibitor. Examples of such a radical polymerization inhibitor include p-methoxy group. Phenol, p-benzene phenol, pyrogallol, naphthylamine, tert-butyl catechol, cuprous chloride, 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, 2,2,_ Mercaptobisethyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2,-indenylbis(4-decyl-tert-butylphenol), and the like. The content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.00% by mass or more and not more than the mass% based on the total mass of the photopolymerizable resin composition. (Characteristics of the diffusion sheet) The diffusion sheet of the embodiment is preferably such that when the light is incident perpendicularly on the surface of the diffusion sheet, the diffusion angle periodically changes in a specific direction in the plane. Thereby, the diffusibility can be changed in accordance with the illuminance distribution in the plane of the sheet, so that the effect of more unevenly reducing the unevenness in brightness can be obtained. The light source unit of the hereinafter will be constructed by combining the diffusion sheet of the embodiment with a specific light source. Here, in order to explain the optical function of the diffusion sheet, the relationship between the diffusion sheet and the light source in the embodiment of the light source unit will be described. Figs. B2(a) and (b) show projection areas of the light source and projection areas between the light sources when the light sources B101 and 102 are disposed opposite to the diffusion sheet b15, respectively. Further, when the light source unit is formed, another optical sheet having another specific function may be disposed between the diffusion sheet B15 and the light sources B101 and 102, but it is omitted in Figs. 2(a) and 2(b). 157266.doc •121- 201222097 The light source is equipped with a plurality of (at least 2). As the light source, you can use the line source such as B2 (a, the cold cathode tube (CCFL) B101, etc., or the LED (light emitting diode) B102 as shown in (b) Point source of laser, etc. In the domain diagram B2 (a), (b), the symbol B103 table, the symbol B 104 represents the projection area directly above the projection light source between the light sources. The projection area directly above the light source requires high diffusivity Since the projection area between the light sources does not require high diffusivity, the diffusion angle can be surely designed by dividing the area as described above. Further, in FIGS. B2(a) and (b), the entire area is divided into the light source directly above. The projection area B103 and the projection area B1〇4 between the light sources are examples of the two regions. However, there may be a region other than the projection region B (8) directly above the light source and the projection region B104 between the light sources, for example, an end portion such as a four-corner portion. In addition, the projection area B1〇4 between the light sources may not be adjacent to the projection area B103 directly above the light source, and may also include an area located in the middle of the adjacent light source (for example, arranged along the dotted line in FIGS. B2(a) and (b). The area in the middle of the light source.) The "scattering angle" means an angle at which the transmitted light intensity is attenuated to one-half of the peak intensity (half-value angle) (FWHM: Full Width Half Maximum). An illustration of the diffusion angle is shown in Fig. B3(a). The horizontal axis represents the exit angle of the transmitted light, and the vertical axis represents the transmitted light intensity (relative value). The diffusion angle can be, for example, by using the Goniometric Radiometers Real-Time F ar-Field Angular 157266.doc «122 manufactured by Photon Co., Ltd. - 201222097

The Profiles Model LD8900 (hereinafter referred to as LD89〇〇) was obtained by measuring the angular distribution of the transmitted light intensity of the light incident from the uneven surface side in the normal direction of the uneven surface of the diffusion sheet B15. Here, in Fig. B3(b), the transmitted light intensity when light is incident from the normal direction to the uneven surface side of the diffusion sheet B15 is schematically shown. Further, as the diffusion sheet of the embodiment, it is possible to use an isotropic sheet having substantially the same diffusion angle regardless of the measurement direction, and an anisotropic sheet having different diffusion angles depending on the measurement direction. The anisotropic sheet is, for example, a sheet having a different diffusion angle when the diffusion angle is measured in two orthogonal directions. As described above, the diffusion sheet of the embodiment preferably has a diffusion angle which periodically changes in a specific direction in the plane of the sheet. Here, the so-called "periodically changing", comparing the repeated patterns with each other, &gt;, the distance corresponding to the same repeated peak and the starting point of the period having the peak period is the average of all the repeating patterns 15 Within a range of % (within 10/., preferably within 5%), the distance between the valley and the starting point of the period having the valley is within ± 15 /〇 of the average of all repeating patterns Within the range of (preferably within 丨〇%, more preferably within 5%), it is considered to conform to the diffusion angle that changes periodically. It is obvious that the direction of the above-mentioned periodicity can be determined by the distribution of the diffusion angle of the surface of the diffusion sheet as long as at least one direction exists in the diffusion sheet surface. In the embodiment, the diffusion angle of the plurality of peaks which are repeated is preferably such that the difference in the diffusion angle of the peak of the king measured is 5. Within 3, more preferably 3. Within 157266.doc -123· 201222097 The best is less than 2°. The same is true for the valley. The diffusing ability of the diffusing sheet can be obtained by taking the relative position in the plane of the sheet in the specific direction on the horizontal axis, and the diffusion angle of the relative position in the sheet surface is taken from the diffusion angle distribution map of the vertical axis. Said. Fig. B4 is a view showing one cycle of the distribution of the diffusion angle of one example of the above-mentioned diffusion sheet with respect to the relative position in the plane of the diffusion sheet. The δ Hai diffusion sheet is such that when the light is incident perpendicularly to the surface of the sheet, the diffusion angle of the emitted light periodically changes in a specific direction in the plane of the sheet. In the diffusion angle distribution diagram shown in FIG. 4, the relative position in the plane of the sheet in a specific direction in the plane of the diffusion sheet is taken on the horizontal axis, and the diffusion angle of the relative position in the plane of the sheet is taken on the vertical axis. . In the diffusion sheet of the embodiment, it is preferable that the peak point of the peak of the diffusion angle and the valley point of the diffusion angle display valley are plural (in Fig. 4, one peak point and two valley points are shown). The peak value refers to the value of the highest diffusion angle in one cycle of the distribution of the diffusion angle, and the so-called valley value refers to the value of the lowest diffusion angle in one cycle of the distribution of the diffusion angle. Preferably, the diffusion sheet of the embodiment is such that the arithmetic mean value of the peak value and the valley value displayed by the adjacent peak point and the valley point is larger than the distribution between the adjacent peak point and the valley point. The arithmetic mean of the spread angles of all points. "All points" as used herein means all measurement points. Regarding the change of the diffusion angle, as long as the arithmetic mean of the peaks and valleys displayed by the adjacent peaks and valleys is greater than all points between the adjacent peaks and the 157266.doc -124-201222097 troughs The arithmetic mean value of the diffusion angle may not be strictly linear, curved, or stepped, and may be slightly deviated from a linear, curved, or stepped shape due to measurement deviation of the diffusion angle, or a straight line. Mixed shape with the curve. When the region directly above the light source on the diffusion sheet is moved toward the region between the light sources, the incident light angle with respect to the position linearly increases. In view of the fact that the light incident angle is larger, the intensity of the light reflected from the diffusion sheet downward (ie, the light source side) and the intensity transmitted to the oblique direction of the normal direction of the diffusion sheet are higher. From the area directly above the light source to the area between the light sources, the amount of light to be diffused and nonlinearly attenuated' is greatly reduced by the above. That is, if the arithmetic mean value of the peak value and the valley value displayed by the adjacent peak point and the valley point is larger than the arithmetic mean value of the diffusion angle of the diffusion angle of all the points between the adjacent peak point and the valley point, , can reduce the uneven brightness according to the attenuation of the light to be diffused. In Figs. B5(a) to B5(f), the horizontal axis is the relative pupil position on the surface of the diffusion sheet. The vertical axis is the diffusion angle (FWHM), and the diffusion angle is linear, curved, and straight. An example of a diffusion angle distribution map of a diffuser having a mixed shape of a curve. Regarding the diffusion angle of each region in the plane of the diffusion sheet, it is generally preferred to arrange the region having a relatively high diffusion angle directly above the light source. However, when the diffusion angle of the diffusion sheet is extremely high, the diffusion sheet may have The region of the relatively low diffusion angle is disposed in the region of the illuminance directly above the light source. 157266.doc -125 - 201222097 In addition, it is preferable that the diffusion angle between the regions changes smoothly. In view of reducing the unevenness of brightness, t' is particularly preferably in the shape of a plurality of peaks including a continuous number in a high diffusion angle region, and the shape thereof is preferably a straight line, a downward convex curve, or a straight line and a direction. The shape of the juice of the lower convex curve is combined (Fig. B5(d), (f)). This pattern is particularly effective when the light source is a line source. Further, from the viewpoint of reducing uneven brightness, there is a valley value of the diffusion angle, and the diffusion angle distribution in the low diffusion angle region including the above-described valley value is a downward convex curve having the above-mentioned bottom value as a minimum value. Good (Figure Μ (a) ~ (4)). Figure B5(c) includes a second interval in which the distribution of the diffusion angle includes the above-mentioned peak and has an upwardly convex curve shape, and the distribution of the diffusion angle includes a curve shape in which V = value eight has a downward convex shape. This pattern is particularly effective when the light source is a point source. For example, when a light-emitting diode is used as the point light source, the diffusion angle of the diffusion sheet of the embodiment can be designed specifically for the illuminance distribution regardless of the light exit angle. 5, the relative value of the illuminance is in the stage. Sexually distributed, the diffusion angle is designed for the value. Here, the "high diffusion angle region" is an angular region larger than the arithmetic mean of the maximum value of the peak value and the minimum value of the combination value, and the "low diffusion angle region" is set to be smaller than the maximum value of the peak value. The angular region of the arithmetic mean of the minimum of the valleys. The arithmetic mean of the peak and valley values is calculated using the distribution based on the diffusion angle defined above. 157266.doc -126- 201222097 Furthermore, the cycle, the peak value and the bottom value are not limited to, and there may be a plurality of identical values. Further, the diffusion angle of all the points distributed between the adjacent peak points and the valley points means the diffusion angle existing in the dotted line portion of the figure. That is, in the case where there are a plurality of peak points, it means the diffusion angle existing at all points in the interval between the position corresponding to the adjacent valley point and the position corresponding to the peak point. Fig. B8 is a view showing an example of arrangement of a high diffusion angle region and a low diffusion angle region of the diffusion sheet of the embodiment. In Figs. B6 and B7, it is shown that the high diffusion angle region Β3〇ι and the low diffusion angle region periodically exist in the direction of the sleeve in the plane of the diffusion sheet: the case, that is, the diffusion angle is as shown in Fig. 35(a)~(1) A situation that changes periodically. The pattern shown in Figures B6 and B7 is suitable for use with a line source, but can also be used with a point source. In addition, the high diffusion angle area and the low diffusion angle area 〇 B304 are periodically present in the X-axis direction and the direction of the sheet surface. In this case, in the x-axis or the cross section of the diffusion sheet, the diffusion angle also changes as shown in Figs. 5(a) to (f). As shown in Fig. B8, the figure is suitable for the person &amp; e a, the beam is suitable for the point source, but can also be used for the line source. The above-described surface may have a surface in which the surface of the surface has a concavo-convex structure and a diffusion angle which varies depending on the position of the surface. 157266.doc •127· 201222097 Firstly, the laser is irradiated onto the photosensitive material or the photoresist by interference exposure, and the sub-master mold with the speckle pattern is formed by the lens or the mask. The diffusion angle can be changed according to the position by changing the size and shape of the speckle pattern constituting the laser irradiation system and the distance or size between the pieces, and recording the concave angle structure with different diffusion angles to control the diffusion angle.

The scatter ==&amp; enclosure is formed and controlled by the relief structure and usually depends on the average size and shape of the speckle. Don A If the speckle is small, the angle range is wider. Further, the unit of the above-mentioned concavities and convexities can be formed by anisotropic, concave and convex structures and convex structures. I becomes a concave which combines the two. If the speckle is an elliptical shape in the horizontal direction, the circular shape is expanded. The shape of the angular distribution is such that the longitudinal direction is such that the secondary main mold whose diffusion angle changes according to the position is transferred to the metal by electroforming or the like on the secondary main mold to form a main mold method, and the metal is coated. The spot pattern is formed on the uncured resin layer containing the photopolymerizable resin composition described above by ultraviolet rays using the main mold, and the speckle pattern is transferred onto the resin layer. A detailed manufacturing method of the diffusion sheet which changes the diffusion angle according to the position is disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2003-525472 (International Publication No. 01/065469). Specifically, using a light source, a mask disposed on the light path 157266.doc-128-201222097 of the light projected from the light source and having an opening of a variable size and shape for recording light generated by the light source a diffusion plate of the diffusion pattern, a diffusion plate disposed between the mask and the photosensitive plate to diffuse light, and a baffle disposed between the diffusion plate and the photosensitive plate to block a portion of the light, and changing the opening of the mask The diffuser is produced by the size and shape of the baffle, the degree of diffusion of the diffuser, and the distance between the constituent members. For example, the following methods can be cited. (1) By forming the shape of the opening of the mask into a vertically long shape, the shape of the bottom surface of the convex portion recorded on the photosensitive plate is a horizontally long ellipse, and the elliptical diffusion ability for displaying the vertical length is formed (orthogonal A region with a different diffusion angle in 2 directions. (2) By setting the shape of the opening of the mask to a square shape, the shape of the bottom surface of the convex portion recorded on the photosensitive plate is isotropic, and the ability to exhibit isotropic diffusion is formed (the diffusion angle is in all directions). The same area. When the pattern of the above (1) and (2) is combined to form a periodic pattern, a diffusion sheet of the embodiment, that is, a diffusion sheet whose diffusion angle is periodically changed in the plane can be formed. The height of the unevenness of the surface structure of the diffusion sheet can be judged based on, for example, the distance between the cross-sectional shapes of the diffusion sheets observed by a scanning electron microscope, the aspect ratio, the surface roughness, and the like. Further, the pitch, the aspect ratio, the surface roughness, and the like may be read from the observation image of the surface of the diffusion sheet obtained by the laser confocal microscope. For example, the shorter the pitch, or the larger the aspect ratio, or the larger the surface roughness, the higher the uneven height is considered. [Light source unit] 157266.doc -129· 201222097 The light source unit of the embodiment includes two or more light sources and the diffusion sheet disposed opposite to the light source. Figs. B9(a) and (b) and Figs. B10(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the light source unit of the embodiment. In the light source unit of the embodiment, a plurality of light sources are used. As the light source, a line source Bn such as a cold cathode tube (CCFL) as shown in FIG. B9 or an LED (light emitting diode) or a laser as shown in FIG. Equal point source B12. At this time, the light sources B11 and B12 are arranged directly below the light incident surface and the light exit surface of the diffusion sheet B15. The light source unit basically includes a light source (line light source Bu or point light source B12) and a diffusion sheet B15 of an embodiment disposed opposite to the light sources B11 and B12 (see Figs. B9(a) and B10(a)). Further, it is preferable that the back surface side of the line light source B1 丨 and the point light source B12, that is, the side opposite to the arrangement side of the diffusion sheet, is provided with a reflection sheet B13 having a function of reflecting light. Further, when the optical unit has the above configuration, a specific optical sheet, a diffusing plate containing a diffusing agent (symbol sharing 14), or the like may be further disposed, and for example, may be formed between the light sources B11 and B12 and the diffusion sheet B15. A diffuser plate or a specific optical sheet B14 is provided (Fig. B9(b), Fig. 81). The diffuser plate B14 can be used as long as it has a function of diffusing light. For example, it can be used for adding an organic polymer or inorganic fine particles having an effect of diffusing light to polystyrene, an acrylic resin, a polysulfonate S, a cycloolefin polymer or the like. The diffusing plates have an effect of diffusing the light to homogenize the light of the lower light source. Further, the above-mentioned diffusion 157266.doc -130· 201222097 plate may have an uneven shape on the surface. Further, a sheet-shaped diffusion sheet formed by mixing two or more kinds of resins and extending them may be used. As the reflection sheet B13, a material known in the prior art can be used as long as it has a function of reflecting light. For example, any one of the following may be used: a resin such as polyacetal or polycarbonate is foamed, and fine air particles are added to the inside to form a sheet; and two or more kinds of resins are mixed to form a sheet; And a sheet obtained by laminating a resin having different refractive indices. Further, the reflection sheet B13 may have an uneven shape on the surface. These may also be used by adding inorganic fine particles or the like to the surface as needed. In the light source unit of the embodiment, when a diffusion sheet whose diffusion angle periodically changes in a specific direction in the plane is used, the period of the diffusion angle distribution of the diffusion sheet and the illuminance of the light incident surface of the diffusion sheet are preferably used. The period of the distribution is set to be approximately equal. The period of the diffusion angle distribution can be as described above, and the distance or size, the speckle pattern, the shape and the direction between the members of the laser irradiation system are formed by controlling the uneven structure of the recording surface in the manufacturing step of the diffusion sheet. The illuminance distribution of the smooth surface of the person to which the diffusion sheet m5 is adjusted can be measured, for example, by EZCONTRASTXL88 or the like of Rainbow. Specifically, the diffusion sheet in the light source unit provided with the diffusion sheet B15 is removed by measuring r by setting the focus of the device to the position where the light incident surface of the diffusion sheet is located, and measuring the luminance distribution of all the orientations. 'According to the result, the cumulative beam amount 157266.doc •131-201222097 (Integrated Intensity) is obtained, and the above operation is repeated for the in-plane measurement target range. Fig. B (a) and (b) are schematic perspective views showing a specific configuration example of a light source unit according to an embodiment. In the light source unit shown in FIGS. (4) and (8), the diffusion sheet B15 is periodically distributed in the plane at the above-described diffusion angle, and the direction in which the diffusion angle is periodically distributed is orthogonal to the length direction of the CCFL light source Bu. Configure in a consistent direction. Further, ®B11(b) is a structure obtained by adding a specific optical sheet B14 to the configuration of Fig. B11 (4). Fig. B12 is a view showing the relationship between the relative positions of the light sources in the light source unit and the diffusion angle distribution period of the diffusion sheet. In FIGS. B11(a) and (b), since the period of the illuminance distribution of the human light surface of the diffusion sheet is equal to the interval between the light sources, the diffusion angle distribution period in the plane of the diffusion sheet is substantially equal to the distance between the light sources. The period of the illuminance distribution is substantially equal to the period of the diffusion angle distribution described above. In the case where the illuminance distribution of the light incident surface of the diffusion sheet is higher in the region directly above the light source, it is preferable to arrange the high diffusion angle region of the diffusion sheet from the viewpoint of eliminating luminance unevenness. ''' Fig. B12 shows the above-mentioned diffusion angle distribution purpose corresponding to the illuminance distribution of the light incident surface of the upper diffusion sheet, and it is suitable to adjust the projection area between the light source and B 12 and the diffusion angle and the unevenness. The height can be made uniform to the difference between the projection area of B 11 and B 12 and the diffusion angle of the light source b ^ ^, and the difference between the height of the concave and convex, 157266.doc -132· 201222097 according to the position in the plane of the diffusion sheet. Hereinafter, a specific configuration example of the light source unit of the embodiment will be described. For example, the configuration shown in Figs. B13(a) to B13(C) can be employed as the configuration of the light source unit. In the above configuration, the line light source B11 is exemplified by 〇 (:: 1) as a light source. However, as shown, for example, in Fig. B14, the light source is a point light source B 丨 2 such as an LED. Fig. B13(a) is shown in the above figure. In the configuration of the light source unit shown in B9(b), a fine uneven structure is formed between the diffusion plate B14 and the diffusion sheet B15 disposed between the diffusion plate B14 and the diffusion sheet B15 disposed directly above the light source 作为 with reference to the upper and lower directions in the drawing. The surface-formed diffusion sheet B16 and the light-emitting unit in which the surface-formed diffusion sheet B16 is disposed directly above the diffusion sheet B15. Here, as the surface-formed diffusion sheet B16, an acrylic-based diffusion sheet B16 can be used. A sheet obtained by coating the spherical particles of the tree g. on a sheet of a polyester resin, triethyl cellulose or polycarbonate. Further, as the surface-forming diffuser B16, it is also possible to use The sheet obtained by transferring the fine concavo-convex structure formed of the ultraviolet curable resin to a sheet of polyester tree C), such as ruthenium, diacetyl cellulose or polycarbonate. Such a surface-formed type diffusion sheet B16 has an effect of diffusing and uniformizing light, and has a function of condensing light diffused by the diffusion plate B14. By using the surface-formed type diffusion sheet B16 in combination with the diffusion sheet B15, unevenness in brightness can be reduced, and the thickness of the light source unit can be reduced and the number of light sources can be reduced. In the configuration shown in FIG. B9(b), the diffusion plate Bi4 and the diffusion sheet B15 disposed directly above the light source Bu are arranged in order, with the upper and lower directions in the drawing as a reference. An optical sheet (hereinafter also referred to as "strip") 17 of an array of iridium array structures 157266.doc-133-201222097, and a surface-formed diffusion sheet B16 having a fine uneven structure formed on the surface thereof. Light source unit. In addition, Fig. B13(c) shows the configuration shown in Fig. B9(b), and the surface is formed by using the upper and lower directions in the drawing as the reference 'on the diffusion plate and the diffusion sheet B15 disposed directly above the light source B11'. A light source unit formed of a surface-formed diffusion sheet B16 having a fine uneven structure and a reflective polarizer B18. As the enamel sheet B17, an optical sheet in which the cross-sectional shape is a substantially triangular shape, a substantially trapezoidal shape, or a substantially elliptical ridge line array arranged in an array on the surface can be used. From the viewpoint of improving wear resistance and the like, the shape in which the apex of the cross-sectional shape is formed into an arc shape can be preferably used. As the prism sheet B17', a string of the ultraviolet curable resin can be transferred to a polyfluorene-based resin, triethylcellulose or polycarbonate. Since the prism 7 is shown to be reflective, it has the function of concentrating the light toward the front. By using the enamel sheet in combination with the diffusion sheet of the embodiment, unevenness in brightness can be reduced, and the thickness of the light source unit can be reduced and the number of light sources can be reduced. Fig. B14 (4) shows the configuration shown in Fig. B1 (b), with the upper and lower directions in the figure as the reference, and placed above the diffuser B14 and the diffuser B15 directly above the light „D 尤#, B12. The surface of the 罟 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 雄 罟 157 - - - 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 157 In the configuration shown in FIG. B10(b), the cymbal B17 and the reflection are sequentially disposed above the diffusion plate b14 and the diffusion sheet B15 disposed directly above the light source B12 with reference to the upper and lower directions in the drawing. A light source unit formed by a polarizer B18. As the reflective polarizer B18, a sheet having a function of separating linearly polarized light from natural light or polarized light can be used. As the sheet for separating the linearly polarized light, for example, a film which transmits one of the linearly polarized lights orthogonal to the axial direction and reflects the other is reflected. Specifically, as the reflective polarizer B18, a resin (polycarbonate, acrylic resin, polyester resin, etc.) having a large birefringence phase difference and a resin having a small retardation phase difference (ring) can be used. a sheet obtained by alternately laminating a plurality of layers and uniaxially stretching, or a sheet having a structure in which hundreds of layers of a birefringent polyester resin are laminated (trade name·· DBEF ' 3M (share) Manufacturing) and so on. Other than this, the configuration of the light source unit may be configured by, for example, the arrangement shown in Fig. B丨5 and Fig. B16. In the same manner as the above-described example, the arrangement configuration is shown with reference to the upper and lower directions in the drawing. In the configuration shown in Fig. B9(a), the diffusion plate B14' is disposed between the light source Bu and the diffusion sheet B15, and the surface-forming diffusion sheet B16 is disposed directly above the diffusion sheet B15. Light source unit. In addition, in the configuration shown in Fig. B9(a), the light source unit is formed by sequentially arranging the diffusion plate B14 and the surface-formed diffusion sheet Big above the diffusion sheet B15. Fig. B15(c) shows a configuration shown in Fig. B9(a), in which a diffusion plate B14 is disposed between the light source β11 and the expansion 157266.doc - 135·201222097 sheet B15, and is sequentially arranged above the diffusion sheet Bi5. A light source unit formed of a cymbal B17 and a reflective polarizer B18. Further, in the configuration shown in Fig. B9(a), the diffusion plate B14 is disposed between the light source B11 and the diffusion sheet B15, and further, above the diffusion sheet B15, the prisms of the prism sheet B17 are arranged. A light source unit in which two prism sheets B17' are arranged in a direction orthogonal to each other and then a surface-forming diffusion sheet Bi6 is disposed. Fig. B16(a) shows a configuration shown in Fig. B9(a), in which a diffusion plate B 14 ' is disposed between the light source Bii and the diffusion sheet B 15 , and a surface forming type is sequentially disposed above the diffusion sheet b 1 5 . A light source unit formed by a diffusion sheet B16, a cymbal sheet B17, and a reflective polarizer B18. In addition, in the configuration shown in Fig. B9(a), the diffusion plate B14, the surface-formed diffusion sheet B16', the B-sheet B17, and the reflection-type polarizer B18 are sequentially disposed above the diffusion sheet B15. The light source unit. [Liquid Crystal Display Device] The liquid crystal display device of the embodiment includes a specific display unit and a light source unit that penetrates the above-described embodiment. For example, a liquid crystal display panel including a liquid crystal layer between two polarizing plates is provided above the light source unit of the embodiment shown in Fig. 10 (b). The diffusion sheet and the light source unit according to the first aspect of the present invention have industrial applicability as a diffusion sheet and a light source unit for a liquid crystal display device. Hereinafter, the second invention of the present specification will be described, and the second invention of the present specification relates to a light guide plate which can be preferably used in the present invention. 157266.doc -136- 201222097 The second invention of the present specification relates to a light guiding member, for example, a surface light source device of a so-called end face illumination method, or a light guide plate 0 liquid crystal display device which can be used for various illumination devices. It does not emit light, so the current use of a light source requires a surface light source device. As a surface light source device, the direct-type surface light source device disposed on the back surface of the liquid crystal display panel and the end-illuminated surface light source device in which the light source is disposed on the side surface of the liquid crystal display panel are used, and the liquid crystal display device is reduced in thickness. In some cases, a surface light source device suitable for a thinned end face illumination method is often used. The surface light source device of the end face illumination method generally includes a light guide plate that emits light from a light source toward a liquid crystal display panel side, and a light source such as an LED (light-emitting diode RCCFL (cold cathode tube) disposed at a side portion thereof; And a cymbal or the like that directs the light emitted from the light guide plate toward the liquid crystal display panel side. The light guide plate generally includes a first surface (hereinafter also referred to as a "light-emitting surface") and a second surface opposite to the first surface a surface (hereinafter also referred to as "opposite surface"), and a light surface sandwiched between the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface, such that the light from the side (human light surface) is reflected inside the panel The light guide is disposed, and the guided light is emitted from the light emitted from the opposite side toward the liquid crystal display panel side. However, when the light guide plate is used in combination with a plurality of point light sources, the following Disadvantages · Although in the face (4) (distance from the point source - a fixed distance. P bit), the uniform brightness is transmitted, but in the vicinity of the light source near the point source, it is right. Part of the area between the source and the point source 'On the other hand,; the part of the point source is extremely bright. 157266.doc •137· 201222097 The so-called hot spot produces uneven brightness. Therefore, using a plurality of point sources as the light source can only use the light guide. The problem of the central portion of the light-emitting surface is actually a method for preventing such uneven brightness. The optical structure (hereinafter also referred to as "diffusion structure") for diffusing incident light has been studied in the industry, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2 In the publication No. 2_169〇34, a light guide plate having a trapezoidal concavo-convex structure formed by traversing a triangular shape having a symmetry is provided on the light incident surface, and is disclosed in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei. The light-incident surface is provided with a light guide plate having a recessed portion in which the opening portion is substantially square and has a circular arc-shaped corner portion at the bottom. Further, in the Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. Hei. In addition, a periodic micro-cutting light plate such as a lentils is applied to the light-incident surface, and it is disclosed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2__34234 that it is provided with an adhesive and a needle-like filling. The anisotropic light diffuses the light guide plate of the adhesive layer. In addition, in a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display device that electronically captures the surface of the phosphor to display an image, the pixels of the image display surface are only In the liquid crystal display device, each pixel is always illuminated during the lighting period of the illumination device. Therefore, the contrast reduction or dynamic map occurs in the liquid crystal display device due to the residual light characteristics of the human eye. As a countermeasure, a technique is known in which the light exiting face of the light guide plate is divided into a plurality of sections, and the area control is performed in such a manner that only one of the plurality of light sources is lit, and only the light source is used. A part of the light exiting the light guide plate emits light from the partition, and the other points are not illuminated; and the technique of adjusting the amount of light between the partitions (hereinafter referred to as "local dimming"). The local dimming system can be used for the above-mentioned display image: in addition to the contrast enhancement, it can also be used to save power consumption, and reduce the display of the three-dimensional 'stereo" image while seeing the image for the right eye and the image for the left eye. A useful technique like the phenomenon of crosstalk (cr〇sstalk). In the liquid crystal display device using the surface illumination device of the end face illumination method, in order to perform the local dimming, a plurality of light sources disposed in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the light guide plate are divided into two or more partitions (for example, "top half" , "two partitions of the lower half", only the required partitions are lit. At this time, there is a problem that the light emitted from the light source is diffusible, and therefore, in the partition other than the partition in which the light-emitting surface is to be illuminated, the light is incident on the light-emitting surface and the opposite surface according to the critical angle of the material of the light guide plate. The partition between the continuous total reflection and the partition adjacent to the light-illuminated partition also emits a weak light. "A lighting device that divides a light-emitting area of a light-emitting surface into a plurality of short strip-shaped regions is proposed as a form for realizing local light adjustment (for example, refer to Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2001-210122). A light-emitting surface is provided on the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, and a light source is disposed at the apex thereof, and a lentil lens is disposed on the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, and a light source is disposed at a focus position thereof (Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2009-199927). The inventors of the second invention of the present invention want to obtain a surface illumination device that can simultaneously achieve a hot spot suppression and a dimming method of both of them. However, in order to perform local dimming, the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-122 is adopted. In the technique described in the bulletin, since the method requires the division of the light guide 157266.doc.139-201222097, the assembly time increases or the strength decreases. In addition, a dark line is generated in the divided portion. The other side Φ, Japan The technique described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2009-199927 is to provide an optical structure for discarding light on an incident surface, which is difficult to be disposed on the incident surface side for suppressing hot spots. Therefore, the inventors of the second aspect of the present invention have created a substantially parallel groove structure extending in the normal direction of the light incident surface on the light exit surface for local dimming, and A light guide plate having a groove shape extending from the light-emitting surface in the direction of the opposing surface is provided on the light-incident surface. However, the inventors of the second aspect of the present invention have found that a diffusion structure is provided on the light-incident surface and that the light-emitting surface has an entrance and exit. The grooved structure of the smooth surface of the smooth surface is generally parallel (4) to help reduce the hot spot, but a so-called bright line that extends linearly from the light-incident surface (see Figure G18). The second invention is in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the invention is to provide a light guide plate capable of performing local dimming, such as a hot spot or a bright line near a human light surface on a light-emitting surface, including the light guide plate. A surface light source device for a light guide plate, and a display device including the surface light source device, and a television receiver device including the display device. The inventor of the second invention of the present specification, the light guide plate Through intensive research, it was found that the above-mentioned hot spot or bright line can be eliminated by providing a light diffusing portion having a controlled light diffusing property on the light incident surface, and a uniform luminance distribution is obtained throughout the entire light emitting surface, thereby completing the second invention of the present specification. . That is, the second invention of the present specification is as follows. [1] 157266.doc 140-201222097 A light guide plate comprising: at least one light incident surface that receives light from a light source; and is substantially orthogonal to the light incident surface, such that light incident from the light incident surface is emitted a first surface; and a second surface substantially perpendicular to the light incident surface and facing the first surface; wherein the first surface and/or the second surface are substantially parallel to a normal direction of the light incident surface The groove structure, Ο the above-mentioned light incident surface has anisotropic light diffusion characteristics, and the incident light from the normal direction thereof has a diffusion angle in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface is larger than the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. The diffusion angle is a light-emitting pattern curve in which the light emitted from the normal direction of the light-incident surface is emitted as an off-angle in the longitudinal direction of the light-incident surface, and the light-emitting pattern as the entire light-incident surface of the vertical axis. When the normal distribution curve of the point where the intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting pattern curve is 1 point of the peak intensity and the intensity of the emitted light is one-half of the peak intensity is 2 points, the total distribution curve is 〇 The following conditions 1. and/or conditions 2.: Conditions 1. The range of the exit angle of the intensity of the emitted light is 3/4 or more of the peak intensity is narrower than the normal distribution curve; Condition 2. The intensity of the emitted light is the peak intensity of 1 The range of the exit angle of /1〇 is wider than the normal distribution curve. [2] The light guide plate according to [1], wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the light incident surface has a diffusion angle greater than 〇° and less than 40 in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. . 157266.doc -141- 201222097

The light guide plate of the above item (1) or [2], wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the light incident surface has a diffusion angle greater than 〇 in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. And 30. [4] The light guide plate according to any one of [1] to [3] wherein the light incident surface is divided into two or more partial regions having different light diffusion characteristics, and the two or more partial regions include · The first partial region having anisotropic light diffusion characteristics, the angle of incidence of the incident light from the normal direction thereof in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface is greater than the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface; The second partial region having anisotropic light diffusion characteristics, the angle of incidence of the incident light from the normal direction thereof in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface is smaller than the diffusion angle of the first partial region, and larger than the length of the light incident surface The expansion angle in the vertical direction, and/or the third partial region having the isotropic light diffusion characteristic, the diffusion angle of the incident light from the normal direction in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface and the incident light The diffusion angles in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the face are substantially equal. [5] The light guide plate of the above item [4] wherein a ratio of at least one partial region of the first to third partial regions to the light incident surface of 20 mm2 is substantially fixed in the plane. [6] 157266.doc -142- 201222097 The light guide plate of the above [4] or [5], the one to the third part of the above-mentioned section is cut into a plurality of small areas, the small area is opposite to The proportion of the entrance surface of 20 mm2 is 10 to 80%. [7] The light guide plate of any one of [4] to [6], wherein the first to the third partial regions are respectively divided into a plurality of small regions, and the first to third partial cutter regions are The area of each small area in one partial area is 〇2~4 mm2 ° Ο [8] The light guide plate of any item in item [4] to [7] of the month, in which the first part area exists, Closing, the opening or the bottom surface has a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. [9] wherein at least one of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions is irregularly different. Light guide plate distance as in [8], and depth or height

[10] As in the previous paragraph [8] or [9], the light guide plate is formed by the direction of the length of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions and the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of λ jj- b and the front surface. The angle is below 10°. [11] The light guide plate of any of item [8] to [iG], wherein an average pitch of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions is 5 〇 μηη or less. [12] 157266.doc • 143- 201222097 The light guide plate of any of the items [8] to [U], wherein the plurality of concave or convex portions have an average depth or height of 1 to 50 μίη. [13] The light guide plate of the item [8] to [12] t, wherein the plurality of concave portions or convex portions are formed by exposure of a speckle pattern. [14] The light guide plate of any one of [4] to [13], wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the first partial region has a diffusion angle of 5 in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. Above and less than 4〇. . [15] The derivative of any one of the items (4) to [14], wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the first partial region has a diffusion angle of 0 in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface. Above, 3〇. the following. [16] The light guide plate of any one of [4] to [15], wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the first partial region is perpendicular to the length of the light incident surface and perpendicular to the length of the light incident surface. In the distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light in the direction with respect to the exit angle, the exit angle = 0. The transmitted light intensity at that time is 9 〇 = above of the peak intensity. [17] The light guide plate according to any one of [4] to [16] wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the second partial region or the third partial region is diffused in the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface The angle is 0. Above and not up to 20. . The light guide plate of any one of the above-mentioned [4] to [17], wherein the light incident from the normal direction to the second partial region or the third partial region is in the light In the distribution of the longitudinal direction of the smooth surface and the direction of the outgoing light intensity in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction with respect to the exit angle, the exit angle = 〇. The intensity of the emitted light is 90% or more of the peak intensity. [19] The light guide plate of any one of [1] to [18], wherein at least a portion of the region having anisotropic light diffusion characteristics existing on the human light surface comprises a lumped layer on the light incident surface An adhesive layer and an anisotropic light-diffusing layer laminated on the adhesive layer. [20] The light guide plate of the above item [9] wherein the above-mentioned adhesive layer is formed of a material having a storage elastic modulus G' of 40,000 to 18 Å. [21] The light guide plate of any one of [1] to [20] wherein the groove structure is a lenticular lens shape.

[22] wherein the light guide plate of any one of the above items (1) to [20] includes a plurality of random grooves. [23] The above-mentioned random plurality of grooves are flat as in the above item [22], and the light guide plates are spaced apart by a distance of 30 μm. [24] Among the above-mentioned random plural grooves, the light guide plate of the above item [22] or [23] 157266.doc • 145- 201222097 The average depth of the groove is 1~50 μιη. [25] The light guide plate of any one of (1) to [24], wherein the groove structure is formed from a position of the inner side and/or the second side of the human light side end portion 1, _ form. [26] A surface light source device comprising: the light guide plate according to any one of [1] to [25]; and the above-described at least arranged in the light guide plate! A plurality of point sources near the entrance surface. [27] A display device comprising: a display panel including a display area for displaying by adjusting transmission of light; and a surface light source device according to the above item [26] disposed on the back surface of the display panel. [28] The display device according to [27], wherein the display panel is a liquid crystal display panel. [29] A television receiving apparatus comprising: the display device according to [27] or [28] of the preceding item; and a tuner for receiving a broadcast image signal. According to the light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification, when a light source including a plurality of point light sources is used, the light-emitting surface includes a light-emitting surface 157266.doc -146-201222097' for local dimming The display device comprises the source device for displaying the near-hot spot and the bright line with less uneven brightness, and the television receiving device including the surface light source device device. The following is a description of the body. The embodiment of the light guide plate according to the second invention of the present specification is provided

The light guide plate 2 according to the second aspect of the present invention includes: at least one light incident surface G22 that receives light from the light source; a first surface G21 that emits light incident from the light incident surface; and a first surface opposite thereto a second surface; the first surface and the second surface are substantially orthogonal to the light incident surface, and the first surface and/or the second surface have a groove structure substantially parallel to a normal direction of the light incident surface (see FIG. 2) . In the entire light incident surface, the incident angle of the incident light from the normal direction in the longitudinal direction G24 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the first direction") of the light incident surface is larger than that of the incident light. The diffusion angle in the direction G25 (hereinafter, also referred to as "second direction") in the longitudinal direction of the surface. Here, the longitudinal direction of the light-incident surface means a direction in which the area circumscribing the light-incident surface is the smallest and the long side of the rectangle is connected. In the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention, as shown in (1), the emission angle of the outgoing light in the first direction from the normal direction of the light incident surface is taken as the horizontal axis, and the intensity is taken as the vertical direction. The light-emitting pattern curve of the entire light-incident surface is equal to one point of the peak point of the peak intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting pattern curve, and the intensity of the outgoing light is an intermediate point of one-half of the peak intensity of the peak point. When the normal distribution curve of the point is compared, at least one of the following two conditions is satisfied. Condition I The intensity of the outgoing light is 3/4 or more of the peak intensity. The exit angle is 157266.doc • The range of 147-201222097 is narrower than the normal distribution curve. 2. The intensity of the emitted light is 1/1〇 or more of the peak intensity. The range of the range of the exit angle of the normal distribution curve is not limited, and the range of the exit angle of 3/4 or more of the peak intensity is preferably 3% or more narrower than the range of the normal distribution curve. . Further, the range of the emission angle which is 1/10 or more of the peak intensity is preferably 5% or more, more preferably 10% or more, with respect to the range of the normal distribution curve. The light-emitting pattern curve of the light-incident surface as a whole can be measured, for example, by using a variable-angle difference meter such as GC5000L manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd., to measure the transmitted light intensity of light incident on the surface from the normal direction of the light-incident surface. The angular distribution in the first direction (the distribution of the transmitted light intensity with respect to the exit angle) is obtained. Furthermore, the laser diameter of the light source of the incident laser light used at this time was set to 3 mm. Here, when the light-incident surface is divided into a plurality of partial regions having different light diffusibility as will be described later, the average value of the light-emission pattern curve for detecting any one or more points is determined. (The distribution of the average value of the emitted light intensity with respect to each emission angle) is taken as the light-emission pattern curve of the entire light-incident surface. The diffusion angle of the first direction and the second direction of the entire entrance surface is not limited, and is preferably within the following range. Here, the "diffusion angle" refers to an angle (FWHM: Full Width Half Maximum) at which the intensity of the light is attenuated to one-half of the peak intensity (half-value angle) (see Fig. G1). 157266.doc -!48- 201222097 The diffusion angle in the first direction and the second direction can be based on the arrangement of the point source used in combination with the light guide plate for the surface light source device, or the types of other optical elements such as the diffusion sheet and the reflection sheet. Suitably, in general, it is preferred that the diffusion angle in the first direction is greater than zero. And did not reach 40. More preferably 5. Above and not up to 25. . Further, the diffusion angle in the second direction is preferably small; and the diffusion angle in the first direction is larger than 〇. And less than 3 〇. More preferably, it is less than 15. ‘It’s better than 1’. . Further, the diffusion angle of the entire light-incident surface can be measured, for example, by using a photon manufactured by Ine·, or a GC5000L manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. The angular distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light of the light incident on the light incident surface in the normal direction of the light incident surface (the distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light with respect to the exit angle). Here, when the light incident surface is divided into a plurality of partial regions having different light diffusibility as will be described later, the average of the angular distribution of the emitted light intensity measured at any one or more points is obtained. The value (the distribution of the average of the intensity of the emitted light with respect to each of the exit angles) is the angular distribution of the intensity of the exit pupil of the entire light incident surface. The light-emitting pattern curve as described above can be realized, for example, by dividing the light-incident surface into two or more partial regions having different light diffusion characteristics, and configuring at least one of the partial regions (first partial regions) to have The anisotropic light diffusion characteristic, that is, the angle of diffusion of the incident light from the normal direction of the incident light in the first direction is greater than the diffusion angle in the second direction. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a state in which, as shown, for example, in FIG. G5, the light incident surface is divided into two or more partial regions having different light diffusion characteristics, and 157266.doc - 149 - 201222097 at least ! A partial region is divided into a plurality of small regions. Preferably, the sub-region of the above-mentioned sub-region includes at least: a first-part region having a divergent light-diffusing characteristic from a normal direction thereof; the first diffusion angle in the first direction is greater than a diffusion angle in two directions, and a second partial region having anisotropic light diffusion characteristics, the angle of incidence of the incident light from the normal direction in the first direction is greater than the diffusion angle in the first direction The diffusion angle in the first direction is smaller than the diffusion angle of the first boring region, and/or the third partial region having the isotropic light diffusion characteristic, and the diffusion of the incident light from the normal direction in the first direction The angle is approximately equal to the angle of diffusion in the second direction. Further, each of the light-emitting pattern curves of the respective first and third partial regions does not need to satisfy the above condition 丨· or the above condition 2·, and may be represented by a normal distribution curve. In order to prevent brightness unevenness more effectively, it is preferable that the above two or more partial regions exist in a moderate ratio in the light incident surface. The proportion of the area occupied by the partial regions in the human light surface is not particularly limited. Preferably, at least the partial region of the first and third partial regions is divided into a plurality of small regions, and the small regions are opposite to the light incident surface. The proportion of leg 2 is 10~80. /. Further, it is preferable that the ratio of at least the upper partial region of the first to third partial regions to the light incident surface of 20 mm2 is substantially fixed over the entire surface. Here, the term "substantially fixed" means that when the ratio of the at least one partial region to 2 〇 mm 2 is measured for any one or more portions of the light incident surface, the deviation of the ratio is 1% of the average value. the following. 157266.doc -150· 201222097 In addition, it is preferable to set the above -~筮= first. The p sub-area is divided into a plurality of small areas, and the area of each of the first-only one-shirt \ v and the second knives area of at least one of the knives is 02 4 2 广u 积马〇.2 ~4 mm2. By setting the area of the small area of each partial area to be small, the light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification is made into a surface light source, and the surface of the light source is used as a surface light source. The ground requires the alignment accuracy of the light source and the light guide plate.

The first in the glossy. The configuration of the ρ sub-area, the second partial area, and the third partial area is infinite. For example, the respective partial regions can be regularly arranged (Fig. G5(4) to (4)), or can be randomly arranged (Fig. G5(f)). Further, each of the partial regions is disposed so as to cross the light surface in the second direction (Fig. G5 (4), (8)), or may be arranged in an island shape without cross-section (Fig. G5 (4) to (9). Further, it may be divided into three or more types. Part of the area (Fig. G5(e)). ~ The diffusion of light from the normal direction to the various parts of the area is not limited. It is preferably within the following range. The first area is in the first direction. The diffusion angle is preferably 5 or more and less than 4 Å, more preferably 5 or more and less than 2 〇. The diffusion angle in the second direction is preferably smaller than the diffusion angle in the first direction, and is larger than G And less than 4 〇 ° 'more preferably less than 15. The first portion of the region in the first direction of the diffusion angle is preferably smaller than the diffusion angle of the first partial region 'and 0. Above and less than 20. More than Preferably, the diffusion angle in the second direction is smaller than the diffusion angle 第二 in the first direction of the second partial region, and is 〇. The above is less than 2 〇. More preferably, it is less than 10 ^ The third part of the area is preferably the diffusion angle in the first direction and the second direction 157266.doc -151- 2012 22097 degrees are roughly equal, and are 〇. The above is not reached, and it is better not to reach ι〇. Here, the term is roughly equal, which means that the ratio of the two is within the range of 〇9 or more and not reached! In addition, the diffusion angle of the third partial region in the first and/or second directions may also be 0. Further, the diffusion angle of each partial region may be, for example, by using Ph*n manufactured by Ph0i0n Inc., or the above. The GC5_L variable-angle character difference meter manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Co., Ltd. measures the angular distribution of the intensity of the light emitted from the normal direction of the light incident into each partial region (the intensity of the emitted light is relative to the emission) When the size of each partial region is smaller than the If shape of the laser light source used for the laser source, the angular distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light of each partial region can be normally distributed. The diffusion angle of each partial region can be approximated by the angle distribution of the transmitted light intensity of the light having the surface of the plurality of partial regions as the angular distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light of each partial region (normal knife cloth). W (Fig. G10) The normal distribution curve is a curve in which C is set to a constant and σ is set to the standard deviation, which is represented by the following equation. [Number 1] y

C 4 ϊ π σ exp determines the respective partial regions by changing the respective C and σ of the two normal distribution curves so that the difference between the approximated value obtained by totaling the intensity at each angle and the measured value is reduced. The approximation of the angular distribution of the intensity of the emitted light is to achieve an accurate approximation, preferably from the angle of exit 157266.doc • 152-201222097 -85° to 85. The sum of the absolute values of the difference between the approximate value and the measured value for each degree and the total of 171 points is less than 15〇 (: and 〇. When the approximate value is obtained, the micr〇s〇ft manufactured by Microsoft Corporation is used right. The solution tool (solver t〇〇1), which changes the c and σ' of each of the two normal distribution curves in such a way that the sum of the difference between the approximation and the measured value is minimized, the f-state can be obtained in a short time. The feed lines are each. Therefore, it is useful. Further, the same function can be executed by various programming languages, and the method of approximating the approximation of the second invention of the present specification is not limited to these. The FWHM of the two normal distributions obtained by the above method is taken as the diffusion angle of the first partial region, the second partial region or the third partial region. In the angular distribution of the light intensity in the first and second directions in the first and second directions, the exit angle is preferably 0. The transmitted light intensity of time is 9% or more of the peak intensity. A specific example is shown in Fig. G16. Fig. G16 is an angular distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light in the first direction of the single first partial region measured by GC5000L manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd. The intensity of the emitted light in the 空心 (hollow) portion of the figure is more than 9〇% of the peak intensity. In any angular distribution, the exit angle = 〇. The intensity of the outgoing light is 90°/ of the peak intensity. the above. In this manner, the light diffusion characteristics of the first to third partial regions are preferably such that the angular distribution of the outgoing light intensity of the outgoing light in the first and second directions when the light is incident from the normal direction has a plurality of peaks and is smooth Change in place. In the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention, at least one of the light incident surfaces may be used, or two or more of them may be used. In the case of having two light-incident surfaces, the shape of the light guide 157266.doc -153-201222097 is preferably a flat rectangular parallelepiped having a first surface and a second surface as a main surface, and more preferably two light-incident surfaces. Relative. At this time, since the lengths of the two light-incident surfaces are the same, the number of the point light sources or the type of the handles can be the same: the advantages of common parts are realized. The light-incident surface of the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention (the method of imparting anisotropic light-diffusing characteristics to one portion is not limited. For example, a method described in T: a translucent film or a (four) financial, and a light direction is used. In a specific direction, the anisotropic diffusing agent or the like is mixed into the corresponding region of the light incident surface. Specifically, the long diameter is 10 to 300 μηι, and the short diameter is 〇3 to 5 and Adhesives with different acicular fillers are added to the adhesive, and the shearing force is applied to the surface, so that the direction of the length is aligned along the coating direction, thereby allowing the coated region to be coated. Anisotropic light-diffusing property (refer to Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2008-34234). The surface (4) has an anisotropic light-diffusing property, and the opening or the bottom surface has a specific direction. The plurality of concave portions or convex portions of the opposite-shaped shape are also preferable. The above-mentioned specific one is preferably a direction parallel to the second direction. Ρ In addition, the angle formed by the opening of the concave portion (the convex portion) is 4 degrees. When the following ((4) diameter and specific one (π, not Degree) is regarded as the concave portion I: "two sides" "having a shape that is longer in a specific direction", and the long diameter of the opening (bottom surface) of the concave portion (protrusion portion) is formed by a specific direction The angle is preferably less than or equal to 0 degrees, and is less than 6 degrees, more preferably less than 4 degrees, and is 8 degrees: lower, and more preferably is twist. Here, the so-called opening I57266.doc • 154·201222097 邛The long diameter of the (bottom surface) refers to the long side of the rectangle. The area of the opening (bottom surface) is the smallest, and the shape of the opening (bottom surface) is a concave portion (protrusion) of an anisotropic shape in a specific square. Mixed ground == upwardly long is in a specific square μ &amp; in the opening 邛 (bottom surface) shaped concave portion (convex portion) (10), for example, opening =: shape other than the opposite sex shape or although the opening portion (bottom surface) For two isotropic: a isotropic shape such as a circle, a parallel direction in one direction) a two anisotropic shape 'but its long diameter is not special

An opening having a concave portion (a convex portion) having a long anisotropic shape in which a door having an opening portion (bottom surface) is provided in a specific direction, and an opening portion of the portion (a portion) in a region of ρ (bottom surface) The concave portion of the shape of the area of the bottom surface is larger than the total area of the other concave portion (the convex portion) (the bottom portion).

The ratio of the major axis to the minor axis (long diameter/short diameter) of the anisotropic shape is indefinitely 'preferably 2 or more', more preferably 1 inch or more. Here, the short diameter and the long diameter 'refer to mean that the area of the external connection is the smallest and the short side and the long side of the rectangle. The anisotropic shape is not limited, and as a specific example thereof, for example, a straight line (groove) as shown in Fig. G2 or a substantially expanded circular shape as shown in Fig. 13 can be cited. The shape of the opening portion (bottom surface) of the concave portion (protrusion portion) can be determined by observing an arbitrary portion of the light incident surface using a microscope (a scanning electron microscope or a laser confocal microscope or the like). The distance between the concave portions (protrusions) in the first direction is not limited, and the average pitch thereof is preferably 20 μηη or less, more preferably 15 μηη or less, and still more preferably 1 μ〇. Further, the average pitch is preferably 580 nm (the center wavelength of visible light) is more preferably 780266.doc • 155·201222097 above 780 nm (the entire visible light region). When the average pitch is set to the above value on the right side, the fingernails and the like are stuck in the concave portion or the convex portion during operation, and the operability is improved. In addition, since the light diffused by the light guide plate included in the surface light source device according to the second aspect of the present invention is visible light (electromagnetic wave of 380 nm to 780 nmi), the diffusion effect of the concave portion or the convex portion is sufficiently exhibited, and the average pitch is preferably improved. It is the value as described above. Here, the distance between the concave portions (protrusions) in the first direction means any cross section parallel to the first direction of the light incident surface, adjacent valley bottom (in the case of a concave portion) or a mountain top (in the case of a convex portion) The horizontal distance between them (parallel to the direction in the direction of the light incident surface) (refer to Figure 13). Furthermore, when the bottom of the valley (the top of the mountain) is flat, the center is used as the bottom (the top of the mountain) to determine the spacing. In addition, the average pitch of the concave portion or the convex portion in the first direction means that the region of the concave portion (the convex portion) where the concave portion (the convex portion) is formed is parallel to the light-emitting surface (the convexity = the surface is arbitrarily extracted ~ 'the ~ The average of the distance between the recesses (the ridges) present in the recess. The (average) spacing of the concave / (convex P) in the first direction can be achieved by using a squint mirror (scanning electron microscope or laser confocal microscope) Etc.) Observe that the area where the concave portion (the convex portion) is formed on both sides is parallel to the first cross section. The size (depth, height) of the official P (convex) is not limited. The short diameter of 580 nm~50 is 780 nm~2〇Pm, and the long diameter of the surface can be, for example, \1 can also be 1~1〇μΠ1. Further, the opening portion (the bottom portion may be 5 μηι or more and 2 cm or less. Further, the depth (height) may be, for example, 5 〇〇 nm to 5 〇 _, or may be 〇 157266.doc - 156 - 201222097 nm~ The average depth (height) of 30 μπι, or 5 to 10 μηΐβ concave or convex portion is preferably 500 nm to 50 μηη, more preferably 7〇〇 nm to 3〇μιη, and even more preferably 5 to 10 μηη.

Here, the depth (height) of the concave portion (protrusion portion) refers to the mountain top of the mountain in the arbitrary cross section of the light-incident surface in which the concave portion (the convex portion) is formed, which constitutes the both sides of each concave portion. The vertical distance (the distance between the valley bottom of the lower valley and the top of the convex part) between the valleys of the concave parts (the valleys on the sides of the convex parts) (the distance perpendicular to the direction of the light entrance surface) The height difference of the bottom of the valley) (refer to Figure 13). In addition, the average depth (height) of the concave portion or the convex portion is any vertical cross section of the region where the concave portion (protrusion portion) is formed from the light incident surface.

Extract 100 μιηη, the depth of the concave (convex) where the 100 φ 晰 矢 以 A A A (

Average of degrees). The size of the concave portion (the convex portion and the sacred t L 1 can be determined by observing and measuring any portion of the light incident surface using a microscope (scanning electron microscope or a laser confocal microscope). Among them, in the concave portion (convex portion) When the shape is parallel to the groove of the second direction (the groove is saliva), the length thereof is preferably larger than the length of the light-emitting surface of the point source in the second direction. That is, the length of the groove (ditch) Preferably, the size of the light-emitting surface of the point source is greater than or equal to. Further, in the figure, the groove 23 has a length transverse to the human light surface 22 in the second direction 25, but the length of the groove must be transverse to the light guide plate. It is preferable that the shape, the size (depth, height) of the concave portions (protrusions) and the at least one of the distances in the second direction are irregularly (irregularly) different from each other. Here, the so-called size and spacing mean that the standard deviation is multiplied by 3 times 157,266. Doc •157· 201222097 The value obtained (the sum of three additions) exceeds the mean 丨〇0/〇. The method of forming the opening or the bottom surface of the light-guiding surface of the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention has a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in a specific one direction, and is not limited, for example, (4) The method described in the present invention ((1) to (3)). Further, the resin layer having a plurality of concave portions or convex portions used at this time may be the same as the above-mentioned 0 [light diffusion layer]. Hereinafter, the light diffusion layer will be described. The light diffusion layer can be used to impart an anisotropic or isotropic light diffusion characteristic to the first blade region of the light incident surface, for example, the following phase: in the layer: (3) A film having a concave-convex structure in a method of forming a plurality of concave portions or convex portions on a light-incident surface by bonding a film having a convex structure to a light-guide plate or the like, or using an adhesive or the like A translucent film of a diffusing agent having an anisotropic shape mixed with a translucent film in which an anisotropic diffusing agent is mixed in a film. The light-diffusing layer may be a layer having a function of anisotropically or isotropically diffusing the light of the person to be irradiated, and a conventionally known one may be used, and the material, shape, and the like are not limited. The thickness of the light-diffusing layer is not limited, and is preferably about 25 to 500 μm in terms of the adhesion between the layers. If it is too thin, the rigidity is insufficient, and the workability when bonding to the substrate is lowered. On the other hand, if it is too thick, the rigidity becomes too strong, and the workability of the bonding is lowered, and the ancient text is preferably 50~ 3 00 μιη 〇157266. Doc -158· 201222097 The light diffusion layer may have a structure having a concave-convex structure in the method of the above-mentioned door h _ (3), and has a concave-convex structure on the surface, and the layer may have a transparent base film layer, and A multilayer structure in which a surface of a transparent tree layer having a textured structure is laminated on the upper surface thereof. In this case, the material of the light-diffusing layer or the surface of the transparent resin layer having a concave-convex structure on the surface thereof is not limited, and for example, a cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition can be listed. Ο Ο In addition, the material and thickness of the transparent base film layer are not limited, and examples of the material include, for example, polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbene, and polystyrene (for example, #U * * Wang Xianxian has a transmittance of 90% or more and a haze of 1. The polymer material of 0 or less may be, for example, 20 to 250 μm, more preferably 50 to 125 μm. As the photopolymerizable resin composition, a photopolymerizable resin composition which is the same as the above-mentioned first invention of the present invention or the first invention of the present specification is used. [Light-scattering processing on the opposite side] In the first surface of the light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification, light scattering processing having a gradation in a direction away from the light-incident surface can be formed so that The distribution of light in the first side becomes uniform. Furthermore, in the case of a surface light source device for a display device, if the light distribution of the south light distribution is uniform, it is formed as a uniform mountain type with the highest shell degree in the middle of the screen. ^布' is easy to visualize and is considered to be better. Therefore, the density of light scattering processing in the central portion of the first side can be further improved. As a gradual light scattering with a direction away from the light-incident surface, 157266. Doc •159· 201222097 Work 2, OK: Lift. a layered (printed) reflective or diffusing material or a portion having a concave-convex shape (hereinafter collectively referred to as a "gradation pattern in which dots are gradually increased as the exiting person is removed"; In the case of the case, it may be formed as a gradually thickened gradient pattern, or a gradient pattern in which the same size point is narrowed in accordance with the gradation of the human surface. As the shape of the point at this time, for example, For example, the size of the circle, the square, and the like can be set to about 〇1 to 2, and the light scattering processing as described above is provided on the second surface of the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention. To reduce uneven brightness, it is preferable to form a point near the light entrance surface, that is, to face the point light source, or to reduce the density of the dots, or to reduce (thin) the dots, as shown in FIG. C18. Further, the unevenness of the brightness can be further reduced. Therefore, the p/G described later can be further increased. [The groove structure of the first surface and/or the second surface] The light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification is on the first side and/or Or the second side has a groove junction substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light incident surface Preferably, the groove structure is a lenticular lens shape or a plurality of random grooves. The groove structure is disposed on one of the first surface and the second surface, and the ease of manufacture and operation can be considered. It is preferable to determine the ease and the like. It may be provided on both the first surface and the second surface. However, for example, when the second surface is provided with the light scattering processing as described above, it is preferable to provide the above only on the first surface. Further, in order to reduce the hot spot near the light incident portion, the groove structure is preferably disposed at a distance from the first surface and/or the second surface to the human light side; the portion is 1 to 50 mm The position on the inside begins and extends in the opposite direction to the light entrance surface. 157266. Doc-160-201222097 The lentil lens shape is preferably arranged to extend in a direction substantially parallel to the normal direction of the light incident surface, and is plural in parallel. The distance between the shape of the lenticular lens is preferably 20 to 500 μm, and the depth is preferably 2 to 5 〇〇 (4) with reference to Fig. G19). If the pitch is too small, it is difficult to perform high-precision processing on the lentil lens. If the pitch is too large, it is likely to cause dullness with the pixels of the liquid crystal panel. If the temperature is too shallow, the straightness of the light is lowered. If the depth is too deep, it is difficult to perform high-precision processing or damage. Ο ❹ In turn, the random number of grooves are described. The plurality of grooves are random, meaning that at least one of the cross-sectional shape, the pitch, and the depth of the plurality of grooves are randomly (irregularly) different. In Fig. 10, an example in which a plurality of random grooves having substantially parallel to the normal direction of the human light surface are provided on the first surface is shown. The cross-sectional shape of each groove is not limited to, for example, can be formed into a shape. The distance between the grooves refers to the horizontal distance between the valley bottoms of adjacent grooves (the direction parallel to the surface having a plurality of random grooves) The horizontal distance is further determined by the center of the valley as the valley bottom. The cross-sectional shape or width of the groove may also vary along the direction in which the groove extends. In addition, the depth of the groove means the composition. The vertical distance between the top of the mountain in the mountain on both sides of each groove and the valley bottom of the groove (the distance perpendicular to the plane with the groove of the heart) (the depth of the elevation of the top and bottom of the valley) It can be changed gently or steeply along the direction of extension. It can also be the part where the groove is interrupted, but if it can be achieved 157266. Doc-161 - 201222097 It is preferable that the random number of grooves which are preferably used in the second invention of the present specification is shown in Figs. G21A &amp; G21B. Figure G21A shows a random plurality of grooves having an anisotropic light diffusion characteristic with a diffusion angle (described later) perpendicular to the direction of the groove of 3 degrees and a diffusion angle of 1 degree parallel to the direction of the groove. A surface distribution diagram of a specific example of the groove. Figure G21B shows the specificity of a random number of grooves having an anisotropic light diffusion characteristic with a diffusion angle of 6 degrees perpendicular to the direction of the groove and a diffusion angle of 1 degree parallel to the direction of the groove. The surface distribution of the example. The average pitch of the plurality of random grooves is not limited, and is preferably 3 Å or less, more preferably 20 μηι or less, still more preferably 15 μπι or less, and particularly preferably 1 〇 μΠ1 or less. Further, the average pitch of the random plurality of grooves is preferably 580 nm (the center wavelength of visible light) or more, more preferably 78 〇 nm (the entire visible light region) or more. The pixel pitch of the display panel used in combination with the light guide plate or the 'pitch spacing of the optical sheet is about 1 to 600 μπι, 50 to 1 50 μηι, respectively, so if the average pitch of the random plurality of grooves is set to the above The value prevents the occurrence of moiré due to spatial interference with the display panel or the optical sheet used in combination with the light guide plate. Further, if the average pitch is set to the above value, the amount of fingernails or the like stuck in the groove during operation is also small, and the operability is improved. In addition, since the light guided by the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention is visible light (electromagnetic wave of 380 nm to 780 nm), the effect of the random plurality of grooves on the direct evolution of light is sufficiently exhibited. The lower limit of the pitch is preferably a value as described above. 157266. Doc -162- 201222097 The average depth of the random plurality of grooves is not limited, and is preferably 1 to 50 μm, more preferably 5 to 1 μm. The angle of the bevel of the groove has a large influence on the straightness of the light. That is, when it is considered that the groove structure is provided on the first surface or the second surface, in the light guide plate, the slope of the groove reflects the light to be diffused to the outside to return it to the light guide plate, thereby increasing the light. Straightforward. Therefore, the angle of the slope of each groove is preferably from 40 to 60 degrees. Therefore, in the random plurality of grooves provided on the first surface or the second surface, the ratio of the slope of the groove to the range of 40 to 60 degrees is preferably 5% or more. More preferably 10% or more. In addition, the more the proportion of 45±5 degrees, the more it helps to improve the straightness. Here, the "bevel angle" is a general term for the angle formed by the tangential line forming the surface of each groove and the surface having the groove structure on the cross section of the groove having a random number of grooves. In addition, the ratio of the angle of the inclined surface in the range of 40 to 60 degrees can be determined by the following method: by microscopic observation (scanning electron microscope or laser confocal microscope, etc.) Any vertical section of the surface of the random plurality of grooves (perpendicular to the section of the groove structure) is arbitrarily extracted from a range of 300 μηι, and then, from the end of the range, is extracted every 0. A point of 5 μπι is used as a tangent to the tangent point, and an angle formed by the surface of the plurality of random grooves is measured (an acute angle. The light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification can be incorporated in a surface light source device for use in a notebook type PC (note personal computer), portable information terminal, desktop PC screen, digital camera, TV receiver 157266. Doc -163- 201222097 Various display devices. In particular, the surface light source device incorporating the light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification has a plurality of point light sources as the light source, but the brightness near the light entrance surface is less (...the point is redundant), and the entire light exit surface can be obtained. Uniform brightness: It can cope with local dimming, and can provide a large-sized and thin liquid crystal display device with low cost and/or narrow frame. Therefore, it is suitable for use in a liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, the specific aspects of the surface light source device, the display skirt, and the television receiving device incorporating the light guide plate of the second invention of the present specification can be the same as those of the surface light source device, the display device, and the television receiver of the present invention. . The third invention of the present specification is described. The third invention of the present specification is also preferably used as a light guide plate (or a light incident surface attached to the light guide plate, and the surface includes an opening or a bottom surface. Diffusion sheet 0 of a plurality of layers of a plurality of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape in a long direction. The third invention of the present invention relates to a sheet for diffusing light from a light source, in particular, for making light only in a certain direction. Diffusion, a diffusion sheet that is almost non-diffusing in a direction orthogonal to a certain direction. Currently, various lighting fixtures using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are commercially available for sale. However, since the LED is a point source having a strong directivity, there is a disadvantage that a plurality of LEDs are required for a large area to be irradiated. Therefore, the industry has continued to develop a technique for dispersing a diffusion plate between a light source and an object to be irradiated. For example, in Japanese Patent No. 3413519, it is disclosed that the photosensitive medium is exposed by using irregular non-planar speckles on the photosensitive medium 157266. Doc -164- 201222097 A light homogenizing device that forms a finely engraved surface structure. In Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-508585, it is disclosed that a desired speckle pattern is achieved by appropriately selecting a combination of various lenses, the size of the opening, and the distance of each member used for exposure, thereby exposing the photosensitive medium. A method of forming a master mold for forming an anisotropic diffuser is produced. In addition, the subject matter disclosed is that the production has 100 〇 x 90. 6〇(&gt;x4q., 5〇〇xl0., 20%.,6. complex 3, 6〇〇x〇5, 13〇〇χ7〇. The final master mode of the output angle. Further, the expression "γα to β" indicates that the diffusion angle in the direction in which the diffusion angle is the largest is Α in the diffuser produced by using the main mold, and the diffusion angle value in the direction in which the diffusion angle is the smallest is Β. A projection type image display device is disclosed in which a light that is incident only from a specific direction is scattered, and light incident from a direction other than the specific direction is transmitted, and In the specific direction, the half-value width of the scattered light intensity of the incident light is disposed on the front surface as a screen with a different anisotropic scattering film between the two scattering surfaces. As a manufacturing method of the film, the holographic method is not disclosed. It is also revealed that the diffusion angle of the upper and lower sides of the screen is 32. The diffusion angle in the left and right directions is 75. The diffusion angle in the upper and lower directions of the screen is 42. The diffusion angle in the left and right directions is 1〇3. 0 曰本本专利开开2006_337906号A light diffusion film having an anisotropic diffusion angle is disclosed. As a method of manufacturing such a light diffusion film, a method of performing sandblasting in a state in which a spray is released in a state of being laid flat with respect to a mold base material is disclosed. It is revealed that the main purpose of making the unevenness of the unevenness is 0 in the X-axis direction. 13 mm, 〇〇7 mm in the γ-axis direction 157266. Doc • 165-201222097 Having a light diffusing film made using this mold, the light diffusing film was used to produce a diffusion angle of 32 in the vertical direction. The diffusion angle in the horizontal direction is 51. An anisotropic screen embodiment. In order to realize a line illumination system such as inspection line illumination in a factory using a plurality of point light sources such as LEDs, it is conceivable to arrange the point light sources in a row, and use a diffusion sheet to align light in the direction of the point light source (hereinafter referred to as " Diffusion in the horizontal direction). In the diffusing sheet, if the diffusibility in the horizontal direction is low, in the irradiated surface, a portion corresponding to the perpendicular to the perpendicular line drawn from the point light source and an intermediate point corresponding to the point source from the adjacent point source The unevenness between the portions of the vertical line leading to the vertical line is poor, so it is not good. It is also conceivable to reduce the interval by reducing the number of the point light sources, thereby reducing the unevenness of the brightness and the manufacturing cost. In addition, in the diffusion sheet, if the diffusing property of the point light source and the 々 一 入 ( (hereinafter referred to as the "straight direction" is high, the light from the point light source scatters 1 In the irradiated surface, the intensity of light irradiated to the portion corresponding to (4) of the perpendicular line drawn from the point light source is lowered, which is not preferable as a linear illumination system. In the case where the line of the linear illumination system is short, the point light source may be set to one of the above-mentioned diffusion sheets to make the light in a specific direction (four). Similarly to the case where the number of the point light sources is plural, the diffusibility of light in the specific direction is also high, and the diffusibility of light on the side orthogonal to the specific direction is preferably low. Therefore, it is preferable to expand the light from the point source in the above horizontal direction by 157266. Doc -166- 201222097 A diffuser that does not spread in the above vertical direction. As a means for diffusing light from a point light source only in the − direction, a regular surface structure such as a lens array is known. However, if a regular surface structure is used, there is, for example, a pattern generated when the irradiated light is photographed. The case of interference fringes. Therefore, it is possible to damage the image quality, which is not preferable. Therefore, the object of the third aspect of the present invention is to provide a linear illumination system using a point light source, which provides a high level of uniformity of light on an illumination surface even when the number of point sources is reduced and the interval is increased. A diffusion sheet having a reduced intensity of the crucible A on the irradiation surface, which does not cause moiré interference fringes, and an illumination device including the diffusion sheet. The inventors of the third invention of the present invention have made intensive studies to solve the above problems. As a result, it has been found that a diffusion sheet produced as follows diffuses light in only one direction and hardly diffuses in a direction orthogonal to a certain direction. Thus, the third invention of the present specification is completed, that is, by using the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to be O. The diffuser pattern obtained by the light diffusing of the holographic diffuser below i degrees is exposed to the photosensitive medium, and developed to obtain a sub-master mold, and a diffusion sheet produced by transferring the master mold. That is, the third invention of the present specification is as follows. [1] A diffusion sheet having a non-periodic surface uneven structure on at least one side, wherein a diffusion angle of light emitted from light emitted from the normal direction to the surface uneven structure exhibits a maximum value direction and a display minimum value In the direction, the ratio of the maximum value to the minimum value is 200 or more, and the maximum value is 40 degrees or more and less than 1 degree. The minimum value is less than 5 degrees. 157266. [2] The diffusion sheet according to the above [1], wherein a ratio of a maximum value of the diffusion angle to a minimum value of the diffusion angle is 400 or more. [3] The diffusion sheet according to [1] or [2] above, wherein the stripe pattern is provided in the oblique direction with respect to the direction in which the diffusion angle of the outgoing light shows the minimum value. [4] The diffusion sheet according to [3] above, wherein the angle between the stripe pattern and the direction in which the diffusion angle of the emitted light shows a minimum value is 5 degrees or more. [5] The diffusion sheet of [3] or [4] above wherein the striped pattern is non-periodic. [6] The diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [3] to [5] wherein the stripe pattern is discontinuous. [7] The diffusion sheet of any one of the above [1] to [6] wherein the minimum of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is 0. 2 degrees or less. [8] The diffusion sheet according to any one of [1] to [7] wherein the surface uneven structure has a minimum average pitch of 2 〇 μπ1 or less. [9] The diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [1] to [8] wherein the surface unevenness is 157266. Doc • 168- 201222097 The maximum average spacing of the structures is 5 mm or more. [10] The diffusion sheet according to any one of [1] to [9] wherein the ratio of the maximum average pitch of the surface uneven structure to the minimum average pitch of the surface uneven structure is 200 or more. [11] The diffusion sheet according to [10] above, wherein a ratio of a maximum average pitch of the surface relief structures to a minimum average pitch of the surface relief structures is 4 〇〇 or more. [12] The diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [1] to [11] wherein the maximum aspect ratio of the surface relief structure is 〇.  5 or more. [13] The diffusion sheet according to any one of [1] to [12] wherein the surface uneven structure is formed using a speckle pattern formed by interference exposure. [14] 扩散 The diffusion sheet of the above [13], wherein the pattern of the above-mentioned scattered pattern is a minimum value of 0 by using a diffusion angle of the emitted light. A holographic diffuser below 1 degree is diffused by the interference light. [15] The diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [3] to [6] wherein the stripe pattern is formed by sand blasting. [16] The diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [3] to [6] wherein the above-mentioned striped pattern is 157266. Doc -169- 201222097 The case is formed by the density distribution of the surface relief structure described above. [17] A linear illumination system comprising at least one point light source, and the diffusion sheet according to any one of [1] to [16] above. [18] The linear illumination system of any of the above [3] to [6] wherein the point light source is a light emitting diode (LED). [19] The method for producing a diffusion sheet according to any one of the above [1] to [16] wherein the minimum value of the diffusion angle by the emitted light is 0. 1 or less. The speckle pattern obtained by the interference light diffused after the diffuser is exposed to the photosensitive medium and developed to produce a sub-master mold having a non-periodic surface relief structure formed by the speckle pattern, from which the main mode is rotated. Print at least once more. According to the diffusing sheet of the third aspect of the present invention, in the linear illumination system using the point light source, the uniformity of the light on the irradiation surface is high even when the number of the point light sources is reduced and the interval is increased, and the irradiation surface can be suppressed. The intensity of the light above is reduced and no fringe interference fringes are produced. Hereinafter, an embodiment of the third invention of the present specification (hereinafter referred to as "embodiment") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the third invention of the present specification is not limited to the following, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the gist of the invention. Further, the dimensional ratio of the drawings is not limited to the ratio shown in the drawings. Figure m shows the linear illumination system 157266 of the a-th form observed from obliquely above. Doc •170· 201222097 Schematic diagram of the composition of the system. As shown in Fig. H1, light from a plurality of point light sources Hi arranged in the horizontal direction is irradiated onto the irradiation surface 113 via the diffusion sheet H2 of the i-th embodiment, and the diffusion sheet H2 of the first embodiment is attached to at least one surface. The surface has a non-periodic surface relief structure, and the diffusion angle of the light emitted from the normal direction into the surface relief structure shows the direction of the maximum value and the direction of the minimum value, and the maximum value of the diffusion angle with respect to the diffusion angle The ratio of the minimum value is 2〇〇 or more, and the maximum value is 4 degrees or more and less than 100 degrees, and the minimum value is less than 〇. 5 degrees. The point light source H1 has a function of emitting light, and the display form, the size, and the light distribution range are not limited to 0. The light source is preferably a self-luminous light source. The method is not limited, and examples thereof include an LED and an incandescent lamp. Halogen, mercury, xenon, sodium, and visible lasers. Among them, the light emitted by 1 〇 is low in divergence, so that it is easy to obtain a linear illumination system in which the illumination surface is also kept high in brightness, and the luminous efficiency is high, and the light source can be miniaturized, so that it is preferable, and The LED may be a single light source such as a single LED chip or a COB type (Chip On Board type) LED, or may be a plurality of light sources in the form of a plurality of LED chips mounted, in addition to the point source. A line source such as a hot cathode tube or a cold cathode tube can also be used. The diffusion sheet 2 has a base material layer including a base material having a calendering property, and has a surface uneven structure on at least the surface of the base material layer. When a linear illumination system is used, it is preferable to provide the point light source Η1 on the surface side having the surface uneven structure with respect to the diffusion sheet Η2. As the substrate layer, a thin film #, film, film or plate having light transmissivity can be used. Doc •171· 201222097 and so on. As the material of the substrate layer, an organic material, an inorganic material, or a composite material containing an organic material and an inorganic material can be used. Among them, an organic material such as an organic polymer material is excellent in workability such as cutting, and is therefore a preferred material. Examples of the organic polymer include polycarbonate, melamine dimeronitrile, polyethylene glycol, polyethylene, polyester, polyamine, polyethylene, poly-hard, cellulose. , triacetonitrile cellulose, cellulose acetate, polyethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene, polyethylene, polyethylene, trifluoroethylene, difluoroethylene-tetrafluoroethylene copolymer, polyphony飒, poly(methyl) propylene vinegar, butadiene-acrylonitrile copolymer, poly-bond _ poly-co-amine rear-copolymer, ethylene-ethylene alcohol copolymer and cycloalkane polymer, etc., but not limited The thickness of the substrate layers is preferably 4 μm or more. Further, the substrate layer preferably has a light transmittance of 85 ° /. the above. The surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet 2 includes a plurality of fine protrusions. The shape of the protrusion 1 can be substantially conical, substantially spherical, or substantially elliptical: a body shape, a substantially lenticular lens shape, and a substantially parabolic shape. In addition, the protrusions may be connected by a continuous curved surface. Preferably, at least the height and the pitch of the convex portion are non-periodic. Here, "non-periodic" means that at least the height and the pitch of a plurality of adjacent protrusions are random. Specifically, the surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet 可以2 can be borrowed and borrowed from the second master mold by pre-forming a two-person master mold having a speckle pattern by interference exposure in the following manner. The metal is coated by the electroforming method, whereby the (4) pattern is transferred onto the metal to produce a master mold. Further, on the light-transmitting substrate, the main mold is used to shape the ultraviolet-curable resin, whereby the speckle pattern is transferred to the transparent substrate to form a hardened strand hardening resin 157266. Doc -172- 201222097 The speckle pattern layer forming furnace Vi# main i, ^ ^ heart on the substrate surface). This speckle pattern corresponds to the surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet H2. The light speckle pattern of the random intensity generated by the interference in the space after the coherent light passes through the diffusion plate is set in the space by placing the substrate containing the photosensitive resin layer in the space Exposure and development can be converted into a random surface relief structure to produce a secondary master mold having the structure. In the present specification, the random surface uneven structure is also referred to as a speckle pattern. With regard to the detailed manufacturing method of the above-described sub-master mold, the photosensitive medium can be exposed and developed by the interference light diffused by the hologram scatter #, thereby producing a non-periodic surface uneven structure formed by the speckle pattern. The secondary master mold transfers the surface structure from the master mold to the sheet to obtain a sheet having a textured structure. The surface unevenness structure of the diffusion sheet H2 can be adjusted by adjusting the size, shape and direction of the speckle pattern, and the average pitch of the uneven structure can be controlled. For the method of adjusting the size, shape and direction of the speckle pattern, for example, a known method disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 3390954 can be used. Further, the surface uneven structure of the diffusion #H2 characterized by the speckle pattern may be provided only on either side of the diffusion sheet H2 or on both sides. In the case of the linear illumination system of the first embodiment, the diffusion sheet 112 has a light transmissive property to irradiate light from the point light source onto the illumination surface 113, and the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is relative to the emitted light. The ratio of the minimum value of the diffusion angle is 200 or more 'more preferably 400 or more. By using such a diffusion sheet H2', for example, in a linear illumination system using a point light source, even when the number of point sources is reduced and the interval is increased, the uniformity of light on the illumination surface can be improved. Such a diffusion sheet H2 can be used by using a higher degree of anisotropy 157266. Doc 173-201222097 The holographic diffuser of the speckle pattern is obtained as the holographic diffuser exposed in the above-mentioned submaster mode. Furthermore, the anisotropic household of the holographic diffuser can exhibit the different diffusion angles of the holographic diffuser when the light transmitted through the holographic diffuser exhibits different diffusion degrees in different directions with respect to the minimum value of the diffusion angle. The ratio is obtained. A holographic diffuser having a speckle pattern having a high degree of anisotropy, which is used to increase the ratio of the diffusion angle 触 of the contact piece H2: a ratio of a relative value to a minimum value of the diffusion angle, specifically, a diffusion angle The minimum value is preferably 0. 1 degree or less, more preferably 〇〇 5 degrees or less, more preferably 〇 · 〇 3 degrees or less n means that the maximum value of the diffusion angle is preferably more than ^ degrees, more preferably 10 degrees or more, more preferably It is more than 2 degrees. In the above method of producing a diffusion sheet by interference exposure, a diffusion sheet is produced by using a holographic diffuser having a certain degree of diffusibility or other diffuser such as frosted glass. However, the use of a holographic diffuser having a certain degree or more: diffusibility cannot produce a diffusion sheet H2 having a ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light. On the other hand, by using the holographic diffuser having the minimum value of the diffusion angle described above, it is possible to produce a diffusion ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light of 2 〇〇 or more. sheet. The minimum value (vertical direction) of the diffusion angle of the light emitted from the diffusion sheet H2 is such that the light from the point light source is efficiently irradiated onto the irradiation surface H3, preferably less than 〇, and more preferably 〇2 The degree below is better than below. The maximum value (horizontal direction) of the diffusion angle of the light emitted from the diffusion sheet H2 is to suppress the unevenness of the light between the point light sources, and is preferably 4 degrees or more and more 157,266. Doc •174- 201222097 Good for more than 60 degrees. The maximum value of the diffusion angle is preferably less than 1 degree. The angle of diffusion of the emitted light can be obtained by using, for example, a variable angle photometer (GC_5〇〇〇L) manufactured by 电电电工业股份有限公司 or Photon Inc. The manufactured light beam analyzer (Nan〇Scan) measures the distribution of the transmitted light intensity with respect to the exit angle of the light having the surface uneven structure incident on the diffusion sheet H2 from the normal direction of the diffusion sheet H2. The range of the diffusion angle (half-value width) at which the intensity of the light is one-half or more of the maximum value. The normal direction with respect to the diffusion sheet H2 is a direction perpendicular to the surface of the diffusion sheet H2. As a specific size of the surface uneven structure, the ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is 2 〇〇 or more, especially from the viewpoint of increasing the maximum diffusion angle. The maximum average aspect ratio is 0·5~3. The aspect ratio is defined by the ratio (height/width) of the width of the convex portion at a position where the height of the convex portion is 1/2 of the height of the convex portion. The maximum average aspect ratio can be obtained by the maximum value of the average aspect ratio in each direction obtained by scanning in the respective directions of the diffusion sheet. 0 Regarding the minimum value of the average pitch of the surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet Η2, the ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is 200 or more, in particular, the maximum diffusion angle is increased. From the viewpoint of the above, it is preferably 100 μπ or less, more preferably 2 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, still more preferably 5 μmη or less. Here, the roughness of the appearance of the diffusion sheet 2 can be further suppressed by setting it as 2 μm or less. Further, the minimum value of the average pitch is preferably 580 nm or more (center wavelength of visible light), more preferably 780 nm (upper wavelength of visible light) or more. The so-called average spacing, 157266. Doc •175- 201222097 The average value of the distance between the peaks and the valleys of the surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet H2 can be determined by observation using an optical microscope, a scanning electron microscope, a laser microscope, a surface shape measuring machine, or the like. . The minimum value of the average pitch can be obtained by the minimum value of the average pitch in each direction obtained by scanning in the respective directions of the diffusion sheet. Regarding the maximum value of the average pitch of the surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet H2, the ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is 200 or more, in particular, the minimum diffusion angle is reduced. From the viewpoint, it is preferably 1 mm or more, more preferably 5 mm or more, and still more preferably 10 mm or more. The maximum value of the average pitch can be obtained by the maximum value of the average pitch in each direction obtained by scanning in the respective directions of the diffusion sheet. Further, in the diffusion sheet H2, the ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is 2 〇〇 or more, and preferably, the maximum average pitch of the surface uneven structure is relatively The ratio of the minimum average pitch is 200 or more, more preferably 4 inches or more, and even more preferably 6 inches or more. The diffusion sheet H2 may also contain two or more layers. For example, an ultraviolet curable resin may be used, and a surface layer having a surface uneven structure may be formed on the smooth substrate layer. Fig. H2 is a schematic view showing a diffusion sheet of the second embodiment which is not observed from above. The diffusion sheet H2 has a non-periodic anisotropic surface on at least one side: a convex structure, and as shown in FIG. H2, in the plane, a direction in which the diffusion angle of the emitted light shows a minimum value is formed in the oblique direction. There is a striped pattern H5. The stripe pattern H5 includes, for example, substantially parallel to the diffusion 157266. Doc . 176.  201222097 A plurality of grooves or protrusions (bumps) on the cassette 2. Alternatively, the striped pattern H5 can be formed by changing the density distribution of the surface uneven structure in a stripe shape. By forming the stripe pattern 1^, the following effect can be obtained. When the surface having the uneven structure is rubbed to form a scratch, the scratch is mixed in the stripe pattern H5 and becomes difficult to visually recognize. Further, by forming a striped pattern, the following effects can be exhibited. When stress is applied to the uneven surface, friction can be felt along the striped pattern H5 to prevent scratches. The average pitch of the stripe pattern H5 is preferably 〇 2 mm or less, more preferably imm or less, and more preferably 〇·5 or less in order to improve abrasion resistance. Here, the average pitch of the stripe pattern H5 is an average value of the distance between the stripe patterns which can be visually confirmed, and can be measured by observation using an optical microscope or an amplifying mirror. The stripe pattern H5' formed by sand blasting or the like as described later can measure the interval of the unevenness of the stripe pattern H5 as the pitch. Further, in the case where the stripe pattern H5 is formed by the density distribution of the surface uneven structure, the interval of the density of the density can be measured as the pitch. ϋ The angle Η7 of the direction Η6 of the stripe pattern H5 with respect to the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light is preferably 5 degrees or more, and more preferably 1 degree or more in order to obtain sufficient abrasion resistance. In order not to hinder the diffusibility of the diffusion sheet 2, the angle Η7 is preferably less than 30 degrees, more preferably less than 20 degrees. When the stripe pattern Η5 is aperiodic, it is preferable to use the diffusion sheet 2 between the display device including the regularly arranged pixels such as a liquid crystal panel and the light source without generating the interference fringe. 157266. Doc •177· 201222097 In order to obtain sufficient wear resistance, the striped pattern H5 is preferably discontinuous. The stripe pattern H5 can be formed by sandblasting the sub-master or the diffusion sheet H2 having the surface uneven structure, for example, obliquely to the most H6 of the diffusion angle of the emitted light. The method may also adopt the following method as a method of forming the stripe pattern H5: for the sub-master mold or the diffusion sheet H2 having the surface uneven structure, for example, obliquely sandpaper or having a direction with respect to the minimum value of the diffusion angle at which the emitted light is displayed The roller of the uneven surface, the wire, etc. are rubbed. When the stripe pattern is formed by the mouth &gt;' or Shi Shao paper, #, wire, etc., in order to avoid adversely affecting the diffusibility of the diffusion sheet H2, the average aspect ratio of the stripe pattern H5 is better. . 2 or less, more preferably 〇. 1 or less, more preferably 0. 05 or less. ^ Other methods of forming the stripe pattern H5 can also be used to adjust the exposure intensity or the distance between the speckle patterns when the main mold is formed by interference, so that the density of the surface relief structure of the sub-master has distributed. By having a distribution of the density of the surface uneven structure, the stripe pattern H5 can be visually recognized in the oblique direction with respect to the direction H6 showing the minimum of the diffusion angle of the emitted light. The third invention of the present invention can be preferably utilized in the field of illumination devices and inspection devices including linear light source systems. The fourth invention of the present specification will be described. The fourth invention of the present specification relates to a bonding method and a bonding failure which can be preferably used in the production of the light guiding plate used in the present invention. The fourth invention of the present specification relates to a bonding method and a bonding jig, in particular, 157266. Doc -178- 201222097 A bonding method and a bonding jig suitable for bonding an optical film to one end surface of a plate member. The main surface of the film-like member comprising two substantially parallel main faces, or the main body of the plate-like member including two substantially parallel main faces and a narrower end face between the edges of the two main faces Articles or methods of bonding optical films or protective films are well known. On the other hand, the product in which the optical film is bonded to the kneading surface of the plate member or the bonding method is less, and it is not common. It can be exemplified that in the use of the plate member, the fact that the end face has an active function is less than one of the causes. However, in recent years, a plate-like member having an active end face has been proposed as an example, and a light guide plate which is a component of a surface light source device of an end face illumination type in a liquid crystal display device is exemplified. In the surface light source device of the end face illumination method, the iso-optical plate is disposed on the back surface of the liquid crystal display panel, and the light source is disposed on one end surface (side surface) of the light guide plate. According to this configuration, it is possible to achieve a reduction in thickness compared to a direct-surface light source device in which the light source is directly disposed on the back surface of the liquid crystal display panel. Usually the thickness of the light guide plate is 0. A rectangular transparent resin plate having a size of about 5 to 10 mm, which is one turn larger than the liquid crystal display panel, has an end surface (side surface) serving as a light incident surface, and a main surface on the liquid crystal display panel side is used as a smooth surface. In addition to the liquid crystal display device, such a light guide plate can also be used for lighting applications including indoor lighting or automobile lighting. In the above-mentioned light guide plate, there is a case where a strip-shaped optical sheet is bonded to one end surface for enhancing optical characteristics. Specifically, a light guide plate in which a reflection sheet is attached to an end surface other than the light incident surface in order to reduce light leakage from the end surface is proposed, or a light incident surface (end surface) is bonded to each other in order to reduce the unevenness of the shell degree. Heterochromatic light diffuser 157266. Doc • 179· 201222097 The light guide plate of the sheet (for example, ^μ 1 + 参..., 曰本专利专开2011-3532). Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2011-3532 discloses that an anisotropic light-diffusing sheet is bonded to a valley in a guide by a double-sided adhesive tape having transparency, and the bonding method is not applied. Or the fixture is specified. Further, in the case where the optical film is bonded to the iW surface including the two main faces and the one or more end faces which are substantially parallel, it is sometimes necessary to bond the interface so as not to enter. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned light guide plate, when the reflection sheet is attached to the surface, the same effect can be exerted even if the interface enters the bubble, so that there is no problem as long as it is not peeled off. However, in the case where the anisotropic light-diffusing sheet is incident on the light, the presence of the bubbles adversely affects the optical characteristics, and the desired light diffusion effect cannot be obtained. And the presence of bubbles in many cases can also be an appearance problem. When the interface of the optical film is combined with the interface of the optical film into the bubble, it may be considered to leave the optical film and then re-adhere, or squeeze the house into the bubbled knife to make the air in the bubble escape from the interface to the outside. However, the production efficiency of these methods is not good. In particular, in the case where a plurality of light guide plates are bonded to the photonic film in a stacked state, the side end faces of the light guide plate having the contraction and position of one end surface of each of the light guide plates are not deviated over a length of, for example, several tens of cm or more. It is more difficult to adhere the short strip of optical film itself, and it is also difficult to exclude bubbles from the above j = method. Further, even if the one end plate member is rough, it is difficult to exclude the air bubbles in the recessed portion. 357266. Doc 201222097 The present invention is a method which is complicated by the above-mentioned problems, and the method of bonding the optical film to one end surface of the plate member without bubbles and efficiently. As a result of intensive research by the inventors of the fourth invention of the present invention, it has been found that a bonding jig including a member having shape followability and a bonding method using the bonding can eliminate the above-described problems, thereby completing the book. The fourth invention. ❹ 亦 That is, the fourth invention of the present specification is as follows. [1] The method of bonding is applied to an end surface of a plate-like member including two main faces that are substantially parallel and one of the upper faces, and the laminated layer has an adhesive material layer and an optical film layer, and has a The strip-shaped member having substantially the same thickness or a narrower width than the one end surface of the plate-like member includes: a laminating step of causing the adhesive material layer of the strip-shaped member to face the one end surface, The strip member is laminated on the one end surface; and the adhesion step is performed by using a bonding jig including a member having shape followability, and a surface is applied to the optical film layer along the length direction of the one end surface. Press more than once. [2] The bonding method of the item [1], wherein the laminating step comprises the step of crimping a plurality of portions on the optical film layer on the end surface to the one end surface. [3] The fitting method of the other item [1] or [2], wherein the above laminating step is the same as the above 157266. Doc 201222097 The bonding step is a step performed in a state in which a plurality of the above-mentioned plate-like members having the same shape are stacked. [4] The bonding method of the item [3], wherein the bonding step comprises the step of simultaneously stretching one end surface of the plurality of the plate members in the longitudinal direction by using the member having the shape followability. [5] The bonding method of [3] or [4], wherein the laminating step and the close v are in a manner that a step difference between the plurality of plate members and the adjacent plate members is 500 μηι or more The steps performed in the state in which the multiple boards are stacked. [6] The method of laminating the item [1] or [2], wherein the laminating step is a step of feeding a plurality of the plurality of plate-like members having the same shape in a state of being stacked, wherein the bonding step is The step is carried out in a state where the above-mentioned plate-like member is divided into one piece. [7] The bonding method according to any one of [1] to [6] wherein the surface roughness of the end surface of the plate-like member is 500 μπι or more. [8] The method of bonding according to any one of the above items (1) to [7], wherein the thickness of the above-mentioned plate member is 0. Within the range of 5 to 1 mm. [9] The bonding method according to any one of [1] to [8] wherein the surface of the optical film layer has a light-diffusing uneven structure. 157266. The bonding method of any one of the above items [1] to [9], wherein the optical film layer has a pencil hardness of 5 Å or less. [11] The method of bonding according to any one of [1] to [1G], wherein the step of laminating and the step of attaching the strip to the length of the strip member are longer than the length of the end surface of the plate member, At least one end of the strip-shaped member protrudes from the above-mentioned end surface in the longitudinal direction, and the strip-shaped member is cut from the above-mentioned plate-shaped member. Ο

The step of performing the next step, and the method of fitting the item [12] which cuts the portion from which the upper end surface is extended, has a mark in the vicinity of the strip-shaped end portion of the towel. Any one of the preceding items [1] to [11] having two ends and at least one of [13] end faces, which is used for laminating in a plate shape via a layer of material A member of the optical film on the end face of the member is extended (4), followed by follow-up. 13/,有^ [15] The bonding fixture of the above item [14], comprising: a sliding layer on the surface of the bonding fixture, comprising a sliding property of a 3' moon-moving material, 157266.doc 201222097, and a layer The inner side of the slidability imparting layer' includes a shape following layer of a material having shape followability. [16] The bonding jig of the above item [(4) or (1)], wherein the material having the shape (four) property is a material having a rubber hardness of 10 to 70. [17] As in the fitting fixture of [14] or [15] in the preceding paragraph, the material with shape followability on the T is an elastomer. [18] The bonding fixture of the above item [17], wherein the above elastomer comprises (iv) cotton. [19] The fitting loss of the above item [17], wherein the elastic system sponge has a sponge hardness of 5 to 50. [20] The bonding jig of the above [14] or [15], wherein the material having the shape followability is a plastic deformation body. [21] A bonding apparatus comprising: a bonding jig for stretching on an optical film laminated on an end surface of a plate member via an adhesive material layer, comprising a member having shape followability a reel for holding the above-mentioned strip member in a wound state to supply the above-mentioned adhesive material layer of the package 157266.doc - 184.201222097 3 and the strip member of the above optical film to the above-mentioned plate member The one end surface and the pressure roller are configured to move along the one end surface in a state in which the two main faces of the plate-like member are clamped. According to the bonding method and the bonding jig of the fourth invention of the present specification, the optical film can be bonded to one end surface of the plate member without air bubbles and efficiently. In the following, the form (hereafter referred to as "the embodiment") of the present specification will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, the fourth invention of the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. The bonding method of the embodiment is an end surface of one of the plate-shaped members 包含 including two main faces and one or more end faces which are substantially parallel, and has an adhesive layer and an optical film layer laminated thereon, and has a plate shape. A method in which the thickness of one of the end faces of the member is substantially the same or the strip member 12 having a narrower width. The bonding method of the embodiment includes a laminating step of causing the adhesive material layer of the strip member 12 to face an end surface of the plate member π, and laminating the strip member 12 on one end surface of the plate member 11; In the step, a bonding jig including a member having shape followability is used, and pressure is applied to the optical film layer along the longitudinal direction of one end surface of the plate member π while applying pressure. The plate-shaped member η used in the bonding method of the embodiment includes members having two main faces and one or more end faces which are substantially parallel, and examples thereof include a transparent resin or glass, and the main surface is a rectangular plate member. More specifically, a light guide plate can be cited. The bonding method of the embodiment can better respond to the plate 157266.doc -185- 201222097 The thickness of the member II is 〇5 mm~1〇mm, more preferably i~5 melon, and most preferably 1.5 min~4 mm . The belt-shaped member 12 used in the bonding method of the embodiment is, for example, a belt-shaped member in which an adhesive material layer and an optical film are laminated. The strip member 12 can be manufactured by coating a main surface of one of the optical films with an adhesive material dissolved in a solvent and drying it, or a layer of the main area of the optical film. A known method of adhering a sheet to a sheet is formed into a belt shape by a layered body produced without generating bubbles. In the following, an example in which the plate member 12 is used as a light guide plate, one end surface is a light incident surface of the light guide plate, and the tape member 12 is a light diffusion film (an optical film) in which an adhesive material layer is laminated is described. The bonding method of the embodiment. In the case of a light guide for a television, the size of the main surface of the light guide plate is determined according to the size of the surface of the television. For example, for a 32-inch television, the length of the long side is about 70 cm, but for a 6-inch inch television, it is 133 cm. For example, when the thickness of the light guide plate is 3 mm and is applied over the long side of the 32-inch television light guide plate, the size of the light diffusing film to be bonded is, for example, 2.8 mm in width and 7 〇 cni in length. The width of the light diffusing film is set between 110% and 20% with respect to the thickness of the light guide plate according to the required optical properties, preferably from 1% to 4% by weight, more preferably from 99% to 5%. %, the best is %%~8〇%. When the width of the light-diffusing film is 110% or less with respect to the thickness of the light guide plate, the possibility of partial peeling due to interference with other members is small. Further, when the width is 20% or more, desired optical characteristics such as light diffusibility can be obtained. The lower limit of the length of the light-diffusing film is such that the length of the region in which the light source (LED wafer) 157266.doc -186-201222097 is arranged can be set to be a few cm longer than the length of one end surface of the light guide plate to be bonded.

As shown in FIG. 12, in a state where a plurality of light guide plates 1 are stacked in the main surface direction, when the light diffusion film 2 is attached to one end surface of each of the light guide plates, the end faces are formed between the adjacent light guide plates. Poor, there are indenters and prominent players. At this time, when the light diffusion film is attached to one end surface of the light guide plate which is indented by hand, the thickness of the light guide plate is thin, for example, 3 mm, and the hand cannot enter the indented portion, if the light diffusion film is made When the one end portion is formed to extend in the longitudinal direction of one end surface of the light guide plate and the light diffusion film is held, the position of the film strip can be adjusted so as not to deviate from the width of one end surface of the light guide plate, thereby easily laminating. Therefore, it is better. Further, the adhesion step can also be carried out in a state in which the plate-like members are divided into one piece. In order to be surely held, it is preferable that the end portion of the bonding end side protrudes in the longitudinal direction, and it is also preferable to suitably form both end portions of the light diffusion film to protrude from the side of the light guide plate. The way of the state. When the light-diffusing film is formed from one end surface of the light guide plate, the visibility is improved, and when the stacked plate-like members are bonded one by one, the leakage can be prevented and the inspection can be easily performed. In addition, there is an advantage that it is easy to peel the film when it is assumed that re-attachment is required, such as when the film is deviated from the width of the end face of the light guide plate. The length of the extension is set to be sufficient for holding. If it is less than 5 mm, it is not easy to hold, and if it is two or more, the diffusion film is likely to be wasted. Preferably, the purpose of the above-mentioned extension is to be at least prior to the product, and the ❹ cutter removes the extended portion I57266.doc .187 - 201222097 points. The thickness of the light diffusion film is preferably 30 to 3 μm. When the α^ order is 30 μπι or more, there is a tendency to break less when it is bonded. Further, if the thickness is (4) or less, the bubble may be more easily squeezed out in the adhesion step, and the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 1 G 7 G _. When the thickness is 10 μηι or more, it is possible to ensure sufficient adhesion and prevent natural peeling due to thermal shock or the like. When the thickness of the right side is 70 μm or less, there is a tendency that the air bubbles can be more easily squeezed out in the bonding step. In the bonding method of the embodiment, the pressure is applied to the member of the shape-following member by Shida, and the dense contact of the VL _ surface of the seven-faced surface on the optical film layer is performed once or more. , 0 valley easily removes the air bubbles between the optical film layer and the end face of the plate member. The structure with shape follow-up is described later. At this time, the lamination step w before the bonding step can be temporarily bonded to the plurality of end faces on the optical film layer. Further, the lamination step and the adhesion step are carried out in a state in which a plurality of plate-like members having the same shape are stacked in a plurality of sheets. In addition, it is also possible to perform lamination in a state in which a plurality of plate-like members having the same shape are stacked, and to perform a close-contact step in a state in which the plate-like member is divided into a sheet-piece, and the film layer is transparent. In the case of the case, as shown in Fig. (10), the mark 13 may be provided at the end or both ends of the strip structure to improve the visibility. In the case where the slab member and the surface are longer than about 1 m, the film may be bonded using 2, at this time, for example, by being placed on the belt member 157266.doc 201222097: two The markings are separated from the two ends of the plate-like member or the markings are aligned with the center and then attached to the post-post 5, or the markings are respectively centered and then attached to the end of the 瞠丁准-, The ground is attached to a fixed position. When the sheet-like members stacked on the multi-plate are bonded one by one, and when they are leaked, the advantages are easy to inspect. °Preventing the strip member from the end of the plate-like member when the length of the strip-shaped member is etched and twisted

The position is the end of the strip-shaped member. The S is the end of the plate-shaped member. The ancient, female, from "1 &lt; and released. The method of marking the steam portion/recorder line, or attaching the colored belt to the method of p 1 . As the marker, a commercially available signature pen or a pen using magic ink, hot-color chromatic ink, or the like can be used. By using the thermal coloring property, the ink pen can cause the mark to disappear by applying the frictional heat generated in the step of sliding the film on the film surface after the tape member is bonded to the film member. It may preferably be used in situations where there is a desire to leave a mark on the final article. As the colored tape, various tapes can be used, and when there is a need to leave a mark on the final product, it can be bonded by using a tape of a micro-adhesive tape, and then the tape is peeled off, so that it is preferable. Use. As shown in Fig. 14, the belt member 12 can be supplied to one end surface of the plate member II by a reei cartridge. The roll cassette is wound on a reel, and the release paper 15 including the optical film layer, the adhesive material layer, and the strip-shaped member 12 of the release paper layer is peeled off, and one side is taken up so that the adhesive material layer side and the plate-like member are peeled off. When one of the end faces of the second member is supplied to the end surface of one of the plate-like members 11 in a relatively opposite manner, it may be suitably supplied to the portion of the strip-shaped member 12 (hereinafter referred to as 157266.doc • 189. 201222097 as a "supply port" J) The guide roller 110 is disposed such that the strip member 12 does not deviate from the end face width of one of the plate members 2. Further, it is preferable to provide a pressure roller that sandwiches the two main faces of the plate member 11 from both sides. 19. Further, the laminating step and the poetic step may be simultaneously or continuously performed by the laminating jig 14 having the shape followability described later in the supply port. Further, the optical film layer in the strip member 12 The strip member 12 may not have the release paper 15 at this time. The bonding jig I4 of the embodiment shown in Fig. 15 is suitable for implementing the adhesion step in the embodiment of the method. Fixture. The embodiment of the fitting loss 14 packs The contact portion 16 that is in contact with the optical film layer is in contact with the contact portion 16 and has a shape-following member. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of one end surface of the plate-like member 11 is pushed once or more by applying pressure thereto. The foam can be eliminated and the strip member 12 is adhered to the end surface of the plate member. The expansion of the cover member 4 includes sliding the cover member 14 including the member having the shape followability on the surface of the optical film layer. Both the case and the rolling condition. The member having the shape followability of the bonding jig 14 is preferably a rubber body such as a rubber or a sponge, or a plastic deformation body having a shape followability. In addition, the hardness of the material having a shape followability Preferably, the hardness is Π) to 70, more preferably: 65 is preferably 4 〇 to 6 b. Further, when the material having the shape followability is a sponge or the like and the rubber hardness cannot be measured, the sponge hardness may be substituted. The sea's name hardness is preferably 5 to 5 Å. By using such a shape followability: the member 'in particular, if the hardness is 5 or more, the applied stress baffle is efficiently conducted to be relative to a 7 The stress in the direction perpendicular to the surface can be high Yield remove air bubbles and refuse to make vegetarian &amp; μ

The tendency to pick up. In this case, if it is an elastomer, it can withstand long-term use. If the hardness is 70 or less, the shape followability with respect to the applied stress is excellent, even if the jig is slightly inclined with respect to the width direction. Further, it is possible to ensure a contact area of a certain degree or more, and the uniformity of bubble exclusion in the width direction of one end surface is excellent. As shown in Fig. 15 (b) and Fig. 15 (c), even when the surface roughness of one end surface of the plate-like member n is 500 μm or more, or one of the adjacent plate-like members II of the multi-plate stack When the step of the end face is about 500 μm to 5 mm, since the bonding jig 4 of the embodiment has sufficient shape to follow the squeaking property, the plurality of plate-like members II can be stretched at once to remove air bubbles. Further, even if there is a light-diffusing structure on the surface of the optical film, in particular, even if the optical film is a soft film having a pencil hardness of 5 H or less, scratches are unlikely to occur, and light diffusibility can be maintained even after bonding. . Further, in the state where the pressure is applied in the adhesion step, the length (contact length) of the bonding jig 14 of the embodiment in contact with the longitudinal direction of the belt-shaped member 12 is preferably 0.5 mm to 15 mm, more preferably 〇· 8 mm to 5 mm, preferably 1 mm to 3 mm. When the contact length is 〇5 mm or more, there is a tendency that the air bubbles can be removed with high efficiency, and if it is 15 mm or less, the applied force is efficiently transmitted to eliminate the stress of the air bubbles. It is not easy to fatigue when the person sticks by hand. The material of the shape-following member can be selected from the group consisting of acrylic rubber, nitrile rubber, isoprene rubber, amino phthalate rubber, ethylene-propylene rubber, gas sulfonated polyethylene, and gas alcohol. Rubber, gas butadiene rubber, polyfluorene rubber, styrene-butadiene rubber, butadiene rubber 'fluoro rubber, polyisobutylene, butyl rubber, nitrile rubber (nitrile butadiene 157266.doc -191 - 201222097 rubber ), tetrafluoroethylene-propylene rubber, hydrogenated NBR (nitrile butadiene rubber, nitrile rubber), gasified polyethylene, ethylene-acrylic rubber, pentene rubber, fluoropolyoxyethylene rubber, natural Rubber, polyamine phthalic acid vinegar foam, polyacetonitrile foam, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) foam, poly-stone foam, acrylic foam Polyimide foam, a &amp; EPDM (ethylene-propylene-diene monomer) foam, etc.; specifically, Dow Corning's poly stone eve can be preferably used. Oxygen rubber Silastic J-RTV, or Nippon Valqua Industries Manufacturing Industry Company Limited of Code-Seal &lt; Soft &gt; like. As shown in Fig. 16 (a), the contact portion 16 of the bonding jig 14 of the embodiment can be constituted only by the shape following layer 18 including a material having a shape followability. Alternatively, a sliding imparting layer 17 including a sliding imparting material may be provided on the outermost surface portion of the contact portion 16 of the bonding jig 14 as shown in FIGS. 16(b) and 16(c). The length direction is smoothly expanded at one end surface, which further improves workability. In particular, when the surface of the optical film layer which is in contact with the contact portion 16 of the bonding jig is smooth, the effect is remarkable. At this time, the sliding imparting layer 17 may be laminated with the shape following layer 18 existing on the inner side thereof, or may be inclined. In the case of lamination, the shape-following layer 18 may be applied by sliding the imparting material, or the sliding imparting material may be fixed to the shape following layer 18. The slip imparting material can provide an effect of extending the life of the inner shape following layer 18 and an effect of preventing the shape following the scattering of the material, and the bonding jig can be used for a long period of time by appropriately replacing only the sliding imparting layer 17. 157266.doc •192· 201222097 As the slidability-imparting material, polyethylene, polypropylene, ethylene, fluorine resin, polyoxymethylene, etc. can be selected. In addition, in the case of a film or tube having heat shrinkability, the slidability-imparting material can be coated on the shape-following layer 18, and then heat-shrinked and adhered to each other, thereby suppressing the material due to sliding between the two. Wear 'extends the life of the fit fixture. The bonding jig 14 may include a grip portion such as a human hand or a robot arm in addition to the contact portion 16. At this time, it is preferable that the contact portion 16 is integrally formed with the grip portion, and the contact portion 16 is slid along the longitudinal direction of the one end surface while applying pressure. Also, 卩 κ卩' acts as a function of rolling (four) rubbing by well controlling the dynamic friction, so that the applied stress can be efficiently conducted to exclude the bubble U. At this time, the shape of the bonding jig 14 can be selected from a rectangular parallelepiped, a quadrangular pyramid, or the like, and the side or the apex can be used as the contact portion 16 to apply pressure. If the film is attached one by one, the bonding tool can be applied. The shape of 4 is formed: a shape having a groove conforming to the thickness of the plate-like member η. 〇In other aspects, the shape of the bonding jig may be formed into a roll shape, and both sides of the plate-shaped member, for example, both end faces are respectively clipped by a roller so as not to generate a moment: and the surface is rotated to convey a plate shape The components are bonded together. Sixth, most of the pressing of the roller is efficiently applied to the one end surface perpendicularly, and the air bubbles can be removed while being removed. As a method of manufacturing the light guide plate of the present invention, a method of attaching a sheet (sealing strip) having an adhesive material attached thereto to a light guide plate substrate has been described above. </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> In the case where the opening or the bottom surface has a remarkable effect, the concave-convex structure (hereinafter referred to as "longitudinal groove structure") having a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction will be described. However, the fifth invention of the present specification is not limited to the longitudinal groove structure exemplified, and it can be applied to a sheet (sealing strip) with an adhesive material having various uneven structures. (Manufacturing Method of Vertical Groove Sheet Reel) First, a sheet having a resin layer having a vertical groove structure (also referred to as a "longitudinal groove layer") laminated on a substrate is wound into a reel on a core tube. A method of manufacturing the following (referred to as "longitudinal (four) sheet reel") will be described. A method of producing a film having a reel-like structure having a concave-convex structure by the following method is known in the art, that is, a substrate wound in a spiral shape on a core tube is taken out from a core tube (extraction step), and a photopolymerizable resin combination is applied. The object (coating step) Φ is pressed against the cylindrical surface having a concave-convex structure on the surface of the cylindrical surface: the upper surface of the substrate is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, and the photosynthetic resin composition is cured on one surface of the substrate. a uv-hardened resin layer (hardening step), and a sheet obtained by laminating the substrate and the tree (four) is wound into a reel on another core tube (winding step) (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7. Gazette) . In the method of PET film, in the method, by using a mold having a longitudinal groove structure on the surface of the cylindrical surface, a sheet containing the substrate and the longitudinal groove layer can be wound, and the axial groove is formed. In this case, in order to prevent the longitudinal groove layer from being damaged, it is preferable to take up the longitudinal groove layer so as to be located inside the reel. As a suitable example, the substrate may be a longitudinal groove sheet reel J1 ° having a thickness of 125 157266.doc -194 - 201222097 and a longitudinally grooved layer of a UV curable resin layer having a thickness of 15 μm (a longitudinal groove with an adhesive material) Method for manufacturing sheet reel A1: attaching method) Next, using the above-mentioned vertical groove sheet reel, a sheet in which a heavy peeling separation film, an adhesive layer, a substrate, and a vertical groove layer are sequentially laminated is manufactured in a core tube The first method of winding up into a reel shape (hereinafter referred to as "longitudinal grooved sheet reel with adhesive material") will be described (Fig. 〇❹ Preparation of a layered heavy separation separation film, an adhesive layer, and The adhesive film which is lightly peeled off the separation film is wound into a reel on the core tube (hereinafter referred to as "adhesive film reel" h, and the sheet including the substrate and the vertical groove layer is extracted from the vertical groove sheet reel η Material ι (longitudinal groove sheet reel extraction step), and the adhesive film is taken out from the above-mentioned adhesive film reel (adhesive film reel extraction step), and the adhesive film extracted from the above is separated from the light release separation film to obtain heavy separation separation. Membrane and adhesive sheet are out of step The adhesive layer of the sheet 2 is laminated with the sheet so as to be in contact with the substrate, and the pressure is applied by light pressure to bond the film (the bonding step). The back layer has a heavy peeling separation film. , the adhesive layer, the substrate and the longitudinal groove; the other core tube is wound into a roll shape (the step of taking up the longitudinal groove sheet reel with the adhesive material), thereby manufacturing the longitudinal groove piece of the material (4) The material reel J2. The longitudinal groove sheet reel J2' to which the adhesive material is attached is also preferably wound so that the longitudinal groove layer is located inside the reel. As a suitable example, the heavy separation separation film is exemplified. The ρρ τ' adhesive layer with a thickness of 75 μπι is an optical layer with a thickness of 25 μm. Next, 157266.doc •195- 201222097 The material of the substrate is a PET film with a thickness of 125 μm, and the vertical groove layer has a thickness of 15 μm. Longitudinal grooved sheet reel J2 with an adhesive material attached to the UV-curable resin layer. (Manufacturing method A2 of the longitudinal groove sheet reel with adhesive material: coating method) Third 'on the use of the above-mentioned longitudinal groove sheet Reel, manufacturing will be layered with heavy peeling separation film, sticky A second method in which a sheet of a layer, a substrate, and a vertical groove layer is wound into a reel on a core tube (hereinafter referred to as a "longitudinal groove sheet reel with an adhesive material") is illustrated (Fig. j2) Preparing the heavy release separation film to be wound into a reel on the core tube (hereinafter referred to as "heavy release separation film reel". The substrate and the longitudinal groove layer are extracted from the above-mentioned vertical groove sheet reel: 1. The sheet 1 (the vertical groove sheet reel extraction step) is coated with an adhesive material dissolved in a solvent on the surface of the substrate of the sheet 1 using a coating device (for example, a slit press coater) ( a coating step), wherein the solvent is volatilized by heating to obtain a sheet 2 with an adhesive layer (drying step), and a heavy peeling separation film is taken out from the heavy peeling separation film roll (removal separation film roll extraction step) The pressure-receiving layer is placed in contact with the adhesive layer of the sheet 2 so that the pressure is applied by a roller, thereby bonding the film (the bonding step). , adhesive layer, substrate and longitudinal 2 layers of the sheet The core tube is wound into roll form (with the longitudinal grooves of the sticky material &gt; {member spool winding process), thereby producing an adhesive with vertical rolls of 2 cents. The appropriate aspect of the longitudinal groove sheet winding shaft J2 of the material (4) is the same as the first method described above. In the method of bonding, the adhesive material is directly applied, so that the physical properties of the adhesive material are stable, and it is required to be referred to as the time during which the 157266.doc 201222097 is cooked and stored before use. The ripening period varies depending on the adhesive material to be used, but for example, it is preferably aged for about 2 weeks. (Manufacturing Method of Half-Slit Sheet) The fourth method for producing a half-cut sheet using the above-described longitudinal groove sheet roll with an adhesive material will be described. The sheet wound in a reel shape has a direction in which the sheet is taken out from the sheet, and the sheet is wound up (hereinafter referred to as "MD direction") and the width direction of the spool (hereinafter referred to as "TD direction"). Ο Ο In the case where the human light surface of the light guide plate used in the present invention is laminated via a bonding layer ((4) (four) layer), a substrate comprising a substrate and a resin layer having a longitudinal groove structure is required The direction in which the diffusion angle of the vertical groove structure is low (the direction parallel to the ridge line of the vertical groove) is defined as the thickness direction (short side direction) of the light incident surface, and the diffusion angle of the vertical groove structure is high. The direction (the direction orthogonal to the ridge line of the vertical groove) is the width direction (longitudinal direction) of the above-mentioned light incident surface. And *====================================================================================================== Half-cutting of the case of diffusion is added to the method of manufacturing. The manufacturing process of the half-cut sheet in the case of high diffusion in the direction of TM is shown in the drawing J3 from the upper left to the lower right. The sheet is highly diffused in the TD direction. In the case of: the longitudinal grooved sheet reel (high diffusion in the TD direction) m, in the _ direction of 3 degrees, becomes the width of the sheet of the final product of the slitting sheet, using a single knife '157266.doc -197- 201222097 Cutting in the TD direction (step B1). The width at this time is parallel to the direction in which the half slit is applied in the subsequent step, which is determined by forming a plurality of half slits on one sheet. Then, the length in the TD direction becomes The length of the long side of the moon material attached to the light incident surface of the light guide plate is cut by a single blade along the 訄]〇 direction to obtain the longitudinal groove sheet J3 with the adhesive material (step B2). Cut the 〇: to the end, you can also cut the ends, the quality From the viewpoint of sentence, 'the latter is preferable. In the middle, the length of the long side of the sheet of the person who is attached to the light guide plate is not limited to the same length as the long side of the light side of the light guide plate'. The reason why the length of the long side of the smooth surface of the light guide plate is shorter than that of the light guide plate is that the longitudinal groove seal strip h with the adhesive material is attached to the plurality of sheets along the longitudinal direction, or only In the case of a short fit, finally, the longitudinal groove sheet with the adhesive material is the edge of the short side of the sheet of the human light surface of the light guide plate. In the TM direction, the residual heavy peeling separation film is carried out without cutting the longitudinal groove layer, the base, and the half-cut sheet; 4 (step is a slit, and the direction of diffusion is substantially parallel and the direction of the half-cut is High direction. Millimeter, and perpendicular to the ridge line of the longitudinal groove structure (manufacturing method C of the high-diffusion snail sheet in the MD direction) The figure is from the upper left to the lower right too _ Out of the processing flow. In the longitudinal direction of the sheet material, the volume of the sheet is 'make it sticky ★ (D direction spread) J22, In the TD direction $ 157266.doc 201222097 Ο

The slit is formed into a small roll and re-wound in such a manner as to become the sheet width of the final product of the half-cut sheet (step C1). The width at this time is orthogonal to the direction in which the half slit is applied in the subsequent step, and is determined by forming a plurality of half slits on one sheet. Since the size of the number of the longitudinal groove seals of the short strip-shaped adhesive materials is limited in the TD direction when the half-cut sheet J4 is formed, it is obtained by the slitting of the roll-to-roll (10)'. The vertical groove sheet roll and roll assist of the material are even more versatile for semi-finished products. The reason for this is that the length of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate is various, but in addition, the thickness of the sheet material with the adhesive material corresponding to the thickness of the human light surface is somewhat to some extent. It is limited, so the length corresponding to the light guide plate can be determined in the subsequent steps. Then 'small roll of the vertical grooved sheet reel with the adhesive material so that the length of the MD direction becomes the long side of the sheet attached to the light incident surface of the light guide plate, and the length is 'in the TD direction with a single knife edge The cutting is performed to obtain a longitudinal groove sheet J3 with an adhesive material (step C2). Finally, the 'longitudinal groove sheet door with the adhesive material is attached so that the length in the τ〇 direction becomes the length of the short side of the sheet of the human light surface of the light guide plate. Residual heavy peeling separation membrane: a half-cut seam is obtained by cutting the longitudinal groove layer and the substrate and the adhesive layer to the adhesive layer; 4 (step C3) n is to reliably adhere the adhesive material The longitudinal groove sealing strip J5 is broken. In detail, it is formed into a cross-section material as shown in the following figure m, (1), and FIG. 114, and the cutting reaches the heavy peeling separation film to a certain extent, but does not break. status. (marked) 157266.doc 201222097 The longitudinal groove seal of the light guide plate with the adhesive material is 5 because of the high transparency of the member, it is necessary to distinguish the guide of the longitudinal groove seal which is attached to the material. Light plates and unattached light guide plates are very difficult. Therefore, in the manufacturing step of the light guide plate, the position of the inspector who is not attached with the defective product of the vertical groove sealing strip J5 is not manually operated, or is required to realize the automatic two. mark. Therefore, it is preferable to make a visible mark in the longitudinal groove seal J5 with the adhesive material of the present invention. The work is: the position of the mark, suitable for the half-cut sheet of the easy-setting surface light source of the position that does not have an optical influence. J4^ position '(4) Figure π with the knife blade The location recorded by the Tienchuan Order. Further, the instructor # is exemplified in the half-cut with the mark attached, and the marker scorns the ml ^ the half mark of the two parts to form the mark, or marks the mark near the center of the thousand-cut sheet J41. (Method of marking at the same time as the reel sectioning) When using the figure 5', use the method of the additional mark of the above step c2 to say that the second == = _ (4) after the small groove of the vertical groove sheet of the material, use h : The longitudinal groove layer is extracted as a surface. However, the station draws a line in the direction of a TM, and then sends out a small amount of the pumping, and draws the first-green, and the soil mail is transported out on both sides along the TM direction. If you use a double head in the pre-position, you can also use the double-headed case. However, you can also draw 2 lines along the delivery side of the reel. In addition, if you design the head to (4), there is no Stopping 157266.doc -200- 201222097 The reel is sent for one job, which increases the processing speed. However, if all of the above are realized, the apparatus becomes large-scale and expensive, and therefore, it is suitable to design a device corresponding to the manufacturing amount and the like. Then, the single slit is cut between the two marks in the TD direction to fabricate the longitudinal groove sheet j3i with the mark (step C2-2). In order to make it possible to cut the knife between the marks during the cutting process, and to suppress the influence of the mark on the surface light source device (to shield the optical interference such as the light color of the LED as the point light source), the position of the mark is relatively small. The distance from the end of the longitudinal grooved sheet J3 1 marked with a mark is 0 mm or more and 20 mm or less, more preferably 〇·5 mm or more and 10 mm or less, and most preferably j mm or more and 5 mm or less. Therefore, when the longitudinal groove seal strip J5 with the adhesive material is adhered to the light-incident surface, the mark can be set to be non-existent, and in the case of pasting the plurality of sheets, the mark position is The surface light source device is located between the LED and the adjacent LED to suppress optical interference. (Type of mark) 0 Further As a method of preventing the above optical interference, the color of the mark is preferably black or gray. Thereby, the color of light incident from the LED to the light guide plate can be prevented from being colored. Further, the line thickness of the mark is preferably 50 μηι to 2 mm, more preferably 1 μm μm to 1 mm, and most preferably 2 μm μm to 5 μ μηη. It has been confirmed that by setting the line thickness of the mark within this range, the function as a mark can be achieved by visual observation or the like, and the optical interference can be suppressed to a minimum. At this time, even when the surface light source device is fabricated, the mark is located on the surface opposite to the LED, and the quality of the mark can be maintained. 157266.doc •201- 201222097 As a method of marking, a method such as laser, inkjet, starnp roller, pen, or the like can be considered, and in this manufacturing example, inkjet is exemplified by dark. As the ink material for inkjet, a dye system or a pigment system may be selected, but in view of bleeding, etc., a pigment system is preferred in many cases. Further, as the solvent, water, an organic solvent (MEK (methyl ethyl ket〇ne methyl ethyl ketone), ethanol) or the like can be considered. When water is used, since it is free of volatile substances, it is effective as a VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) restriction measure. Since the organic solvent can be shortened by drying, the processing time can be shortened, and therefore, it can be suitably used as needed in consideration of the VOC countermeasure. (Marking of a single sheet) In addition, it is difficult to perform marking from the reel state by using the above-described manufacturing method B or a plurality of processing methods such as the manufacturing method D described later. The marking method in this case is illustrated in Fig. J10. In the step D3, the sheet to be marked is sequentially fed to the label head, and the both ends of the sheet are marked. The marking object shown in the figure is a semi-cut longitudinal groove sheet (single piece) J42 which is peeled off from the edge of the slit. This device can also be used for the longitudinal groove sheet J3 or the semi-cut sheet with the adhesive material as needed. Material J4, etc. are marked. The processing steps can be variously combined, and the fifth invention of the present specification is not limited to the processing flow shown in the production example. - In addition, as a method of marking a single sheet, a manual operation, a marking method, or the like can also be performed by using a jig of an alignment position (a ruler, a mask, etc.) when the production is small, etc. , you can also choose manual operation. (Half-cutting method C3 and B3 for single-sheet processing) Using the drawing J6, half-cut the marked longitudinal groove sheet J31 manufactured by the step B2 of the method B or the step 157266.doc 201222097 of the method C of the method C is used. The slit is formed by a method of forming a half-cut sheet J41 with a "self". The marked longitudinal groove sheet J3i manufactured in the step C2 or the mark-attached longitudinal groove sheet J3 1 which has been subjected to the above-mentioned single-piece mark processing after the step B2 is located on the front side of the longitudinal groove layer The heavy peeling separation membrane is disposed on the conveying table in a manner of being located on the back side. The longitudinal groove sheet j3i with the mark is conveyed to the position on the conveying table facing the single knife, and accordingly, the corresponding light guide is used.

The width of the thickness of the plate is cut into a depth which reaches the heavy peeling separation film but the peeling separation film is not broken, whereby the semi-cut sheet (single piece) J41 with the mark can be manufactured. (Scissing of the slit remaining side) Step C4 At this time, the longitudinal grooved strip J5 of the adhesive material is attached to the sheet of the longitudinal grooved sheet J31 with a mark, and the longitudinal groove seal strip J5 (hereinafter also referred to as The "short strip") and the short strip formed by the final slit are not only affected by the conveying accuracy of the conveyance, and the like, but also by the marked longitudinal groove sheet (1) the positional accuracy of the X position. It is not easy to obtain the width of the corresponding light guide plate to maintain the width of the photon 4 . The & m exemplifies a method of removing the semi-cut sheet of He« (the short strip at both ends of the single piece. The method is manually performed, but it can also be mechanically peeled off, and the mark can be manufactured. The semi-cut seam of the cut edge is cut out. The plurality of sheets of the form are bagged, and the step of bonding to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate by corrugated cardboard is used, or sold to the light guide plate. The manufacturer who fits into the glossy surface. (The number of short strips in the case of half-cutting) 157266.doc 201222097 In the case of the figure (4), the material is stitched in the same shape. The short strip is on the sheet corresponding to the thickness of the knife. It is pushed by the direction of the start of the slit (the left direction in Fig. j6), so when the number of half slits is increasing, there is a large bulge on the strip peeling separation membrane, or the short crawler crawls up to the adjacent In the case of the short strips, in addition, regarding the number of short strips per sheet, * ^ is deficient in packing efficiency, etc., more preferably. According to the above two restrictions, the slit is left (4) half slit Sheet (single piece) or semi-cut sheet with a marked slit (single piece) The number of short strips on J43 is preferably 1G or more, (10) or less, more preferably 25 or more, and 75 or less. 'If the stock management is also considered, 50 of the regular number is used. It is the best in the industry. (The width of the remaining edge of the slit) The width of the margin of the above-mentioned slit is improved by the above-mentioned precision of the width of the strip, and the strip is prevented from being scraped or transported. (The single piece is set for the purpose of peeling off. However, if the width of the remaining edge of the slit is too large, the efficiency of the cut is deteriorated. Considering such a problem, the width of the remaining edge of the slit must be 〇mm or more, 2G _ The following degree is preferably Μmm to ^1, 1G to brew the following, more preferably 2 or more, and $wake up. In addition, the width of the button is set to be the same as the thickness of the corresponding light guide plate, and the figure J6 is not changed. Since the conveyance conditions of the conveyance table are easily manufactured, it is preferable that, for example, a 3 mm thick light guide plate which is mainstream in television applications in the market is suitable for a width of 2·8 _, and in this case, processing precision is also considered. , the remaining edge of the slit is suitably set to 3 mm ± l.5 mm (The manufacturing method of the half-cut small-roll reel m) Rotary mode method As described above, the type of the length of the short strip which can be used as a product is 157266.doc .204-201222097 (the type of the length of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate) There are many, and the type of the thickness of the light guide plate is limited to a certain extent. Therefore, if the state of the small roll reel (semi-cut small roll reel J222) in the state after the half-cut is performed is stored as a semi-finished product, When ordering the size of the short strip length, it can be delivered in a very short period of time, which has great significance in the industry. The method is illustrated in Figure J8. The longitudinal groove sheet reel with the adhesive material is taken out. In the roll J221, the reel is placed on the one side, and the half-cut slit is pressed without being seamed on the rotary cutter provided with the knife having the circumference of the cylindrical shape (step D1-1). Thereafter, the remaining portion of the slit is removed from the end portion of the sheet (step D1-2). Then, the vertical groove layer is taken up as the inner side, whereby the half-cut small roll reel J222 (winding step) can be manufactured. (Cutting method D2 of the half-cut small-roll reel and marking method 〇3) A method of manufacturing a semi-cut sheet (single piece) j43 with a marked slit remaining with a half-cut small roll reel J222 . As shown in Fig. J9, the half-cut small-roll reel rib is taken out, and the slice is cut with the length of the smooth surface of the person corresponding to the light guide plate of the single-blade (step D2), thereby manufacturing the semi-cut longitudinal groove of the quilting remaining edge. Sheet (single piece) J42. Since there is also a need for marking in the assembly steps of some of the light guide plates, it is also preferable to package, transport or sell the plurality of sheets in this form. % &gt; In the case of Fig. J1G, the half slit longitudinal groove sheet (single piece) M2 obtained by peeling the remaining side of the slit is provided with the vertical groove layer as the surface and the heavy peeling separation film layer as the back surface. On the wheel transfer table, and with the conveyance of the conveyor table, a marking line is drawn near the end of the sheet. In this way, it is possible to manufacture a semi-cut sheet (single piece) J43 with the remaining side of the slit. 157266.doc 201222097 (warping direction of semi-cut sheet) The half-cut sheet μ is manufactured on the premise of the following, that is, the final guide light = smooth surface, and the self-weight peeling separation film will be attached with adhesive. ': The longitudinal groove seal 15 is individually peeled off. Use Tuchuan to think about the preferred direction of the lightness of the half-cut sheet 该 under this premise. In the middle of the map, the vertical groove layer is used as the convex side, and is set to warp toward the convex side in the direction of the half slit. In this way, if the longitudinal groove seal strip J5 with the adhesive material is provided in a plurality of sections, the groove sheet J5 with the adhesive material can be easily separated, so that the groove sheet J5 with the adhesive material can be easily singulated. very suitable. Further, when exposed to a high temperature or the like in a state in which the slit surface of the adhesive material is in contact with each other, the risk of re-rotation (silk-bonding failure) of the adhesive material can be minimized. This warpage can be controlled by cutting the depth of the slit by cutting the person to the weight, or by using the pressing condition of the roller or the like in each processing step. (The depth of the slit reached in the heavy peeling separation film) The above method for performing the half slit processing by a mechanism such as a single blade or a rotary die is exemplified. In Fig. m, the appropriate depth J6 in which the slit reaches the heavy peeling separation membrane will be described. σ As shown in Fig. J12, the slit direction is a direction substantially perpendicular to the ridge line of the vertical groove of the vertical groove layer and is substantially perpendicular to the surface of the separation film. In order to reliably cut the silk layer, it is preferable to cut the slit/6' on the μ' and to suppress the depth of the heavy separation medium. Considering the stable manufacturing in consideration of the accuracy of the half slitting device, and the strength of the heavy peeling separation membrane in the operation, etc., the slit depth J6 in the separation membrane reaching the heavy peeling 157266.doc 201222097 is preferably 2 μπχ or more. The thickness of the heavy separation separation membrane is at least one and a half, more preferably 5 or more and 25 or less. (After reaching the offset of the slit and the short strip in the heavy peeling separation film) In FIGS. J13 and 4, it is exemplified that the offset of the slit J6 and the short strip J5 reaching the heavy peeling separation film described above is controlled to an appropriate degree. form. In Fig. 3, the cross-section to the left of the sheet is used to produce a larger offset between the slit J6 and the short strip J5 in the heavy peeling separation film. This can be achieved by step Β3 or step C3, starting from the left side of Fig. 3, performing half slitting and controlling the angle of the blade edge of the single knife. Specifically, there is a method of making the angle of the knife asymmetrical. By making the offset between the longitudinal groove seal strip (short strip) J5 with the adhesive material and the position of the slit J6 reaching the heavy peel separation membrane, the adhesive material is attached. Longitudinal groove sealing strip (short strip) j 5 The weight of the heavy peeling separation membrane together with a single peeling on the self-weight peeling separation membrane is greatly reduced. Further, the example in Fig. J14 is not a suitable offset when the rotary mode 〇1 shown in Fig. 1 is processed. Due to the nature of the rotary cutter, the offset between the slit 16 and the short strip J5 reaching the heavy separation separation membrane 会 is somewhat reduced in the vicinity of the center, but the risk of fracture of the heavy separation separation membrane is minimized, It is manufactured in such a manner that the short strips on the left and right sides of Fig. J14 are offset outward. This can be achieved by a method of individually changing the angle of the knife of the rotary cutter in the longitudinal direction of the cylinder. Further, as shown in FIG. J13 or FIG. JU, by offsetting the position of the longitudinal groove seal strip (short strip) J5 with the adhesive material and the slit j6 reaching the heavy peel separation separation film Manufacture, it is also possible to prevent a plurality of longitudinal groove seals (short strips) with the adhesion of the material 157266.doc -207- 201222097, J5 soaring "brother" (four) manufacturing (four). (In place of the mark), in the description of the present invention, the description of the mark as a visible mark is as described above, but when the mark of the human light remaining on the light guide plate is more strongly avoided, etc. Alternatively, the thermal fading ink may be used for marking, or instead of the marking, the colored protective film may be applied to the entire surface of the longitudinal groove surface or partially, so as to be formed into a body with the longitudinal groove sealing strip with the adhesive material. Method etc. Then, the light guide plate after the bonding is heated. In the case where the longitudinal groove seal J5 with the adhesive material is attached to the light incident surface of the light guide plate, only the colored protective film is peeled off. If these methods are used, the mark will not remain on the light-incident surface. In the U example of the present invention, the specific form is limited to the scope of the invention, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and the configuration can be appropriately combined and changed. (Adhesive material) In the k example of the present invention, the thickness of the adhesive layer is 25 μη1, but the fifth invention of the present specification is not limited to this thickness. A thickness of 5 (four) or more and 250 μηι or less is suitable. If it is too thin, reliability and the like are likely to cause problems, and if it is too thick, the cost burden is increased. However, if the adhesive layer is thick, the air is not easily entered in the step of bonding the light incident surface of the light guide plate, so that the adhesive layer may be selected to be thick. In view of such a case, the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably 10 μηι or more and 100 μηι or less, more preferably 2 μηηΐΗ or 60 μιη or less. J57266.doc 201222097 (Heavy release separation film) In the present production example, the heavy release separation film is described as having a thickness of 75 μm. However, the fifth invention of the present specification is not limited to this thickness. The material is as long as PC (polycarbonate), PP (polypropylene), TAC (triacetyl cellulose), COP (cycloolefin polmer), and PS (polystyrene). , polystyrene), PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate, polymethylmethacrylate vinegar), MS (methylstyrene, methyl styrene), crepe paper, resin coated paper and other film-like members can be selected. Further, regarding the thickness, in order to perform the half slit, it is necessary to have a thickness of 10 μm or more, and the upper limit depends on the cost and whether it is a rollable thickness. In view of such a case, the thickness of the heavy release separation film is actually 10 μm or more and 500 μm or less, preferably 2 5 μm or more and 250 μm or less, more preferably 3 5 μm or more and 100 μm or less. Further, in terms of manufacturing stability and cost, 3 7 μm, 50 μm, and 75 μm which are usually available in the PET substrate are most suitable. (Vertical groove layer and vertical groove sheet reel) In the present manufacturing example, the vertical groove layer is described by a UV-curable resin layer having a vertical groove of 15 μm thick, and the substrate is 125 μm thick. PET is described, but the fifth invention of the present specification is not limited to this. As the vertical groove layer, a method of transferring using a thermosetting resin or a thermoplastic resin may be selected, and as the material of the substrate, PC, PP, TAC, COP, PS, PMMA, MS, or the like may be used for the optical. The membranous member with transparency for use can be selected. The thickness of the substrate can also be carried out as long as it is 10 μm or more. However, when it is too thin, the operation when the light-integrating surface of the light guide plate is 157266.doc -209-201222097 is poor, and the workability is deteriorated. If it is too thick, the cost is increased, and the half-cutting step 83, The risk of step C3 or the step of climbing the short strip is increased, so it is not good. Therefore, in consideration of cost and the like, the thickness is preferably 25 μχη or more and 250 μηη or less, more preferably μηι or more, less than 150 μΓη, and most preferably 5〇4111 or more and 125 μm or less. The specific embodiment of the half slit sheet which can be employed in the fifth invention of the present specification is as follows. [1] A half-cut sheet which is formed on a separation film and formed with a plurality of short strip-shaped optical films integrated with an adhesive material, and an opening or a bottom surface including a concave portion or a convex portion on the surface of the optical film a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in a direction perpendicular to either side of the half-cut sheet, the back side of the optical film layer being substantially flat and integrally formed with the adhesive layer a separation film is disposed on the surface opposite to the plane in which the adhesive layer is held so as to be easily peeled off from the adhesive layer, and the optical film layer and the adhesive layer are cut flatly at substantially the same width to form a plurality of layers on the separation film. In the root strip, the cutting direction is a direction perpendicular to a major axis of the anisotropic shape of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions. [2] The half-cut sheet according to (1) above, wherein at least one mark is applied to the plurality of short strip-shaped optical films. [3] The semi-cut sheet according to [2] above, wherein the mark is applied in a line shape 157266.doc -210-201222097 The thickness of the line is in the range of 50 μm to 2 mm. [4] A half-cut sheet of the above paste or m, wherein the mark is applied in a range from the short side end portion of the plurality of short strip-shaped optical films to the range of 5 to 5 mm. [5] The half-cut sheet according to any one of the above [2] to [4] wherein the color of the above mark is black or gray. [6] The semi-cut sheet according to any one of the above-mentioned (1), wherein the separation membrane is set to be a portion of the separation membrane that carries the plurality of short strips of optical film. The short side of the plurality of short strip-shaped optical films has a large size and has a protruding portion. [7] The half-cut sheet of the above [6], wherein the protruding portion of the separation film is set in the range of 1 mm to 5 mm. The semi-cut sheet according to any one of the above-mentioned [1], wherein the number of the plurality of short optical films is increased by the number of the plurality of short optical films. The depth is 2 μηι or more and the partial slit of one or more of the thickness of the separation membrane. [9] The half-cut sheet according to the above [8], wherein the position of the partial slit cut out in the separation film and the boundary line between the short strip-shaped optical films are 157266.doc -211 - 201222097 position portion Or all offset. [10] The semi-cut sheet of m described above, wherein the offset is based on a short strip optical film near the center of the half-cut sheet, or a short strip optical film near the end portion, It gets bigger. The semi-cut sheet according to any one of the above-mentioned items, wherein the cross-sectional direction of the short-length optical medium is warped by a surface carrying the short optical film as a convex side, or is formed Protruding warp pleats. [12] The half-cut sheet of the [m[u]----the above-mentioned plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape is a longitudinal groove structure. [13] A method of producing a light guide plate, wherein a short strip optical film peeled off from the half slit sheet according to any one of the above (1) to (1) is bonded to at least one light incident surface. [14] A television receiver device comprising a light guide plate as described above in the light guide plate [15]. A surface light source device is described with reference to specific manufacturing examples as in the following description. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and the following production examples, and various modifications can be made. H 157266.doc • 212-201222097 For example, the materials, arrangements, shapes, and the like of the members in the manufacturing examples can be modified as appropriate. Further, the configuration shown in the production example can be combined as appropriate to constitute a television receiver and a surface light source device. Further, it can be modified as appropriate without departing from the scope of the invention. <Production Example A> [Production Example A-1] The light-incident surface was mirror-finished, and the opposite surface was subjected to uniform light-scattering processing (a circular diffusion containing a diameter of 扩散·8 mm of the diffusion particles and the binder) The property point is arranged in a mineral tooth shape (triangular lattice shape) with a pitch of 2.5 5 mm X 1 _ 5 mm, and is disposed at the same distance from the end portion of the light incident surface side, facing the point of the partial area of the LED Part of the area between the LEDs has the same diameter (even dot density)) Light guide plate model (material: polymethyl methacrylate, thickness · 3.0 mm 'width. 500 mm 'length: 1 〇〇 mm), along the light The surface was arranged with an arrangement pitch P of 27.5 mm (light-emitting surface size: 4.5 mm (width direction) x 2_5 mm (thickness direction), number of LEDs: 10), and a ray tracing simulation model of the surface light source device was produced. 〇The same measurement model as the measurement and detection model of the two-dimensional color luminance meter represented by CA2〇OOA manufactured by Konica Minolta was used, and was calculated in the direction parallel to the incident surface by Light Tools (〇ptical Research Associates) version 7.1. When the LED is lit, the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate is illuminated from the front side (V=0° 'H=〇°) from the front side (corresponding to P/G=3.93). [Manufacturing Example A-2] In addition to the light scattering processing on the opposite side, as shown in Fig. 19 (in the vicinity of the light incident surface (distance is 157266.doc 213·201222097, the inner side of the smooth side end is 7 mm (G=7 mm) In the vicinity of the area, the light guide plate model is set to be changed in the range of ρ=18·0°/.~45.0%, and the center portion of the opposing surface is uniformly ρ=8%). In the same manner as in Production Example a], the luminance distribution at the time of observation from the front direction (V = 0° 'H = 0) of the inner side of the light-surface side end portion 7 mm was calculated. [Manufacturing Example A-3] A groove structure having the surface distribution (average pitch: about 6 μΓη, average depth: about 4 μπι) shown in Fig. 2 was formed by using a transparent double-sided sheet and a sheet adhered on the light-incident surface. In addition to the polyethylene terephthalate film having an average thickness of 125 μm, the light guide plate model was set to be the same as the manufacturing example ,_丨, and the distance from the light surface to the inner side of the light side surface was 7 mm. The brightness distribution when viewed in the front direction (v=0° 'H=0°). [Manufacturing Example A-4] A groove having the surface distribution (average pitch of about 6 μm, average depth: about 4 μm) shown in Fig. 2 was formed by using a transparent double-sided sheet and a sheet adhered to the light-incident surface. The structure of polyethylene terephthalate film with an average thickness of 125 μm and the light scattering of the opposite surface is shown in Fig. 19 (near the entrance surface (7 mm from the end of the entrance side) The area near (g=7 mm) is changed in the range of p=18.0% to 45.0%, and the center of the opposite surface is uniformly p = 8%. The light guide plate model is set and manufactured. In the same manner, the luminance distribution when viewed from the front direction (V = 0°, H = 0°) of the inner side of the light-emitting surface side of the light-emitting surface is 7 mm. The distance from the light-emitting surface of the surface light source device of Production Examples A-1 to A-4 was from the front side of the light-side side end portion 7 mm (V = =0., h = 〇.) 157,266. Doc -214- 201222097 The brightness distribution is shown in Fig. 20, and the standard deviation (SD value) thereof is shown in Fig. 21 and Table A-1. Further, in Fig. 20, the vertical axis represents the brightness, and the horizontal axis represents the position on the light-emitting surface parallel to the light-incident surface. Further, in Fig. 21, the chain line indicates the S.D. value (0.2) which is tolerable for the image display device, and the one-dot chain line indicates the sufficient S.D. value (0.1) for the image display device. [Table A-1] [Table 3] Incoming light facing surface (light scattering processing) SD value mirror uniform point 0.810 Mirror surface corresponding to LED point 0.630 Groove structure uniform point 0.300 Groove structure corresponding to LED point 0.040 In the surface light source device of Production Example A-1, the luminance was not fixed, and hot spots (maximum portions) appeared. In the surface light source devices of Production Examples A-2 and A-3, the luminance unevenness was not eliminated. That is, light scattering having a light scattering degree that is smaller than a partial region of a portion between the point source and the point source is performed in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the opposite surface. In the manufacturing example A-2, although the brightness of the portion facing the LED was suppressed, the brightness of the portion between the LEDs was not improved. On the other hand, in the manufacturing example A-3 in which the grooved structure is formed on the light incident surface of the light guide plate, the brightness of the portion between the LEDs can be suppressed to some extent, and the brightness between the LEDs is improved. insufficient. On the other hand, in the surface light source device of Production Example A-4, the brightness of the portion was substantially fixed regardless of the 157266.doc •215·201222097, and no hot spot occurred. In addition, the 'light source device of the manufacturing example 4 does not have a pivot frame and the light-emitting region is not defined.' In order to achieve a narrow frame display device which is currently in a popular trend, it is necessary to set G (between the light incident surface and the light-emitting region). The horizontal distance of the surface of the left side of the ''10'& _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ It is very low 〇·〇4. According to this, it can be considered that even if the arrangement pitch of LEDs is increased to about 3. _ under the section (4), it means that even WG&gt;4 is only from the front direction. (4) Obtaining an SD value (10) that can be tolerated for an image display device. In particular, in the surface light source device of the manufacturing example, the distance from the opposite surface of the light-receiving plate enters the inner side of the light-side end portion 7 (corresponding to the region of the illuminating region), the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point source is lower than the partial scatter of the portion between the point source and the point source (pl = 18.〇%, p2= 45〇%), so calculate the s D of the brightness from the tilt direction (V=0., H=20.) The result is 0.05 or less. Since the arrangement pitch of the coffee is increased, the allowable SD value may not be obtained. [Production Example A-5] The transparent double-sided back sheet is adhered to the light-incident surface to be formed. A polyethylene terephthalate film having a surface distribution (average pitch: about 6 μm, average depth: about *) and an average thickness of 125 μm is shown in Fig. 2, and the opposite surface is subjected to Fig. 30 The circular diffusing point of the light scattering processing (containing a diffusion particle and a binder of 0.8 rnm to 1 · 3 mm) is arranged in a zigzag configuration (triangular lattice shape) at a distance from the light incident side end portion 157266 .doc -216- 201222097 Partial area between the point source and the point source of 1~4 mm (shading part, area B near the light entrance surface), p=20~60%, at the side of the light entrance side 4~6 mm (the area of the light-shielding part (junction area), area A), p=7~20%, in the area of 6 mm or more (non-shielding part, area A) from the end side of the light-incident side, p= 8%) Light guide plate (material: polydecyl acrylate, thickness: 3.0 mm, width: 409 mm, length: 721 mm) LEDs are arranged along the entrance surface at an arrangement pitch P of 19.2 mm (light-emitting surface size: 5.0 mm (width direction) x 3.0 mm (thickness direction), number of LEDs: 36). 其 Above, self-guide plate The side-by-side layered diffusion sheet (DS) and the ruthenium sheet (the surface is provided with a groove structure having a ridge line parallel to the light incident surface on which the LED is disposed) and the reflective polarizer (DBEF manufactured by 3M Company), and further The shape is arranged to face the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate so as to sufficiently cover the size of the light guide plate and the LED and has 395 mm&gt;&lt;700 mm The frame of the opening is used to fabricate a surface light source device. Using a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA2000A manufactured by Konica Minolta), the luminance was measured from the front direction (V = 0, H = 0) of the light-emitting surface, and the standard deviation (S.D. value) of the luminance of the smooth surface Q was taken out. The results are shown in Fig. 31. The S.D. value of the brightness of the light-emitting surface (non-light-shielding portion) is 0.02 or less at P/G = 1 to 2.6 (G is the distance from the light-incident surface (mm)). In addition, when the light surface is viewed from the oblique direction (V (Vertical) = 45 ° or H (Horizonal) = 20 °) (the measurement direction of the luminance meter is inclined with respect to the front surface of the light-emitting surface by V = 45 ° or H = 20 °) In the measurement, the SD value of the brightness of the inner side (non-light-shielding portion) of 7 mm from the end portion on the light-incident side is shown in Table A-2. Here, the above 157266.doc •217-201222097 Η, V represents the inclination angle of the luminance meter, respectively, the inclination angle parallel to the direction of the human light surface (the inclination angle formed by rotating perpendicular to the axis of the light incident surface) A tilt angle perpendicular to the direction of the light incident surface (inclination angle formed by rotation about an axis parallel to the light incident surface), and a positive value indicates an orientation tilted toward the center of the light emitting region or the display region. In the surface light source device of the manufacturing example, the luminance unevenness is not reduced from the front side but also when the light surface is viewed from the oblique direction. Further, the luminance unevenness was measured by visual observation in addition to the one-dimensional color redundancy juice, and it was confirmed that the result was the same as the S.D. value. [Table Α-2] [Table 4] SD value V0° H0° 0.024 — V0° H20° 0.026 ~~ V45° H0° 0.031 [Manufacturing example Α-6] In addition to light scattering processing on the opposite side of the light guide plate As shown in Fig. 32 (a circular diffusing point containing a diameter of 扩散 8 mmq·3 mm of the diffusion particles and the binder is arranged in a zigzag configuration (triangular lattice shape) at a distance of 4.5 mm from the end side of the light incident surface side (Fig. a partial region between the light-shielding portion and the region near the light-incident surface b) between the point-to-point light source and the point light source, p=2〇~6〇%, 4.5 to 6 mm from the end side of the light-incident surface (light-shielding portion ( The area of the boundary area) and the area A), P=10 to 13%, in the area of 6 mm or more (non-shielding portion, area A) from the end side of the light-incident side, p = 8 to 9%, and the manufacturing example A_5 light scattering processing phase 157266.doc -218- 201222097 Compares the difference between the partial region of the point source in the boundary region and the difference in the light scattering degree between the point source and the point source. In the same manner as in Production Example A-5, unevenness in brightness of the smooth surface was observed. When the observation is performed from either the front side (V=H=〇.) and the tilt direction (V=0., H=2〇.; v=45〇, H=0°), the brightness unevenness is smaller than the manufacturing example. The brightness of A_5 is uneven. [Manufacturing Example A-7] In the surface light source device of Production Example A-6, a display panel having the same configuration as that shown in Fig. 27 is disposed so as to face the light-emitting surface side 导 of the light guide plate (outside the light-shielding frame) The frame is sufficient to cover the size of the light guide plate, and the display area is 392_4 mm x 696.4 mm), and a display device is fabricated to observe uneven brightness in the display area. When viewing from the front (V=H=〇.) and the tilt direction (v=0., h=2〇.; v=45〇, ), the brightness unevenness in the display area is smaller than that of the manufacturing example A. -5 brightness unevenness β [Production Example A-li] 使用 A transparent double-sided backing sheet was used on the light-incident surface, and a groove structure having a surface distribution as shown in Fig. 24C was formed and the average thickness was 125 μm. The polyethylene terephthalate film 'opposite surface is subjected to light scattering processing shown in Fig. 33 (a circular diffusing point containing a diameter of 0.8 mm to 1.3 mm of the diffusion particles and the binder, to the ore tooth) The arrangement (triangular lattice shape) is set to a partial area between the point-to-point light source and the point light source which is located at a distance of 3.5 mm from the light-incident end side (the light-shielding portion, the area B near the human light surface), p=20~ 60%, in the area of 4.5 to 6 mm from the side of the light-incident side (light-shielding part (junction area), area a) 157266.doc • 219-201222097, p=10%, at the end side of the light-incident side The area of mm or more (non-shielding portion, area A), p=9%, and the area including 3.5 to 4.5 mm (shading portion, area c) from the end of the entrance surface Other areas do not have light scattering processing) Light guide plate (material: polymethyl methacrylate, thickness: mm, width: 409 mm, length: 721 mm), along the entrance surface, the arrangement pitch P is 19.2 mm Configuration LED (light-emitting surface size: 5 〇 (width direction) x 3.0 mm (thickness direction), number of LEDs: 36). On the side of the light guide plate, the diffusion sheet (DS)/chip is sequentially laminated (the surface has a groove structure having a ridge line perpendicular to the light incident surface on which the LED is disposed)/the cymbal (the surface has a relative surface) The groove structure (DS) disposed on the ridge line parallel to the entrance surface of the LED, and the diffusion sheet (DS) are disposed on the light-emitting surface opposite to the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate so as to cover the light guide plate sufficiently. A frame having an opening of 395 mm x 7 mm was used as the size of the LED, and a surface light source device was produced. The SD value of the luminance distribution of the smooth surface was obtained in the same manner as in Production Example A_5. Then, a liquid crystal display panel is laminated on the surface light source device, and the value of the luminance distribution of the display surface is also determined. The results are shown in Figure 34. The brightness is uneven on the front side (V=H=〇.) is 〇〇1 or less, and is in the tilt direction (V=45., H=〇.) is also 〇〇1 or less, in the tilt direction (v=〇.,h =2〇〇) It is also less than the brightness unevenness of the manufacturing example a_6 when it is observed as 0.01 or less. System: 13⁄4 cases Α·11, there is a enamel as an optical sheet other than the light scattering processing of the illuminating surface (the table Φ has a 157266.d〇i -220· 201222097 smooth surface with respect to the LED arranged Vertical ridge line groove structure), and obtain a very strong brightness + &amp; reduction effect, and then by adding a cymbal (the surface is provided with a groove having a ridge parallel to the entrance surface of the LED The groove structure) is further improved in brightness unevenness when viewed from an oblique direction. Further, by the diffusion sheet disposed between the light guide plate and the cymbal sheet, light scattering processing provided on the light guide plate is not recognized. [Production Example A-12] The light-scattering process of the opposite surface of the light guide plate is as shown below (not shown) Ο (The shape of the diffusion particle and the adhesive having a diameter of 0.8 mm to 1.3 mm is @1 shape| The property point ' is arranged in a mineral tooth shape (triangular lattice shape) between the opposite point light source and the point light source of 1.5 to 3.5 mm (the light shielding portion, the region B near the light incident surface) from the end portion of the light incident surface side. Part of the partial area, p=5〇~1〇〇%, 4.5~6 mm from the end of the light-incident side (light-shielding part (junction area), area A), p=l〇%, in the distance The area of the smooth side end portion of 6 mm or more (non-light-shielding portion, region A), p = 9%, and is not included in the other areas including the light-shielding portion and the region of the light-incident portion 3.5 to 4.5 mm. In the same manner as in Production Example A-5, the brightness unevenness of the smooth surface was observed. When the brightness was uneven, it was obtained from any of the front surface and the oblique direction. 6. Excellent quality. The prism sheet used in Production Example A-12 is only provided with a surface having a surface parallel to the light incident surface on which the LED is disposed. Since the groove structure of the ridge line is one piece, the effect of reducing the brightness unevenness is not as good as that of the manufacturing example A_u, but substantially the same effect is obtained. 157266.doc • 221-201222097 [Production Example A-13] In addition to the LED The arrangement pitch P is changed to 13·4 mm, and the light scattering processing of the opposite surface of the light guide plate is as shown below (not shown) (a circular shape including a diffusion particle and a binder having a diameter of 0·8 mm to 1.3 mm) The diffusing point is disposed in a zigzag configuration (two-dimensional lattice shape) between the point-to-point light source and the point light source that are located at the end portions 15 to 35 (light-shielding portion, the region B near the light-incident surface) Part of the area (width 4.5 mm), p=50~1〇〇%, 4.5~6 mm from the end of the light-incident side (light-shielding part (junction area), area A)' ρ-10% 'In the region of 6 mm or more from the side of the light-incident side (non-shielding portion 'area A), p=9% 'no light scattering processing is provided in other areas), the same as in the manufacturing example A-5, Take out the SD value of the brightness distribution of the smooth surface. Observe the brightness unevenness from either the front side or the tilt direction. The results were all superior to those of Production Example A-6. The results are shown in Fig. 35. The ruthenium used in Production Example A-13 was only provided with a ridge having a surface parallel to the light incident surface on which the LED was disposed. Since the groove structure of the wire is one piece, the effect of reducing the brightness unevenness is not as good as that of the manufacturing example A-11. However, since the distance between the point light sources is suppressed to be closer to the manufacturing example A_11, substantially the same effect is obtained. Production Example A-14 to A-16] In the 32ML 10 type television receiver manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, 'the arrangement pitch of the LEDs in the surface light source device was changed to 19.2 mm' and the light guide plate was replaced with the opposite surface. It has the light scattering 157266.doc -222- 201222097 processing shown in Table a-3 (Fig. A1 or Fig. 33) 'and the side (the side perpendicular to the entrance surface) is shown in Table A" (Fig. All~A13) The film receiving device of the manufacturing example A-14 (a) to (d) was produced by bonding a reflective sheet. In addition to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, a transparent double-sided back sheet (PD-S1 manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd.) was used to laminate the surface having a plurality of concave portions (FWHM: 83 (horizontal) X3) as shown in Fig. 24(c). A television receiver of Production Example A-15 (a) to (d) was produced in the same manner as in Production Example A-14 except that the polyethylene terephthalate film of the ultraviolet curable resin layer was used. Removed from the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, using a transparent double-sided back sheet (PD-S1 manufactured by Panac), the surface has a apex angle of R (pitch: about 5〇μηι, ridge line direction) A television receiver of Production Examples A-16 (a) to (d) was produced in the same manner as in Production Example 以外 丨 4 except for the polyethylene terephthalate film in the same manner as the thickness direction of the light guide plate. For these television receivers, the in-plane average luminance of the two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA2000A manufactured by Konica Minolta) and the in-plane average chromaticity X and y were measured by a liquid crystal panel. Taking (a) no unevenness as a reference example, the luminance 〇 is set to the relative luminance %, and the chromaticities x and y are set to be δ 与 from the reference example, and are added. The results are shown in the following Tables Α-3 to Α-5. 157266.doc -223- 201222097 [Table Ad] [Table 5] &lt;In-plane average luminance relative value (%)&gt; Manufacturing Example A-14 Production Example A-15 Production Example A-16 Light scattering processing on the opposite side surface RS is placed on the light surface without unevenness 83x3 R稜鏡(a) Figure A1 Figure A12 100.0 96.2 91.9 (b) Figure 33 Figure All 103.7 101.0 - (c) Figure A12 100.8 96.9 93.1 (4) Figure A13 - 98.5 - [Table A-4] [Table 6] &lt;Chromaticity difference Ax&gt; Production example A-14 Production example A-15 Production example A-16 Light scattering processing on the opposite side surface RS is placed on the smooth surface without unevenness 83x3 R稜鏡(a) Fig. A1 Fig. A12 0.000 0.000 -0.004 (b) Figure 33 Figure All 0.000 0.000 - (c) Figure A12 -0.001 -0.001 -0.002 (4) Figure A13 - 0.000 - 157266.doc -224- 201222097 [Table A-5] [Table 7] &lt;Chromaticity difference Ay&gt; Production example A-14 Production example A-15 Production example A-16 Opposite surface (light scattering processing) Side surface RS is placed on the light surface without unevenness 83x3 R prism (a) Fig. A1 Fig. A12 0.000 0.000 ] -0.005 (b) Fig. All 0.001 0.001 - (c) Fig. 33 Fig. A12 - 0.001 0.000 - 0.002 (d) Fig. A13 - 0.001 In the manufacturing examples A-14 to A-16, the light of the opposite side of the light guide plate The scattering processing pattern is either as shown in FIG. A1 or as shown in FIG. 33, and other conditions (the shape of the light-receiving surface of the reflecting sheet attached to the side surface of the light guiding plate is the same) is the brightness and chromaticity. No big difference. In addition, when the light-incident surface of the light guide plate includes a plurality of concave portions or convex portions (Production Example A-15), the case where the light-incident surface is mirror-finished (manufacturing example a_14) has an in-plane average. The brightness tends to decrease, but if the reflection sheet is placed on the side of the light guide plate as a whole (the arrangement of Fig. A11), the average brightness can be restored. Further, when the reflection sheet is partially adhered to the side surface of the light guide plate, the adhesion to the center portion as shown in FIG. A12 can be improved as compared with the case where the light is applied to the center portion as shown in FIG. The average brightness in the plane. [Reference] In a system with a denser distance between LEDs (p=1〇〇mm), if the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate are covered, the cover is at least not covered by the light-shielding frame. 157266.doc •225 · 201222097 The area A of the non-light-shielding part is subjected to light-scattering processing, and the area B near the light-incident surface of the light-shielding portion shielded by the light-shielding frame is configured such that the light scattering degree of the partial area of the point-to-point light source is lower than the right side The light scattering processing of the light scattering degree of the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source is not sandwiched between the region between the region A and the region B, at least a portion of the portion between the point source and the point source is not By setting the light scattering processing, % does not form a plurality of concave portions or convex portions even if the light entrance surface is formed (even if the light incident surface is substantially mirrored), a certain degree of brightness unevenness reduction effect can be obtained. Previously, there has been proposed a light guide plate in a region Α, a partial region of a 4-mesh-to-point light source, which increases the light scattering degree of a partial region between the positive m source and the point light source, but the quality of the light guide plate is particularly inclined. Poor, can not get the most suitable quality for TV. In addition, in the region:, the direct light (the original part (4), the light scattering degree of the sub-area between the point source and the point source is @, in the area B, only the right point A part of the area between the light source and the point source is subjected to a pattern of light scattering and reinforcement, and when there is no area C, and the area a is in contact with the area B, the quality is not sufficient. The ασ is not adhered to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate to form a film having a grooved structure, and the arrangement pitch ρ of the LEDs is set to 1 () _ except that the luminance unevenness of the light surface is observed as in the production example. Regarding the unevenness of the Brahman, the light-scattering process shown in Fig. A1 forms a light guide plate with a film having a groove structure; the light-incident surface is a mirror (into The light surface does not have a groove structure), and the light guide plate that is not light-scattered according to the position of the point light source is superior in quality from the front and the oblique direction - 157266.doc 201222097. &lt;Production Example B&gt; (Diffusing Sheet) In Production Example B, a master mold having a specific speckle pattern was used, and a photopolymerizable resin composition was filled between the substrate and the main mold, and ultraviolet rays were passed through the substrate. After being irradiated and hardened, the main mold and the resin layer containing the cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition are peeled off, whereby a resin layer having a concavo-convex structure is formed on one surface of the substrate. Ο Production examples B-1-B-6, B-9, and B-10 use the same master mold. In addition, 'the manufacturing examples B-7 and B-8' are manufactured differently from the above-described main mode according to the projection area directly above the light source or the projection area between the light sources as described later. In the example Β7 and β·8, the main modes with different distribution shapes are used. The ultraviolet irradiation was carried out by using a high-pressure mercury lamp and setting the irradiation condition to a light amount of 250 mJ/cm2. The thickness of the resin layer was 15 μm. Ο (A variety of optical sheets used in the production example) In the production example, a reflective sheet: a white reflective sheet containing a polyester resin (hereinafter referred to as "RS"). Trade name: Lumirror E6SL, manufactured by Toray Diffusion plate: a diffusion plate containing polystyrene, a thickness of 1.5 mm and a diffusing agent concentration of 13,000 ppm (hereinafter referred to as "DP". Trade name: DSF60, manufactured by Asahi Kasei E-materials) Surface-forming diffusion sheet : An optical sheet having a hemispherical lens (hereinafter referred to as "ML.F") is formed on a PET substrate having a thickness of 250 μm by a 157266.doc •227·201222097 uv hardening resin. Trade name: PTR-733 , manufactured by Shinwha Intertek) Optical sheet having an array structure of iridium: on a PET substrate having a thickness of 250 μm, a UV-curable resin is used to form a ridge having a vertex angle of 90° and a pitch of 50 μm Optical sheet of the column (hereinafter referred to as "slice". Product name: BEF-III, manufactured by 3Μ) Reflective polarizer: Reflective polarizer (hereinafter referred to as "DBEF". Trade name: DBEF, manufactured by 3Μ) . (Light source and light source unit used in the manufacturing example) As a light source of the light source unit, a white LED light source (manufactured by CREE Co., Ltd., trade name: LM6-EWN1-03-N3) of 3.5 mm square and 2.0 mm height is used. 133 LEDs are arranged in a pattern as shown in Fig. B17 to fabricate a light source unit. Hereinafter, a method of measuring the characteristics in Production Example B will be described. (Diffusion angle) The diffusion angle was measured from the surface of the diffusion sheet having a fine uneven structure, and was measured using a Goniometric Radiometers Real-Time Far-Field Angular Profiles Model LD8900 manufactured by Photon. In the following Production Example B, for example, when the diffusion angle is 5°, the FWHM (diffusion angle) of light in either direction is 5°. The diffusion angle distribution is measured by measuring the FWHM at intervals of 1 mm in the X-axis direction and/or the y-axis direction of the diffusion sheet, and a diffusion angle distribution map is obtained. I57266.doc -228- 201222097 (uneven brightness and brightness) For brightness, use a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA2000) made by Konica Minolta, set to 70 cm from the light source unit, which will be 120 mm in the center of the light source unit. &lt;Average brightness value measured in the range of 120 mm as the brightness. The luminance unevenness is an average value of the values calculated in the two directions of the X-axis direction and the y-axis direction. First, find the average luminance value in the X-axis (120 mm) direction. For the y-axis direction, the standard deviation of the value obtained by dividing the luminance value of each point by the luminance average value of ± 15.2 mm from each point. Find uneven brightness. Similarly, the average luminance value in the y-axis (120 mm) direction is obtained, and for the X-axis direction, the standard deviation of the value obtained by dividing the luminance value of each point by the luminance average value of ±20.8 mm from each point is obtained. Uneven brightness. Finally, the standard deviation of the X-axis direction and the standard deviation of the y-axis direction are added to the average value (hereinafter, &lt;Production Example B&gt; is expressed as "S.D.") as luminance unevenness of the light source unit. Furthermore, since the LED light source is a point light source, as shown in Fig. B2(b), the distribution of the diffusion angle is considered in the line where the straight line distance of the adjacent light source is the largest (the broken line in Fig. 2B(b)). The uneven brightness is the brightness unevenness when the surface is measured from the normal direction. Here, the criterion for determining the luminance unevenness is classified into two levels (〇, X) as described below. 〇 : S.D.^ 0.005 X : 0.005 &lt;SD 157266.doc -229-201222097 (refractive index of resin layer) Regarding the refractive index of the resin layer, the resin layer having a thickness of 15 μη 2 is peeled off from the substrate. Using a refractometer MODEL 2 010 prism COUPLER (manufactured by Metricon Co., Ltd.) Only the resin layer was measured. The results of the measurement corresponding to each resin used are shown in the following table. [Manufacturing Example B-1]

As shown in Fig. B14(b), a diffusion plate (DP) 14 and a diffusion sheet 15, a cymbal sheet 17, and a reflection type polarizer (DBEF) of Production Example b-1 to be described later are disposed in order above the light source (LED) 12. 'The light source unit of Production Example B-1 was obtained. The diffusion sheet 15 of Production Example B-1 was attached to one side of a substrate having a thickness of 25 μm ΐ 2 polyethylene terephthalate film (Cosmoshine Α 4300, manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., hereinafter referred to as "PET substrate"). A resin layer (resin 1) comprising a cured product of a photopolymerizable resin composition having the composition shown in Table 1 and Table B-2 below, and having a speckle by interference exposure on the surface An irregular concave-convex structure formed by the pattern. Further, in Tables B-1 and B-2, (A-1) to (A-5) correspond to "(A): an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group" Wherein '(A-1) corresponds to the compound represented by the above formula (1). Further, (Β ι) corresponds to (B): a photopolymerization initiator. The diffusion sheet 15 is used in such a manner that the uneven structure surface becomes a light-emitting surface. The diffusion angle (]?11) of the diffusion sheet 15 of Production Example B-1 was 83 Å. Here, the distance h between the reflection sheet (RS) 13 and the light incident surface of the diffusion plate (Dp) 14 is set to 2 1.0 mm. The brightness in the light source unit of the manufacturing example B-丨 was calculated by the above method I57266.doc -230· 201222097. The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. [Production Example B-2] The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to the following table (battery 2) of Table b_2. The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FWHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-2 was 85. .评价 The evaluation results of uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. [Production Example B-3] The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to (Batter 3) of Table B-1 and Table B-2 below. The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FWHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-3 was 90. . The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. [Production Example B-4] The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to (resin 4) in Table B-1 and Table B-2 below. The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FWHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-4 was 80. . The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. [Production Example B-5] 157266.doc -231·201222097 The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to the following table and Table b_2 (resin 5). The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FWHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-5 was 87. . The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. [Production Example B-6] The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to the following Table 3_1 and Table b-2 (resin 6). The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FwHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-6 was 86. . The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. [Manufacturing Example B-7] As shown in Fig. B14 (a), a diffusion plate (DP) 14, a diffusion sheet 15 of a manufacturing example b_7 to be described later, and a surface-forming diffusion sheet (MLF) are sequentially disposed above the light source 12. 16. A surface-forming diffusion sheet (mlf) 16 and a reflection-type polarizer (DBEF) 18 constitute a light source unit of Production Example B_7. The diffusion sheet of Production Example B-7 is a resin layer having a cured product of a photopolymerizable resin composition having a composition shown in the following Table and Table 2, on a surface of a substrate having a thickness of 25 〇μπΐ2ΡΕτ ( Resin 1), and the resin layer has an irregular concave-convex structure formed by a speckle pattern of interference exposure on the surface. In the diffusion sheet of the manufacturing example -7, the diffusion angle of the projection area of the light source is 157266.doc • 232·201222097 83° The projection angle of the projection area at the intermediate point between the light source and the light source is 28. The diffusion angle changes as shown in Fig. B1 8(a). Further, the horizontal axis of the graph B1 8 (a) indicates a specific position on the surface of the diffusion sheet, and the circle indicated on the horizontal axis indicates the position of the light source. The diffusion sheet of Production Example B-7 was used in such a manner that the layer in which the irregular concavo-convex pattern was formed was a light-emitting surface. Here, the distance h between the reflection sheet (RS) 13 and the light incident surface of the diffusion plate (DP) 14 is set to 19.0 mm.亮度 The luminance unevenness in the light source unit of Production Example B-7 was calculated by the above method. The evaluation results of the luminance unevenness are shown in Table B-3 below. Further, the arithmetic mean value (Αν 1) of the diffusion angle peak and the diffusion angle valley value in the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-7, and the diffusion of all the measurement points distributed between the continuous diffusion angle peak and the diffusion angle valley value. The arithmetic mean of the angles (Αν2) is shown in Table b-3 below. [Manufacturing Example B-8] As shown in Fig. B14(a), a diffusion plate (DP) 14 and a diffusion sheet 15 of a production example b-8 to be described later, and a surface-forming diffusion sheet are disposed in order above the light source 12. (MLF) 16, a surface-forming diffuser (MLF) 16, and a reflective polarizer (DBEF) 18 constitute a light source unit of Production Example b-8. The diffusion sheet of Production Example B-8 was provided on one surface of a PET substrate having a thickness of 250 μm, and was provided with a cured product containing a photopolymerizable resin composition having the composition shown in Table B-1 and Table B-2 below. A resin layer (resin ruthenium) having an irregular concave-convex structure 157266.doc-233 - 201222097 formed on the surface by a speckle pattern of interference exposure. In the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-8, the diffusion angle of the projection area of the light source was 83. The diffusion angle of the projection area of the intermediate point between the light source and the light source is 28. The diffusion angle changes as shown in Figure B1 8(b). Further, the horizontal axis of Fig. B18(b) indicates a specific position on the surface of the diffusion sheet, and the circle indicated on the horizontal axis indicates the position of the light source. The diffusion sheet of Production Example B-8 was used in such a manner that a layer having an irregular concave-convex pattern shape was used as a light-emitting surface. Here, the distance between the reflection sheet (RS) 13 and the light-incident surface of the diffusion plate (DP) 14 was used. h is set to 17.0 mm. The luminance unevenness in the light source unit of Production Example B_8 was calculated by the above method. The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. Further, the arithmetic mean value (Avl) of the diffusion angle peak and the diffusion angle valley value in the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-8, and the diffusion angle of all the measurement points distributed between the continuous diffusion angle peak and the diffusion angle valley value. The arithmetic mean value (Av2) is shown in Table b-3 below.

[Production Example B-11J The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to (Batter 7) of Table B_i and Table B_2 below. The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FWHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-11 was 75. . The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. 157266.doc -234-201222097 [Production Example B-12] The photopolymerizable resin composition was changed to (Batter 8) of Table B-1 and Table B-2 below. The other conditions were the same as in Production Example B-1, and a diffusion sheet was produced to obtain a light source unit. The diffusion angle (FWHM) of the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-12 was 70. . The evaluation results of the uneven brightness are shown in Table B-3 below. 〇

157266.doc 235- 201222097 [8&lt;] Resin 8 ir> 1.50 Resin 7 m 1.53 Resin 6 yn 1.61 Resin 5 〇in vn &lt;N Resin 4 〇tn &lt;N 1.55 Resin 3 ^T) 1.65 Resin 2 〇1.60 Resin 1 〇in &lt;N in 1.58 (A-1) (A-2) (A-3) (A-4) (A-5) (Bl) Refractive index resin composition (% by mass) 157266.doc -236- 201222097 ο [6ί [(N-S&lt;1 - I component ethoxylated (1) o-phenylphenol acrylate (A-LEN-10, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., product name) Trifunctional acrylamide phthalate Monomer (CN929, manufactured by Sartomer) Product name 〇(十)W ^ S 1别紫铋肊π 砩&lt;5 Ϋ Ϊ iw key S 众3制&lt;5 g | cd cd spider § ^ 6 tO w 砩o _s ^ i 三 The triacrylate obtained by adding an average of 3 moles of oxidized oxime to trimethylolpropane (A-TMPT-3EO, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) 2-light base·2- Methyl-1-phenyl·propan-1-yron (DAROCURE1173, manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd., product name) Symbol (Α-1) (A-2) (A-3) (A-4) (A -5) (Β-1) .237· 157266.doc 201222097 [Table B-3] [ Table 10] h/mm Front luminance unevenness Avl Av2 Manufacturing Example B-1 21 〇 - - Production Example B-2 21 〇 - - Production Example B-3 21 〇 - - Production Example B-4 21 〇 - - Manufacturing Example B-5 21 〇 - - Production example B-6 21 〇 - - Production example B-7 19 〇 47 47 Manufacturing example B-8 17 〇 47 29 Manufacturing example B-1 21 X - - Manufacturing example B-2 21 X - As shown in Table B-1, it is understood that the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-;1 to B-6 is a resin layer having a concave-convex structure on the light-emitting surface of the diffusion sheet, and the refractive index of the resin layer is 1.55 to 1.70. Further, the resin contains (A) an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group: 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (B) a photopolymerization initiator: 0.1 to 30% by mass of a photopolymerizable resin. In the cured product of the composition, the (A) addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group contains a compound having the structure represented by the above formula (I), so that the brightness unevenness reduction ability is good, and Shorten the distance between the light source and the optical sheet. In addition, it is generally difficult to obtain a diffusion sheet having a diffusion angle (FWHM) of 76° or more. However, when the photopolymerizable resin composition described above is used, the transfer rate may not be lowered due to hardening shrinkage, or A diffusion sheet which exhibits a good luminance unevenness reduction ability can be obtained by the fact that the diffusion sheet is obtained in the case where the hard material is too hard and is poor in 157266.doc -238 - 201222097. Further, in the diffusion sheet of Production Example 3-7, since the diffusion angle periodically changes in a specific direction in the plane of the diffusion sheet, the unevenness in luminance unevenness is further improved, and the reflection sheet (5^) 13 and the diffusion sheet (Dp can be further shortened). The distance h from the entrance surface of 14 is the distance between the light source and the optical sheet. Further, in the diffusion sheet of Production Example B_8, the arithmetic mean value (Αν 1) of the diffusion angle peak and the diffusion angle valley value is larger than the diffusion of all the measurement points distributed between the continuous diffusion angle peak value and the diffusion angle valley value. The arithmetic mean value of the angle (Αν2) 'Therefore, the brightness unevenness reduction ability is excellent, and the distance h between the reflection sheet (RS) 13 and the light incident surface of the diffusion plate (DP) 14 can be further shortened, that is, between the light source and the optical sheet. distance. &lt;Production Example C&gt; [Production Example C-1] A uniform light scattering process was performed on the incident surface of the mirror surface (the diameter of the diffusion particles and the binder was 〇8 mm to 1.3 mm). The divergence point is set at a distance of 2.55 mm x 1.5 mm in a mineral tooth configuration (triangular lattice shape) at the same distance from the end portion of the light incident surface, and the point between the area facing the LED and the opposite LED The diameter of the points in the area is the same (even point density is uniform)) Light guide plate model (material: polymethyl methacrylate, thickness: 3.0 mm, width: 500 mm, length: 1 〇〇 mm), arranged along the light surface The LEDs (light-emitting surface dimensions: 4.5 mm (width direction) x 2.5 mm (thickness direction), number of LEDs: 10) were arranged in such a manner that the pitch P was 27.5 mm, and a ray tracing simulation model of the surface light source device was produced. 157266.doc -239- 201222097 The same measurement model as the measurement and detection model of a two-dimensional color luminance meter represented by CA2000A manufactured by Konica Minolta, using Light Tools (〇ptical Research Associates) version 7.1, parallel to the entrance surface In the direction, the luminance distribution on the inner side (corresponding to P/G = 3.93) of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate when the LED is lit is 7 mm from the end side of the light-incident side. [Manufacturing Example C-2] In addition to the light scattering processing on the opposite surface, as shown in Fig. C19 (near the light incident surface (near the inner side of the light incident surface side by 7 mm (G = 7 mm)), pl = i 8.0 %, p2 = 45.0%) The light guide plate model was set to be the same as the manufacturing example C-1, and the luminance distribution of the distance from the light-emitting surface to the inner side of the light-surface side portion was 7 mm. [Manufacturing Example C-3] A groove structure having a surface distribution (average pitch: about 6 μm, average depth: about 4 μΐΠ) as shown in Fig. 2 was formed by using a transparent double-sided adhesive sheet in addition to the light-incident surface. In addition to the polyethylene terephthalate film having an average thickness of 125 μm, the light guide plate model was set to be the same as in Production Example C-1, and the brightness of the light surface from the inner side of the light-incident end side was calculated to be 7 mm. distributed.

[Manufacturing Example C-11J In addition to the light-incident surface, a groove structure having the surface distribution (average pitch: about 6 μηι, average depth: about 4 μ) shown in Fig. 2 was formed by using a transparent double-sided sheet and a sheet adhered thereto. The polyethylene terephthalate having an average thickness of 125 and the light scattering processing on the opposite side are as shown in Fig. C19 (near the light incident surface (near the inner side of the light incident side end portion 7 (G = 7 mm)) , Ρΐ = ΐ8·0%' p2=45 〇%) In the case of the light guide plate model, the light guide plate model is set to be the same as the production example C1. Doc •240· 201222097 Brightness distribution. The luminance distribution of the light-emitting surface of the surface light source devices of the manufacturing examples C-1 to C-3 and C-11 on the inner side of the light-surface side end portion 7 mm is shown in Fig. C20, and the standard deviation (SD value) thereof is shown. Figure C21 and Table C-1. Further, in Fig. C20, the vertical axis represents the brightness, and the horizontal axis represents the position on the light-emitting surface parallel to the direction of the light-incident surface. Further, in Fig. C21, the chain line indicates the SD value (0.2) which is tolerable for the image display device, and the dot-chain line indicates the sufficient SD value for the image display device (〇. 1). [Table C-1] [Table 11] Incoming light facing surface (light scattering processing) SD value mirror uniform point 0.810 Mirror surface corresponding to LED point 0.630 Groove structure uniform point 0.300 Groove structure corresponding to LED point 0.040 In the surface light source device of Production Example C-1, the luminance was not fixed, and a hot spot (maximum portion) appeared. In the surface light source devices of Production Examples C-2 and C-3, the uneven brightness was not eliminated. That is, in the production example C-2 in which the opposite surface is subjected to light scattering processing in which the light scattering degree of the region facing the light source is lower than the region of the portion between the light source and the light source, The brightness of the portion facing the LED can be suppressed, but the brightness of the portion between the LEDs is not improved. On the other hand, in the manufacturing example C-3 in which the grooved structure was formed on the light incident surface of the light guide plate, the brightness of the portion between the LEDs was suppressed to a certain extent. 157266.doc • 241 201222097 degree 'improved between the LEDs The brightness of the part is not sufficient. On the other hand, in the surface light source device of Production Example C-11, the brightness was substantially fixed regardless of the position, and no hot spot occurred. In addition, in order to achieve a narrow frame display device that is currently becoming a popular trend, it is necessary to set G (horizontal distance between the entrance surface and the display area) = about 7 mm, but the surface light source device of the manufacturing example C-11 (P = In 27.5 mm), the sd value of the brightness of the light-emitting surface on the inner side of the light-incident side end portion of 7 mm is very low (〇4). Accordingly, it is considered that the light incident surface of the light guide plate includes an opening or a bottom surface having a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface, and the light emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or In a surface light source device configured to light-scatter the light scattering degree of a region facing the light source to a light scattering degree in a region opposite to a portion between the light source and the light source, in the vicinity of the light incident surface on the opposite surface, That is, it is convenient to expand the arrangement pitch of the ED to about 30 mm under the condition of G=7, that is, even if P/G>4 is obtained, at least for the SD which is acceptable for the image display device, Value (0.2). [Reference experiment Cl; | Study the most suitable value for the overlap of light scattering processing and frame. The commercially available LED TV (bravia manufactured by SONY Co., Ltd.) takes out the surface light source device unit (including the frame in which the opening starts from the position corresponding to the inner side of the light-incident end of the light guide plate by 8 mm). The light plate is replaced by a mirror surface, and the light is scattered on the opposite side from the side of the side of the human light side by 2 mm, 6 melons or (7) mm (the diffusion particles of diameter 〇8 1 ·3 mm are included) The circular diffusing point of the adhesive is uniformly arranged (with a uniform dot density) in a zigzag configuration of 157266.doc -242· 201222097 from 2.55 mmxl.5 mm (ie, frame and light scattering processing) The overlap is 6111111, 2 mm or -2 mm (without overlap), or the grooved structure is provided on the light incident surface in the same manner as the manufacturing example cu, and the opposite surface is 2 mm from the end side of the light incident surface side. For those who have light scattering processing at 6 mm or 1 mm, the in-plane average brightness of the light-emitting area is measured. Fig. C22 shows the value obtained by dividing the in-plane average luminance of the light-emitting region of the surface light source device by the input power (the value obtained by correcting the luminance efficiency and the input power). As can be seen from Fig. C22, if the light scattering processing does not overlap with the frame, the in-plane average brightness is lowered. On the other hand, if the overlap is too large, the in-plane average brightness is also lowered, so the overlap is preferably about 2 mm. [Reference Experiment C2] The ray tracing simulation model I of the same surface light source device as that of Manufacturing Example C-11, and the simulation model 2 and the simulation model 3 in which the arrangement pitch p of the LEDs were changed to 22·5 mm &amp; 25 mm were prepared. 〇 Use these simulation models 丨~3, using Light T〇〇ls (〇pticai

Research ASSOCiates) version, calculating the positive light source near the light entrance surface with the value of the light distribution surface of the light guide plate at a distance of 7 mm from the end of the light side (G = 7 mm) The combination of the dot density pi of the light-scattering pattern of the region and the dot density port 2 of the light-scattering pattern of the region between the light source and the light source in the vicinity of the light-incident surface obtains the results as described below. P2/pl is set to the vertical axis, and p/G is set to the horizontal axis to plot the result. The result is I57266.doc •243- 201222097 which is linear as shown in Fig. 23 (卩2/?1 = 1.4&gt;&lt;;(?/〇)-3.0). Therefore, by adjusting pi and p2 in such a manner that p2/pl satisfies the following relationship, the light distribution without uneven brightness can be realized under the desired P/G. 2.9^ 1.4x(P/G)-p2/pl ^ 3.1 [Table C-2] [Table 12] Point density SD value G/mm P/mm P/G pi P2 p2/pl (all 0.2 or less, qualified Level) 7 22.5 3.214285714 22.0% 33.0% 1.5 0.0140 7 25 3.571428571 20.0% 39.0% 1.95 0.0200 7 27.5 3.928571429 18.0% 45.0% 2.5 0.0400 [Standard Reference Example C] The arrangement pitch P from the LED is 10·5 mm, the light guide plate ( Material: Polyethylene acrylate A, thickness: 4 mm) Commercially available LED TV with a horizontal distance G between the light-incident surface and the display area of 16.5 mm (P/G = 0.64) (BRAVIA manufactured by SONY Co., Ltd.) In the KDL-32EX700), only the surface light source device unit was taken out, and the LEDs were reconfigured so that the arrangement pitch of the LEDs became about 42 mm (P/G = 2.55), and the two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA-2000) manufactured by Konica Minolta was used for measurement. The light-emitting surface of the light guide plate is located on the inner side of the light-incident-side end portion 1 6 · 5 mm (corresponding to the beginning of the display region) and further apart from the inner side of 10 mm (the inner side of the light-incident-side end portion is 26.5 mm) Brightness. [Production Example C-21] In the surface light source device described above, a transparent double-sided back sheet (CS9621T manufactured by Jidong Electric Co., Ltd.) was attached to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, and 157266.doc •244-201222097 was formed. The polyethylene tert-butyl phthalate film having a groove structure of the present invention and having an average thickness of 125 μm was measured for the luminance at a position where the light surface was located inside the end portion 26 5 of the light surface side. Further, the trench structure is made by the speckle pattern exposure having the surface distribution shown in Fig. 2, and the average pitch is about 6 μm, and the average depth is about 4 μΓ. [Production Examples C-31 to C-33] In the above-described surface light source device, the light guide plate was replaced with the following, and the brightness of the light surface at a position inside the light-incident side end portion of 26.5 mm was measured. Further, any of the light guide plates is similar to the light guide plate of Production Example C-21, and is attached to the light incident surface of the light guide plate of the standard reference example. A double-sided adhesive sheet is used to form a specific fine structure and an average thickness. It is made of a 125 μηη polyethylene terephthalate film. Production Example C-31: Light guide plate having a apex angle of 9 〇 (pitch: about 50 μm) Production Example C-3 2 . The illuminating surface has a lenticular lens (pitch: about 12 〇) Light guide plate manufacturing example C-33: The light incident surface has a apex angle of R (the pitch: about 5 〇μιτ〇 of the light guide plate will use the brightness of the surface light source device of the light guide plate of the manufacturing example and the standard reference example C) The variation is shown in Fig. C3-13. In Fig. C3-13, the vertical axis indicates the brightness of the position of the light surface from the inner side of the light-incident end portion of 26.5 mm, and the horizontal axis indicates the position of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate. In the surface light source device of the manufacturing example C-21, the brightness is substantially fixed regardless of the brightness of the portion. In contrast, the commercially available television is used 157266.doc -245. 201222097 Light guide plate (standard reference example) c), or equivalent to the light guide plate of the light guide plate disclosed in the prior art document (manufacturing examples C-31 to C-33), the brightness is not fixed, hot spots (maximum portions) appear, and brightness unevenness cannot be eliminated. Production Examples The following manufacturing examples D1D-17, D-42, and D-43 are made by the light guide plate. The smooth surface is manufactured by using a transparent double-sided back sheet (manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd.) to adhere a substrate comprising the following polyethylene terephthalate film, that is, the polyethylene terephthalate film is formed to have Fig. 2404) The ultraviolet-curable resin layer of the longitudinally or isotropic recessed portion of the surface shape of Fig. 2404. The diffusion angle of the film of Fig. 24 (A to J), the average pitch of the depressed portions, the average depth of the depressed portion, and the substrate The thickness is shown in the following Table Dd. [Table D-1] [Table 13] FWHM (Horizontal 纵 Vertical) Average pitch (: μιη &gt; Average depth (μχη) Substrate thickness (μιη) A 47x4 7.3 2.5 250 B 63x1 5.4 3.6 100 C 83x3 6.6 3.4 125 D 92x50 3.6 3.1 250 E 58x1 5.9 1.4 250 F 65x7 2.8 0.75 250 G 57x3 10.7 4.1 75 Η 3〇χ1 5.2 ~ 1.2 250 I 34x34 12.2 2.3 250 J 52x51 6.3 3 250 [Reference Example 1] Since the arrangement pitch P of the LED is 10.5 mm, the horizontal distance G between the light entrance surface and the display area of the light guide plate (material: polyfluorene 157266.doc -246-201222097 bismuth citrate, thickness: 4 mm) is 16.5. Commercially available LED TV with mm (P/G = 0.64) (BRAVIA KDL manufactured by SONY Co., Ltd.) In _32EX700), only the surface light source device unit is taken out, and the LEDs are reconfigured so that the arrangement pitch P of the LEDs becomes about 21 mm. A diffuser (a carrier of BRAVIA KDL-32EX700 manufactured by SONY Co., Ltd.) was placed on the light-emitting side of the light guide plate, and a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA-2000) manufactured by Konica Minolta was placed on the normal side of the light-emitting surface. 0 The position of the upward distance is 1 m, and the brightness of the smooth surface is measured. [Evaluation of Luminance Unevenness Resilience] From the luminance data of the light-emitting surface measured by a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA-2000), the distance G between the light surface and the light-incident end side is extracted as 20 mm, 25 Mm, 30 mm, 35 mm and 40 mm (positions 20 mm, 25 mm, 30 mm, 35 mm and 40 mm from the side of the entrance side) are parallel to the entrance surface (Fig. 9 ( A) The brightness distribution of the direction). In order to eliminate the luminance gradient irrelevant to the hot spot from the above-described respective luminance distributions L(X) (X-axis: Q distance parallel to the incident surface, Y-axis: luminance L), the distance P between the LEDs is determined ( At this time, the average value of the range of about 21 mm) is used to obtain the smoothed value (moving average value), [number 2]. )only. The standard deviation value (S.D. value) obtained by dividing the luminance distribution by the moving average of the luminance distribution is obtained as an index of the luminance unevenness of the LED, that is, the heat 157266.doc -247 - 201222097 point. 40 mm) taken from χ P/G (P=21 mm, g=20, 25, 30, 35 axes, the above standard deviation value (intensity unevenness refers to #) is taken from the drawing. D17. [Evaluation of the degree of arrival] In the brightness data of the light-emitting surface measured by the one-dimensional color exemption meter (_2), the brightness of the light propagation direction (direction (B) of Fig. 9) is eliminated. The brightness of the distributed hotspot is uneven, and the above-mentioned L in the range of ± i · 5 Ρ (Ρ is the LED pitch) from the LED in the center of the evaluation range in the direction parallel to the light incident surface (direction A in Fig. 9) is calculated. (The average value of (X) is taken), the distance perpendicular to the direction of the light incident surface (direction 6 in Fig. 9) is taken from the χι axis, and τ(χ,) is plotted on the γ axis (Fig. 16). In the distribution, the range of the light guide plate to the inner side of the human light surface of 16.5 mm (χ=〇~16 5 melon ♦ is used to fix the shielding plate of the light guide plate, so the brightness of the range is zero. Then, the extraction is performed The range of X = 16.5 mm to 39 〇 mm of the twist distribution. [Manufacturing Example D-1] In the surface light source device of Reference Example 1, transparent side surfaces were used on the light incident surface of the light guide plate. The sheet (pD_s manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd.) was bonded to a polyethylene terephthalate film having a groove structure of a thickness of 25 Å having an average thickness of 25 Å, and the light surface and the light-incident surface were measured in the same manner as the reference m. In the parallel direction, the luminance distribution is determined to be uneven in brightness. Further, the groove structure is formed by exposing the speckle pattern to have a surface distribution of FIG. 24(A), and the average pitch is about 7.3 μηι, and the average depth is about In addition, when the film was used alone, the diffusion angle (FWHM) of 157266.doc -248·201222097 was 47 when using gc_5〇〇〇l, and it was 47. &lt;4. In addition, the same as the reference example Ground, the range from X=16.5 to 390 mm is extracted from the luminance distribution in the direction of propagation of light, and the ratio of the luminance value to the reference example 1 is obtained for each measurement point included in the range (using each measurement point) The value of the twist is divided by the value of the brightness value of the same position (χ) of the reference example, and the minimum value (ΜΙΝ) and the maximum value (ΜΑχ) are described in Table 〇_2. [Manufacturing Example D-2 In addition to the surface light source device of Reference Example 1, the light entering the light guide plate Ο A transparent double-sided back sheet (PD_S1 manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd.) is adhered to a polyethylene terephthalate film having a groove structure to be described later and having an average thickness of 1 Å, and a reference example In the same manner, the luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light incident surface of the light surface was measured, and luminance unevenness was obtained. Further, in the same manner as in Reference Example 1, the luminance distribution in the light propagation direction (direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured, and In the same manner as in Production Example D-], the values of the river claw and MAX were obtained. μ Further, the groove structure was a surface distribution having a pattern of 24 (Β) produced by exposure of a speckle pattern, and the average pitch was about 5.4 μηη, with an average depth of approximately 3.6 μΙη. Further, the FWHM at the time of measurement using GC5〇〇〇l in the state of the film alone was 630xl. . [Reference Example 2] The luminance unevenness suppression ability and the degree of arrival were evaluated in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the arrangement pitch ρ of the LEDs was set to be about 31 5 mm. , / ?, 1 [Manufacturing Example D-3] In addition to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, it is used in accordance with the manufacturing example D-1 J &lt; also bis double 157266.doc • 249 · 201222097 Production Example D_] A polyethylene terephthalate film having the same groove structure and an average thickness of 250 μm was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 2, and the luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light incident surface was measured. Uneven brightness. In addition, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 2, and the ΜΙΝ and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except for Reference Example 2. value. [Production Example D-4] A transparent double-sided back sheet similar to that of Production Example D_2 was used, except for the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, and a groove having the same groove structure as that of Production Example D_2 and having an average thickness of 100 μm was adhered. In the same manner as in Reference Example 2, except for the ethylene terephthalate film, the luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light incident surface was measured, and luminance unevenness was determined. In the same manner as in Reference Example 2, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured, and the measurement was performed in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except that the reference example 2 was used as a reference. The value with MAX. [Reference Example 3] The luminance unevenness suppression ability and the degree of arrival were evaluated in the same manner as in Reference Example 1 except that the arrangement pitch p of the LEDs was set to be about 42 mm. [Manufacturing Example D-5] In addition to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, a transparent double-sided back sheet which was the same as in the production example was used, and a groove structure having the same groove structure as that of the manufacturing example D_丨 and having an average thickness of 250 μm was formed. In the same manner as in Reference Example 3, except for the ethylene terephthalate film, the luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light incident surface was measured, and 157266.doc -250·201222097 was used to determine the luminance unevenness. In addition, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and the MIN and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D·1 except for Reference Example 3. value. [Production Example D-6] In addition to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, the same transparent grooved structure as that of Production Example D-2 was formed by using the same transparent double-sided back sheet as in Production Example D-2, and the average thickness was 100 μΓ. In the same manner as in Reference Example 3 except for the polyethylene terephthalate film, the luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the human light surface was measured, and luminance unevenness was determined. In addition, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and the ΜΙΝ and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except for Reference Example 3. value. The luminance unevenness (S.D. value) of Production Examples D-1 to D_6 was taken from the Y-axis, and the P/G obtained from the X-axis was shown in Figures D17A-D17F. Further, the evaluation results of the degree of arrival (MIN, MAX) are summarized in Table 2. 〇 Figure 017: Person, D17B, and D17C compare the conditions other than the shape of the light incident surface (the LED pitch P of the surface light source device), and compare the performance difference of each light guide plate. It can be confirmed from any of the drawings that the luminance unevenness of Production Examples D-1 to D-6 is smaller than that of the reference example. Further, in the case where the P/G is small as shown in Figs. D17A and D17B, there is a difference between the reference example and the manufacturing example, but the manufacturing examples are almost indistinguishable from each other. (In addition, when ρ/G is 1 or less, the luminance unevenness is originally small. Therefore, the difference between the manufacturing example and the reference example is small. On the other hand, it can be seen that the Ρ/G is higher as shown in Fig. D17C. In the region, the performance of the manufacturing example D-6 (Fig. 157266.doc *251-201222097 24(B) surface shape (the diffusion angle in the longitudinal direction is 63°)) is superior to the manufacturing example D-5 (Fig. 24 (A) The surface shape (the diffusion angle in the longitudinal direction is 47°)). In addition, in the cases of D17D, D17E, and D17F, the same light guide plate is used, and the case where the LED pitch P is changed is compared. As can be seen from the above figures, in the light guide plate of Production Example D, even if the arrangement pitch P of the LEDs is changed, the same performance (brightness unevenness reduction performance) can be obtained as long as the P/G is the same value. [Table D-2] [Table 14] P (mm) MAX MIN FWHM Average pitch (μηι) Average depth (μιη) Manufacturing Example D-1 21 137% 83% 47x4 7.3 2.5 Manufacturing Example D-2 21 142% 81% 63χ1 5.4 3.6 Manufacturing Example D-3 31.5 132% 88% 47x4 7.3 2.5 Manufacturing Example D-4 31.5 126% 84% 63χ1 5.4 3.6 Manufacturing Example D-5 42 125% 88% 47χ4 7.3 2.5 Manufacturing Example D-6 42 128% 87% 63χ1 5.4 3.6 When the degree of arrival (MAX, MIN) was observed, it was found that the films of Production Examples 0-1, D-3, and D-5 had a preferable tendency as a whole. In the following production examples, the same LED arrangement as in Reference Example 3 was used, and luminance unevenness and degree of arrival were evaluated in the same manner as in Reference Example 3. [Production Examples D-7 to D-11] Prepared on a polyethylene terephthalate film having an average thickness of 125 μm, formed at an angle of -10° and -5° with the thickness direction of the light guide plate. , a film of longitudinal grooves of 0°, 5° or 10°. In the same manner as in Reference Example 3, except that a transparent double-sided back sheet (PD-S1 manufactured by Panac 157266.doc-252 = 201222097 Co., Ltd.) was used, the film was adhered to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate. The luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light incident surface is used to determine the luminance unevenness. In the same manner as in Reference Example 3, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured, and the MIN and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except that the reference example 3 was used as a reference. The value. Further, the groove structure is a surface distribution of Fig. 24(C) which is produced by exposure of a speckle pattern, and has an average pitch of about 6.6 μηη and an average depth of about 3.4 3.4 μηη. Further, the FWHM measured by using GC-5000L in a state where the film was alone was 830 x 30. The inhibition capacities of Production Examples D-7 to D-11 are shown in Fig. D18, and the degree of arrival (MIN, MAX) is shown in Table D-3. [Table D-3] [Table 15] Vertical groove shift MAX MIN Manufacturing Example D-7 10° 127% 81% Manufacturing Example D-8 5° 125% 82% Manufacturing Example D-9 0° 132% 83 % Manufacturing example D-10 -5° 131% 83% Manufacturing example D-11 -10° 127% 82% Although the direction of the longitudinal groove varies within the range of -1〇°~1〇°, the brightness unevenness is suppressed. Capabilities (Figure D18) and reach (Table D-3) did not show significant changes. [Production Examples D-12 to D-15, Production Examples D-121 to D-15*] 157266.doc -253 - 201222097 except that the same film as the film having the groove structure of Production Example D-1 was cut into The width distribution of the light surface is parallel to the light incident surface in the same manner as in Reference Example 3 except that the width is 4 mm and the gap (joint) of 0 to 1 · 5 mm is vacated and adhered to the light incident surface. Find uneven brightness. In addition, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and the MIN and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except for Reference Example 3. value. At this time, it is prepared that the gap (seam) between the respective films is not located on the LED light-emitting surface (the opposite portion) (manufacturing example D-12 to D-15), and the LED-emitting surface of the LED (manufacturing example D-) 12'~D-15') 2 species. The luminance unevenness suppression capabilities of Production Examples D-12 to D-15 and Production Examples D-12 and D-15' are shown in FIGS. D19 and D20, respectively, and the degree of arrival (MIN, MAX) is shown in Table D-4. in. In addition, the film in which the grooved structure was formed was not cut (no gap was left) and adhered (corresponding to Production Example D-6) as Reference Example 4. [Table D-4] [Table 16] Position of the gap gap MAX MAX Reference Example 4 None - 126% 84% Manufacturing Example D-12' Illumination surface 0 mm 122% 84% Manufacturing example D-13' Luminous surface Upper 0.5 mm 121% 83% Manufacturing Example D-14, 1 mm 119% on the illuminating surface 85% Manufacturing Example D-15' Luminous surface 1.5 mm 121% 86% Manufacturing Example D-12 0 mm between LEDs 130% 85 % Manufacturing Example D-13 0.5 mm between LEDs 119% 83% Manufacturing Example D-14 1 mm between LEDs 121% 83% Manufacturing Example D-15 1.5 mm between LEDs 118% 83% 157266.doc -254- 201222097 The degree of arrival (Table D-4) did not differ greatly due to the presence or absence of the gap (seam) and the position. On the other hand, regarding uneven brightness, when there is a gap (seam) on the LED light-emitting surface, the brightness unevenness rises remarkably (Fig. D19), but the gap (seam) is formed between the LED light-emitting surfaces in terms of performance. No problem (Figure D2〇). [Manufacturing Example EM6, D-17] In addition to the light-incident surface of the light guide plate, the transparent double-sided back sheet which was the same as the manufacturing example D-j was adhered to a diffusion angle (FWHM) of 83 〇χ 3, respectively. (Surface shape Fig. 24C) A polyethylene terephthalate film having an average thickness of 125 μm and a diffusion angle (FWHM) of 92. &gt;&lt;50. (surface shape: FIG. 24D), except for the polyethylene terephthalate film having an average thickness of 250 μm, the luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light-incident surface of the smooth surface was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and unevenness in luminance was obtained. . In addition, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and ΜΙΝ and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except for Reference Example 3. value. [Manufacturing Example D-35, D-36] Ο The surface shape was rotated by 90. (i.e., in which the depressed portion was formed to be horizontally long), luminance unevenness, Mm, and MAX were measured in the same manner as in Production Example D-16 or D-17. The results are shown in Figure D21 and Table D-5. [Table D-5] 157266.doc -255 - 201222097 [Table 17] Direction of the depressed portion MAX MIN FWHM Average pitch (μιη) Average depth (μπι) Manufacturing Example D-16 Vertical 120% 82% 83x3 6.6 3.4 Manufacturing Example D -35 Cross 195% 83% 3x83 6.6 3.4 Manufacturing Example D-17 Vertical 168% 73% 92x50 3.6 3.1 Manufacturing Example D-36 Horizontal 191% 72% 5〇χ92 3.6 3.1 The shape of the depressed portion is formed into a horizontally uneven brightness The inhibition was reduced (Figure D21) and the degree of arrival (Table D-5) also deteriorated. [Production Example D-37 to D-40] The luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the light-incident surface of the smooth surface was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3 except that the light guide plate was replaced with the following, and luminance unevenness was obtained. In addition, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and the MIN and MAX were obtained in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except for Reference Example 3. value. Further, in any of the light guide plates, in the same manner as the light guide plates of Production Examples D-1 to D-6, the transparent double-sided back sheet was used by the light-incident surface of the light guide plate of Reference Example 3 (PD manufactured by Panac Corporation) -S1) It was produced by adhering a polyethylene terephthalate film having a specific fine structure and an average thickness of 250 μm (manufacturing Example D-38 was 400 μm). Production Example D-37: A hemisphere having a radius of 30 μm is randomly arranged at an average pitch of 70.6 μm on the light incident surface. Production Example D-38: A vertices angle of 90 degrees was arranged periodically (lattice) at a pitch of about 60 μm on the light incident surface. Production Example D-39: Periodically placed on the light-incident surface with a pitch of about 50 μm (grid) 157266.doc • 256-201222097. Production Example D-40: A lenticular lens was periodically disposed at a pitch of about 1 50 μm on the light incident surface. The results are shown in Figure D22 and Table D-6. Further, in the case of FIG. D22 and Table D-6, the production example D-6 is also described (the surface distribution is formed on the light-incident surface: FIG. 24(B), the average pitch: about 5.4 μm, and the average depth: about 3.6. The data of the production example of the polyethylene terephthalate film of the groove structure of μιη is compared for comparison. [Table D-6] [Table 18] MAX MIN Remarks Average Spacing (μιη) Manufacturing Example D-37 170% 75% Hemisphere with a radius of 30 μη 70.6 Manufacturing Example D-38 139% 69% The apex angle is 90 degrees Mirror 60 Production Example D-39 129% 72% apex angle R 制造 50 Production Example D-40 139% 72% Lentil lens 150 Manufacturing Example D-6 128% 87% Average height 3.6 μιη 5.4 Manufacturing Example D- The degree of arrival was poor in 37, and the inhibition ability was low in Production Examples D-38, D-39, and D-40. [Production Examples D-19 to D-23], [Production Examples D-42, D-43] The light-emitting surface was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3 except that the light guide plate was replaced with the following surface shape. The luminance distribution in the direction parallel to the plane is used to determine the unevenness in luminance. Production Example D-19: Fig. 24(E) Production Example D-20: Fig. 24 (Α) (corresponding to Production Example D·5) 157266.doc • 257-201222097 Manufacturing Example D-21: Fig. 24(G) Manufacture Example D-22: Fig. 24(F) Production Example D-23: Fig. 24(H) Production Example D-42: Fig. 24 (1) (formed with a depressed portion which is not elongated and is isotropic) Manufacturing Example D-43: Fig. 24 (J) (formed as a depressed portion which is not is long and is isotropic). For the luminance unevenness measured as described above, 0.020 or less is evaluated as 〇, and greater than 0.020 and less than 0.05 is evaluated as A. , 0.050 or more is evaluated as X, and the longitudinal FWHM (FWHM in the thickness direction of the light guide plate (perpendicular to the plane of the light-emitting surface) can be calculated from the transmitted light intensity profile in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the vertical groove) The axis is plotted with the horizontal FWHM (FWHM in the width direction of the light guide plate (parallel to the plane of the light exit surface) as the vertical axis. The results are shown in Figure D23. Regarding the luminance unevenness suppressing ability (Fig. D23), it is preferable that the horizontal FWHM is 60 or more. Further, in the light guide plates of Production Examples D-19-D-22, D-42, and D-43, the luminance distribution of the light propagation direction (the direction perpendicular to the light incident surface) was measured in the same manner as in Reference Example 3, and The values of MIN and MAX were determined in the same manner as in Production Example D-1 except for Reference Example 3, and the results are shown in Table D-7. !57266,doc -258- 201222097 [Table D-7] [Table 19] MAX MIN FWHM Average pitch (μιη) Average depth (μιη) Manufacturing example D-42 138% 87% 34x34 12.2 I. 2.3 Manufacturing example D-43 155% 77% 51x51 6.3 3 Manufacturing Example D-19 127% 83% 58x1 5.9 1.4 Manufacturing Example D-20 125% 88% 47x4 7.3 2.5 Manufacturing Example D-21 122% 82% 57x3 10.7 4.1 Manufacturing Example D-22 127% 84% 65x7 2.8 0.75 Manufacturing Example D-23 124% 86% 3〇xl 5.2 1.2 If the degree of arrival (Table D-7) is considered, the manufacturing example D-17 is not considered to be the most suitable shape. &lt;Production Example E&gt; [Production Example E-1A] A PMMA light guide plate (a plate having a width of 40 mm, a length of 7 mm, and a thickness of 4 mm) used in a liquid crystal television BRAVIA 32EX700 manufactured by SONY as a substrate was prepared. Acrylic Q-based adhesive (G' = 77,000 Pa (G〇'&lt;18,000 Pa)) film laminated on a release paper as an adhesive layer (PD-S1 manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., adhesive family thickness: 25 μπι 'TG/DTA (weight reduction rate) at 100C: -〇.〇6%) 'and as a light diffusion layer for transparent base film containing polyethylene terephthalate with a thickness of 125 (Toyobo Co., Ltd.) On the layer of the company's A4300), a multilayer film comprising a layer of an ultraviolet curable resin having a groove structure having a diffusion angle of 60 degrees X 1 is provided. Then, it is prepared to cut the adhesive layer and the light-diffusing layer into the length direction of the substrate 157266.doc • 259-201222097. The size of the side is two (for the light diffusion layer, the diffusion angle is 60 degrees). In the longitudinal direction of the substrate, the light-receiving portion (light-incident surface) is formed by sequentially bonding the adhesive layer and the light-diffusing layer on both side surfaces in the longitudinal direction of the substrate to form a light guide plate. Specifically, the first adhesive layer is temporarily bonded to the side of the substrate by contacting the adhesive with the substrate, and then the roller is pressed from the side of the material toward the other end. , squeeze out the bubbles. Thereafter, the release paper of the adhesive film is peeled off, and the light diffusion layer is temporarily bonded to the surface on the opposite side to the surface having the uneven structure, and the roll is applied from the side surface of the substrate from the uneven structure. - The ends are pressed toward the other end and they are attached. A ruthenium diffusion sheet (TDF187 manufactured by Toray Saehan Co., Ltd.) is laminated on one main surface of the light guide plate fabricated as described above, and 18 (each of the light incident surfaces are respectively 9) LEDs are arranged at intervals along the entrance surface. The surface light source device was fabricated by arranging the claws (7) substantially evenly (the distance between the LED and the light incident surface: 〇 8 mm). Point 7C LED, using a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA-2000) manufactured by Konica Minolta. 'Measure the length of the light guide plate on the inner side of the light-emitting surface on the diffusion sheet laminated on the light guide plate. The το degree of the position. The obtained luminance distribution is shown in Fig. Ei7. [Production Example E-1B] An adhesive tape of 4 mm square was used, and only the both ends of the light diffusion layer were fixed and laminated on both side faces in the longitudinal direction of the substrate, except that the adhesive layer was not used, and the production example E-1A was used. In the same manner, a surface light source device was produced, and the luminance distribution on the inner side of the smooth side end portion of 157266.doc • 260·201222097 was measured. The resulting luminance distribution is shown in Fig. E18. In the surface light source device of Production Example E-1A in which the light diffusion layer was fixed to the substrate via the adhesive layer, the luminance was substantially fixed along the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate, but the surface light source of Production Example E-1B without the adhesive layer was used. In the device, the brightness unevenness in the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate is severe. [Manufacturing Example E-2A] Ο

Prepared as a substrate, a sheet containing a PMMA LX N865 manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. and having a width of 30 mm, a length of 250 mm, and a thickness of 4 mm, as an adhesive layer of an acrylic adhesive laminated on a release paper (G'=77,000 Pa(G〇'=18,000 Pa)) film (PD-S1 manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., adhesive film thickness: 25 μm, peel strength: 0.75 N/mm), and polydiphenylene as a light diffusion layer A multilayer film comprising a layer of an ultraviolet curable resin having a fine uneven structure on its surface was provided on a layer of a transparent base film (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd. Α 4300) having a thickness of 125 μm. Then, the adhesive layer and the light-diffusing layer are cut into the size of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the substrate, and the light-receiving portion is formed by sequentially bonding the adhesive layer and the light-diffusing layer to one side surface of the substrate in the longitudinal direction. A light guiding member is fabricated. Specifically, first, the adhesive film is temporarily bonded to the side surface of the substrate in such a manner that the adhesive is in contact with the substrate, and thereafter, the ton is squeezed from the one end of the substrate toward the other end from the release paper. Gas, bubble' Then, the release paper of the adhesive film is peeled off, and the light diffusion layer is temporarily bonded to the surface of the light diffusion layer on the opposite side to the surface having the uneven structure, and the roller is self-adhesively knotted 157266.doc -261· 201222097 The structure is pressed from one end of the side of the substrate toward the other end, and the other is bonded. [Production Example E-2B] A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example Ε-2 except that the thickness of the transparent base film layer of the light diffusion layer was changed to 250 μm. [Production Example E-2C] A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example Ε-2, except that the thickness of the substrate was changed to 3.5 mm. [Production Example E-2D] A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example E-2C except that the thickness of the transparent base film layer of the light diffusion layer was changed to 250 μm. [Manufacturing Example Ε-2Ε] In addition to changing the adhesive layer to an acrylic adhesive (G'=84,0〇〇pa(G(/ = 19,800 Pa)) film laminated on the release paper (Fussen Industrial Co., Ltd.) Manufactured TR-1801A, adhesive film thickness: 25 μιη, 100. (: TG/DTA (weight reduction rate): -0.05%, peel strength: 0,63 N/mm) -2 A A light guide plate was produced in the same manner. [Production Example E-2F] The adhesive layer was changed to an acrylic adhesive laminated on a release paper (G' = 68,0〇〇pa (G〇, = 16,900 Pa) A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example Ε-2Α except for a film (CCL/D1/T3T3 manufactured by New Tac Kasei Co., Ltd., adhesive film thickness: 25 μm, peel strength: 0.61 N/mm). Production Example E-2G] In addition to changing the adhesive layer to an acrylic adhesive 157266.doc -262-201222097 (G'=44,000 Pa (G'〇=l〇, 700 Pa)) film laminated on the release paper (Toyo Ink) A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example Ε-2 以外 except for EXC10-076 manufactured by Co., Ltd., adhesive film thickness: 50 μm. [Production Example E-2H] Changed to a film containing an acrylic adhesive (G' = 160,000 Pa (G〇, = 44,600 Pa)) laminated on release paper (MO-3006C manufactured by Lintec Co., Ltd., adhesive film thickness: 25 μm, 100°) A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example E_2A except for TG/DTA (weight reduction ratio) at C: _ 〇〇 9%. [Production Example E-2I] The adhesive layer was changed to include a laminate layer. Film of acrylic adhesive (G-30,000 pa (G0'=6, l〇〇pa)) on release paper (MO-3012C manufactured by Lintec Co., Ltd.) Adhesive film thickness: 25 μιη, i〇 (rc A light guide plate was produced in the same manner as in Production Example 2 except for TG/DTA (weight reduction rate): _〇" 〇%). In the light guide plates of Production Examples E-2A to E_2I, the light diffusion layer was firmly After being fixed on the substrate, the light guide plate was allowed to stand under the following conditions a to d, and the occurrence of peeling between the substrate and the adhesive layer and between the adhesive layer and the light diffusion layer was visually observed, and according to the following Benchmarking. (Condition) a. Allow to stand at 90 ° C, 30% RH for 25 〇 b. at ioo °c, Allow to stand under dry conditions for 12 hours c. Allow to stand at 100 ° C, dry for 1 hour. d. Allow to stand at 85 ° C, dry for 24 hours. 157266.doc 201222097 (evaluation basis) ◎ : No peeling at all 0: peeling did not reach 1% of the area of the joint △ • Peeling was 1% or more of the area of the joint and less than 30% X • Peeling was 3 % or more of the area of the joint. The results are shown in Table E1-1. The light guide plate of the production examples E-2A to E-2H of the adhesive layer containing G, = 40,000 to 180,000 Pa in the subsequent layer was placed at a high temperature (hyper wetness) for a long time, and the light diffusion layer was not peeled off much. 157266.doc -264- 201222097

o(N^][1-13啭] 157266.doc Production example E-2I inch MO-3012C (manufactured by Lintec) 30,000 I (S ΡΕΤ(Toyobo 4300) 1 1 1 X Manufacturing example E - 2H inch MO -3006C (manufactured by Lintec) 160,000 I (N &lt;1 &lt;1 1 ο Manufacturing Example E-2G Inch EXC10-076 (manufactured by Toyo Ink) 〇〇1 (N 1 1 1 &lt; Manufacturing Example E-2F inch 〇〇*53 〇〇ocT Η Ό Ο CA ITi cs 1—&lt; 1 〇〇 Manufacturing Example E-2E Inch TR-1801A (Manufactured by Fujimori Industrial (10)) 84,000 ν〇Ο CN 〇〇〇 Manufacturing Example E -2D Panaclean PD-S1 (manufactured by Panac) ο ο οο 〇in cs 〇1 1 t Production example E-2C ... rn (N T-^ ◎ ◎ ◎ I Production example E-2B 〇«Ο cs 〇 1 1 1 Manufacturing Example E-2A Inch ^Ti (N ◎ 1 1 1 Material (PMMA) Thickness (mm) Material G' (Pa) Peel Strength (N/mm) Thickness (μηι) Transparent Base Film Thickness (μιη) Test a 90°C30% RH 250 hours test bl00°c 12 hours test cl00°c 1000 hours test d85°C 24 hours brickwork 噢-265 · 201222097 [Production Example E-3A] Prepared as a substrate containing Mitsubishi Rayon Manufacturing company A PMMALXN865 plate with a width of 30 mm, a length of 25 mm, and a thickness of 3.5 mm, as an adhesive layer of an acrylic adhesive (G' = 77,000 Pa (G〇' = 18,000 Pa)) laminated on a release paper (Panac shares limited) The company manufactures PD-S1, adhesive film thickness: 25 μηι), and a transparent base film containing polyethylene terephthalate and a thickness of 125 μm as a light diffusion layer (made by Toyobo Co., Ltd. Α43 00) a layered film comprising a layer of an ultraviolet curable resin having a groove structure having a diffusion angle of 60 degrees X 1 degree on the layer. Then, on the opposite side of the surface of the light diffusion layer having the uneven structure, The laminated body is formed by laminating the adhesive layer using a bonding machine, and the laminated body is cut into the size of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the substrate, and then the release paper of the adhesive layer is peeled off, and the film is attached in the order of the adhesive layer and the light diffusion layer. The light incident portion is formed by one side surface in the longitudinal direction of the substrate to form a light guide plate. One diffusion sheet (TDF187 manufactured by Toray Saehan Co., Ltd.) was laminated on one main surface of the light guide plate fabricated as above, and 18 (9 for each light incident surface) LEDs were arranged at intervals along the entrance surface. The surface light source device was fabricated by arranging it approximately evenly in a manner of 26 mm (the distance between the LED and the light incident surface: 0.8 mm). Then, the LED is lit, and in the range of X=1 0~20 mm, the following operations are performed in units of 1 mm, that is, using a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA-2000) manufactured by Konica Minolta, along the guide In the longitudinal direction of the light plate, the distance from the end portion of the diffusing sheet laminated on the light guide plate to the light incident surface side is 157266.doc • 266 · 201222097 x / m (the inner side of the light incident surface side x coffee) The brightness is obtained by the brightness distribution. The root market knows the brightness distribution obtained, and when judging

It is judged that the brightness is uneven, and the distance (X) from the end of the light-incident side is 0 mm, and the result is 13 mm. , α [Production Example Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β 制造 制造 制造 制造 制造 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 测定 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮 亮

When the degree of unevenness disappears, the distance from the end portion of the light-incident surface (8) is 14 mm ° [Production Example E-3C] In addition to the laminating body of the bonding layer and the light diffusion layer using a doctor blade, the blade and the layer are laminated. In the same manner as in the production example Ε-3Β, the light incident and the light incident were measured, except for the polyethylene terephthalate having a thickness of 25 () (4) (the film was pressed through the film). The distance from the end of the face (χ), the result is melon melon. &lt;Production Example F&gt; [Production Example F-11] A transparent double-sided back sheet was adhered to the light-incident surface to have a surface distribution as shown in Fig. 2 (average pitch: about 6 μηι, average depth: about 4 μηι) trench structure and an average thickness of 125 μη polyethylene terephthalate film, the opposite surface is subjected to light scattering processing shown in Figure F3〇 (will contain diffusion particles and the diameter of the binder 〇 · A circular diffusing point of 8 mm to 1.3 mm is arranged in a zigzag configuration (triangular lattice shape) at a distance of 1 mm (shading portion) from the end side of the light incident surface, pi = 〇%, p2 = 6 〇%, in the area of 4 to 6 mm (shading area (junction area)) from the side of the light-incident side, pl = 7〇/〇, 157266.doc -267- 201222097 p2=20%, at the distance of the light The side end portion is more than 6 mm (non-shielding portion), P1 = P2 = 8%) Light guide plate (material: polymethyl methacrylate methyl acetate thickness: 3.0 mm, width: 409 mm, length: 721 mm), along The light surface is arranged with the arrangement pitch P of 19.2 mm (light emitting surface size: 5 〇 mm (width direction) x 3. 〇 mm (; thickness direction), number of LEDs: The sequential laminated diffusion sheet, the tantalum sheet, and the reflective polarizer (DBEF manufactured by 3M Company) are further disposed on the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate so as to be sufficiently configured A surface light source device is fabricated by a frame covering the size of the light guide plate and the LED and having an opening of 395 mm x 700 mm. Using a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA2〇〇〇a manufactured by Konica Min〇ha), the front direction of the light-emitting surface ( V = 〇., H = 〇.) The brightness is measured, and the standard deviation (SD value) of the brightness of the smooth surface is taken out. The result is shown in Fig. F31. The SD value of the brightness of the A smooth surface (non-light-shielding portion) is P/G. -1 to 2.6 (G is the distance from the light-incident surface (mm)) is very low or less. In addition, when viewing the light surface from the oblique direction (V (Vertical) = 45, or the manager's face seven) (When the measurement direction of the luminance meter is inclined with respect to the front surface of the light-emitting surface by V=45 or H=20.), the SD value of the brightness of the inner side (non-light-shielding portion) of 7 mm from the end surface of the light-incident surface side is shown in Table F_2. Here, the above Η and V represent the tilt angles of the luminance meter, which are parallel to the incident light. The inclination angle of the direction (the inclination angle formed by the rotation about the axis perpendicular to the light incident surface), the inclination angle perpendicular to the direction of the light incident surface (the inclination angle formed by the rotation parallel to the axis of the light incident surface) ), the positive value indicates the orientation to the center of the light-emitting area or the display area. 157266.doc 201222097 The brightness of the surface light source of the manufacturing example F-11 when viewing the light-emitting surface is not only from the front side, but also the unevenness of the J• self-tilt square reduce. [Table F-2] [Table 21] S.D·Value V0° H0° 0Ό24 V0° H20° 0.026 V45° H0° 0.031 ^ ------_ [Manufacturing example F-12;)

In addition to making the light guide plate · π ° light scattering processing as shown in Figure F32 (will contain diffuse particles and adhesive straight 仫〇.8 melon 111~1·3 mm circular diffuser vertical tooth configuration ( The triangular lattice shape is set to be in the region of the side of the light-incident surface 5 to 4.5_ (light-shielding portion) W, P2 = 60%, at the end portion of the light-incident surface side 4 .., • mm (shading portion (junction) The area of the region)), pl = 10% &gt; ρ2 = 1ι〇λ , ^ in the region of 6 mm or more (non-light-shielding portion) from the side of the light-incident side, P 8 /., p2 = 9 / 〇, and Compared with the light scattering processing of the manufacturing example F_n, the six β, the region of the parent region in the region of the light source, and the region between the light source and the light source are also small in light scattering, and are both manufactured and manufactured. In the same way as in the case of Fl 1, the book says f to find the SD value of the luminance distribution of the smooth surface. -from. When the front side (V=H=0.) and the tilt direction (v=o., H=20.; v=45〇, Η 〇) are observed, the brightness unevenness is smaller than the brightness of the manufacturing example F_u. All. [Production Example F-13] The frame of the surface light source device of the manufacturing example F-12 was removed, and the arrangement was the same as that shown in Fig. F28 so as to face the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate 157266.doc 201222097. The display panel (the outer frame of the light-shielding frame is sufficient to cover the size of the light guide plate and the display area is 392.4 mm x 696·4 mm), and a display device is formed to observe uneven brightness in the display area. From the front (V=H=0.) and the tilt direction (V=0., H=20.; V=45., Η 0), when viewing, the brightness unevenness in the display area is less than that of manufacturing. The brightness of Example F-11 was uneven. &lt;Production Example G&gt; First, an evaluation method of Production Example G will be described. k evaluation system (evaluation of hot spots) The following evaluation systems 1 were used for the production examples G-1 to G-12 and G-21 to G-30, and the production examples G-13 to G-15 and the production examples G_31 and G_32 were used. The evaluation of the hot spot was performed using the following evaluation system 2. The evaluation system 1 is arranged along the light incident surface of the light guide plate, and the five LEDs are arranged substantially evenly in such a manner that the light emitting surface of the LED is parallel to the light incident surface and the arrangement pitch is 1 8.8 mm (the distance between the LED and the light incident surface: 〇·5) (mm) A surface light source device is produced by laminating an optical sheet (described later) on the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate. The outside of the LED is 5.6 mm wide and 3.0 mm south. The evaluation system 2 is arranged along the light incident surface of the light guide plate, and the five LEDs are arranged substantially parallel to the light incident surface of the LED and arranged at a pitch of 9.4 mm (the distance between the LED and the light incident surface: 〇, 5 (mm), a surface light source device is produced by laminating light 157266.doc -270-201222097 on the light-emitting surface side of the light guide plate. The LED is shaped as a width μ mmx and a height of 3.0 mm. Specifically, the LED is lit, and a two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA-2000) manufactured by Konica Minolta is disposed on the light-emitting surface 〇5 m in the normal direction of the light-emitting surface of the optical sheet laminated on the light guide plate. The position (the hot spot evaluation when viewed from the front) and the position 0.5 m away from the light exit surface in the direction inclined by 3 degrees from the normal direction (Fig. G26) (the hot spot evaluation when viewed from the oblique direction), and the light is measured. The brightness distribution of the surface. From the luminance data of the light-emitting surface measured by the two-dimensional color luminance meter (CA_2000), the distance between the light-emitting surface and the light-incident end side is extracted to be 7·5 mm (evaluation system υ, 3 mm ( The brightness distribution L(X) of the position of the evaluation system 2) in the direction parallel to the light incident surface (Fig. 9 (α) direction) (X axis: distance parallel to the light incident surface, γ axis: brightness L) In order to eliminate the luminance gradient irrelevant to the hot spot from the above-mentioned respective luminance distributions L(x), the distance P between the LEDs is obtained (about 18 8 mm at this time (evaluation system 〇 or 9.4 mm (evaluation system 2)) The average of the range, thereby obtaining the value of the smoothed Cj (moving average), [3] job.) / La. The standard deviation value (s D. value) obtained as the brightness unevenness of the LED In other words, the range of χ in the evaluation of the standard deviation value (SD. value) is the range after removing the LEDs at both ends, that is, from the point source 157266.doc 271 · 201222097 The position of the second LED from one of the groups starts from the position of the second LED from the other end. (Evaluation of the bright line) About the bright line (Refer to G1 8) 'Light the LED, and visually observe the optical sheet laminated on the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate from the normal direction of the light-emitting surface and the direction inclined by 30 degrees from the normal direction to determine whether there is light or line. In addition, the hotspots and the bright lines are specifically evaluated according to the judgment criteria of Table G-1. [Table G-1] [Table 22] The hot spot judgment reference bright line determines a quasi-distance entrance side end portion of 7.5 mm ( Evaluation ----- ^ Hot spot evaluation is A above system 1) or 3 mm (evaluation system 2) ◎ ... SD value is not up to 〇 · 03 Side end part 7 · 5 mm or more ^ Flat area Bay first or 3111111 or more (evaluation system 2) 〇... The SD value is 〇·〇3 or more and does not reach 〇.〇6 The line-shaped unevenness under visual observation: △ ... SD value is 〇·〇6 or more and does not reach 〇. 1〇〇...There is no A when viewed from the front and the oblique direction...the front side is not seen, but it is visible from the oblique direction&gt;&lt;...3. The value is 〇.10 or more X... visible one. 2. Manufacturing example G light guide plate manufacturing method The light guide plates of the production examples G-1 to G-15 and the production examples G-22, G_24, g-26, G_28, G-30, and G-32 are based on a light guide plate substrate to be described later. On, by layer Specifically, it is produced by combining a light-diffusing layer on the surface opposite to the light-diffusing layer of a light-diffusing sheet (which is provided with a light-spreading 157266.doc • 272-201222097 layer on the base film). Acrylic-based adhesive (tetra) film on a release paper (pD Si manufactured by Ρ_股份有限公司, adhesive thickness: 25 (four), storage elastic modulus under the armpit, po pooo Pa), and multilayers with an adhesive layer membrane. Then, the multilayer film having the subsequent layer is slit at a specific width, and the release paper of the peeling back layer is bonded to the light incident surface of the light guide plate by a roller, thereby bonding the light diffusion layer. Production Example G-21, G-23, G-25, G-27, G-29, and G-31 are incorporated into a light guide plate to which a light diffusion layer is not bonded, and the light guide plate substrate is directly used.

3. Description of Components Used Hereinafter, various members used in Production Example G will be described. A. Optical sheet The following optical sheet was used in combination with a light guide plate. (a) Diffusion sheet (DS) manufactured by Toray Saehan TDF-187

(b) Prism Manufactured by LG Electronics SOS-07H (c) Reflective Polarizer (DBEF) 3M Manufacture DBEF-D400 These optical sheets are laminated on the light-emitting surface of the light guide. In Production Example G-1-G-5 and Production Examples G-21 to G-24, one sheet of the above DS was laminated on the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate as an optical sheet. In the production examples G-6 to G-δ, and in the production examples G-: 25 and G_26, the DS and the Prism are sequentially stacked one by one on the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate (the prism rows are orthogonal to the arrangement direction of the LEDs). . In Production Examples G-10, G-ll, G-13 to G-15, and Production Examples G-27, G-28, G-31, and G-32, 157266 was sequentially formed one by one on the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate. .doc • 273 · 201222097 Layer DS, Prism (prism column is orthogonal to the direction in which the LEDs are arranged), DBEF. In Production Example G-12 and Production Examples G_29 and G-30, the Prism (parallel to the alignment direction of the LEDs) and Prism (the alignment of the arrays with respect to the LEDs) are sequentially laminated on the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate. Direction orthogonal), DBEF. B. Light guide plate substrate Production Example G In the case of the light guide plate substrate, the following α, β〇α, and Β are all flat plates having a thickness of 3 mm, and on the first side, are disposed perpendicular to the light incident. The shape of the lentil lens extending in the direction of the surface.

• The light guide substrate -A has a lenticular lens as shown in Fig. G20A on the first side (light exit surface), and the shape of the lenticular lens is 6 〇 μηη and a pitch of 290 μηι. On the second side (opposite side), there is a dot pattern (starting from the inner side of the light entrance surface of 3 mm) provided by printing white ink.

The light guide plate substrate-B has a lenticular lens as shown in (320) on the first surface (light-emitting surface), and the shape of the flat lens is a height of 8 μm and a pitch of 29 μm. (opposite surface) has a dot pattern provided by laser engraving (starting from the inner side of the light incident surface of 3 mm) C. Light diffusing plate Part of the light guide plate of the manufacturing example G is light-introduced by the light guide plate substrate The surface is formed by the following film (light diffusing film) with a light diffusing layer. • Light diffusing sheet 1 is a transparent base containing polyethylene terephthalate and having a thickness of 125 μm. 157266.doc = 274» 201222097 (A4300 manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.) contains light diffusion on the surface having a first partial region and a second partial region (the ratio of the area occupied by each is equal to 5%) which is different in light diffusion characteristics as shown in Fig. 3 a light diffusing layer of a layer, the light diffusing layer comprising a plurality of openings having a shape elongated in a direction (a direction perpendicular to a longitudinal direction of the light incident surface (second direction)) by exposure of the speckle pattern UV of a recess (groove) In the hardened resin of the wire hardening resin, the average depth and the average pitch of the concave portions are different in the first partial region and the second partial region. The diffusion angle of the entire pupil plane is 11 in the first direction and 1 in the second direction. The range of the exit angle in which the intensity is 3/4 or more of the peak intensity in the light pattern curve in the first direction is 5% of the range of the normal distribution curve. The intensity is an exit angle of 1/1 峰值 or more of the peak intensity. The range is larger than the above range of the suspension distribution curve by j 6 〇 / 〇 (Fig. Gw A (a)). In addition, each of the partial regions has the following characteristics. (Part 1 region) The areas of the divided regions are equal, which is 丨 65 Mm2, with first party

Q has a diffusion angle of 17. , 筮-古A brother in one direction of the diffusion angle is 1. The light-diffusing property of anisotropic, the single-P ΪΤ of the concave; 务1 &lt; - U. The average spacing of the tenths is 15 μπι, and the average depth is 8 μηι 〇 (the second partial region). The divided regions have the same area, which is 165 丽2, and has a diffusion angle of 8 in the first direction. , 篦-古α + The diffusion angle of the younger one is 1. Anisotropic light diffusion characteristics, the concave portion b Λ c 丨 has a ten-pitch spacing of 25 μηη, and an average depth of 5 μηι 〇 157266.doc -275· 201222097 • Light diffusing sheet 2 contains polyethylene terephthalate And a transparent base film having a thickness of 125 μm (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., Α4300), including a first partial region and a second partial region having different light diffusion characteristics as shown in Fig. G4 (the respective area ratios are as follows: respective A light diffusing sheet of a light diffusing layer having a ratio of 3 8 /° to the area of the second portion and 62% of the area. The light-diffusing layer includes an ultraviolet-curable resin cured product having a plurality of concave portions in a direction (a direction perpendicular to a longitudinal direction of the light-incident surface (an opening portion having a long shape in the second direction) by exposure of the speckle pattern. The diffusion angle of the light diffusion layer as a whole is 6 in the first direction and 1. in the second direction, and the range of the emission angle in the first direction is 3/4 or more of the peak intensity. The above range of the normal distribution curve is 5% narrower, and the range of the exit angle whose intensity is 1/1 峰值 or more of the peak intensity is 4% larger than the above range of the normal distribution curve (Fig. G22A(b)). The region has the following characteristics: (Part 1 region) The divided partial regions have the same area, 〇45匪2, and have a diffusion angle of 10 in the first direction. 'The diffusion angle in the second direction is: anisotropy The light diffusion characteristic, the average pitch of the concave portions is 20 μm, and the average depth is 5 μπι. (Partial region) The area of each divided region is 75.75 mm2, and the diffusion angle in the first direction is 5 The second direction is the same as the diffusion angle of 1. 157266.doc •276· 201222097 The light diffusion characteristics of the opposite sex, the average spacing of the concave parts is 33 μπι, and the average depth is 3 μιη. • Light diffusing sheet 3 On a transparent base film (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd. Α 4300) comprising polyethylene terephthalate and having a thickness of 125 μm, a light diffusion sheet comprising a light diffusion layer as described below, that is, the light diffusion layer contains a surface A plurality of openings having a shape 较长 which is longer in one direction (direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface (second direction)) as shown in FIG. G23 are uniformly formed by exposure of the speckle pattern. The ultraviolet-curable resin cured product of the concave portion. The diffusion angle of the light diffusion layer as a whole is 16 in the first direction, and is 1. in the second direction, and the intensity in the light pattern curve in the first direction is 3/ of the peak intensity. The range of the exit angle of 4 or more is 8% larger than the above range of the normal distribution curve, and the range of the exit angle whose intensity is 1/1 峰值 or more of the peak intensity is 6% larger than the above range of the normal distribution curve (Fig. G22) A(c)) The average pitch of the recesses is 5.2 μηη, and the average depth is 丨.2 μιη. • The light diffusing sheet 4 is a transparent base film containing polyethylene terephthalate and having a thickness of 125 μϊ (Toyobo Co., Ltd.) Co., Ltd. manufactures a light diffusing sheet comprising a light diffusing layer as described below, that is, the light diffusing layer comprises a surface uniformly formed by exposing the speckle pattern to have a direction (relative to the length of the incident surface) The ultraviolet curable resin cured material of the plurality of concave portions of the opening portion having a long shape in the direction perpendicular to the direction (second direction). The diffusion angle of the entire light diffusion layer is 14 in the first direction. Is 1. The intensity of the light exiting pattern curve in the first direction is 157266.doc •277·201222097 The range of the exit angle of 3/4 or more of the intensity is 12.5 〇/〇 smaller than the above range of the normal distribution curve, and the intensity is the peak intensity. The range of the exit angle of 1 / 10 or more is larger than the above range of the normal distribution curve by 7 4 . /〇 (Fig. G22B(d)). The average pitch of the recesses is 3.5 μηη 'the average depth is 丨.2 μπι. The light-diffusing sheet 5 is a light-diffusing sheet containing a light-diffusing layer as described below, on a transparent base film (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., Α4300) containing polyethylene terephthalate and having a thickness of 125 μm. The light diffusion layer includes a plurality of concave portions in which the surface is uniformly exposed by the speckle pattern to have an opening portion having a shape elongated in a direction (a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light incident surface (second direction)). UV cured resin cured product. The diffusion angle of the entire light diffusion layer is 25 in the first direction. , is 1 in the second direction. The range of the exit angle in which the intensity is 3 / 4 or more of the peak intensity in the light pattern curve in the first direction is 6% smaller than the above range of the normal distribution curve, and the range of the exit angle of the peak intensity of 1/10 or more and the normal distribution The above ranges of the curves are equal (Fig. G22B (e: 〇. The average pitch of the recesses is 7.0 μηη, and the average depth is 丨9 μηι.

• Light diffuser A

A diffuser TDF_187 manufactured by Toray Saehan, which is attached to a transparent base film and includes a plurality of recesses having an opening formed on the surface having an isotropic shape as shown in Fig. G24 (average pitch is i6 pm, average depth is 5 a light diffusing layer of μηι). &amp;... 157266.doc •278· 201222097 [Table G-2]

[Table 23] LED Pitch Optical Sheet Light Guide Plate Substrate Light Diffuser Hot Spot Front Side Hot Spot Bright Line Manufacturing Example G-21 18.8 mm DS AXX - Manufacturing Example G-22 Diffuser A 〇 Δ X Manufacturing Example G1 Diffuser 1 〇Δ〇 Manufacturing Example G-2 Diffuser 2 〇Δ 〇 Manufacturing Example G-3 Diffuser 3 〇Δ Δ Manufacturing Example G-4 Diffuser 4 〇Δ Δ Manufacturing Example G-23 B - XX - Manufacturing Example G-24 Diffusion sheet A 〇Δ X Production example G-5 Diffusion sheet 1 〇Δ 〇 Manufacturing example G-25 DS/Prism A - XX Production example G-26 Diffusion sheet A ◎ 〇X Production example G-6 Diffusion sheet 1 〇〇〇 Production Example G-7 Diffuser 3 ◎ 〇 Δ Production Example G-8 Diffuser 4 ◎ 〇〇 Manufacturing Example G-27 DS/Prism/ DBEF A - XX - Manufacturing Example G-28 Diffusion sheet A ◎ 〇 X Manufacturing Example G -9 Diffusion sheet 1 ◎ 〇〇 Production example G-10 Diffusion sheet 3 ◎ ◎ Δ Production example G1 1 Diffusion sheet 4 ◎ ◎ 〇 Production example G-29 Prism/ Prism/DS AXX - Production example G-30 Diffusion sheet A 〇 〇X Manufacturing Example G-12 Diffuser 4 Manufacturing Example G-31 9.4 mm DS/Prism/ DBEF A - 〇X - Manufacturing Example G-32 Diffuser A ◎ 〇X Manufacturing Example G-13 Diffusion 3 ◎ ◎ 〇 Production Example G-14 Diffuser 4 ◎ ◎ 〇 Production Example G-15 Diffuser 5 ◎ ◎ 0 157266.doc - 279· 201222097 In addition, in Production Example G, the measuring device is used as described above. In addition to the determination, visual determination is also made, and the combination suitable for the display device (the arrangement pitch of the LED, the uneven structure of the light incident surface of the light guide plate, and the combination of the optical sheets laminated on the light guide plate) is exemplified below. . Furthermore, the judgment is carried out based on the following criteria. Regarding whether or not there is suitable cooperation as the quality of the display device, comprehensive judgment is made based on observations from all directions. [Table 24] Judging from the comprehensive observation of all the uneven forms from all directions. ◎ ◎ It is difficult to recognize unevenness with or without image display. ◎ There is a case where the uncomfortable feeling due to unevenness is recognized when there is no image display.难以 It is difficult to confirm unevenness when displaying images such as moving images. Δ When the image is displayed in a moving image or the like, unevenness does not cause a large obstacle. X can be easily visually recognized and hinders image display. XX hinders the display of images, and there is a strong sense of irritability. According to the above-mentioned criterion, in the standard model in which the frame (horizontal distance between the light-incident surface and the display region) G=7 mm, a preferable combination of the reduction of the LED is considered, and the following is exemplified in the following arrangement of the optical sheet. In the table. In the table, the term "light-diffusing sheet" means a light-diffusing sheet bonded to a light-incident surface of a substrate of a light guide plate. 157266.doc -280· 201222097 [«ncsl^] Light diffusing sheet (diffusion angle in the first direction x diffusion angle in the second direction) 25x1 light diffusing sheet 5 1 1 1 &lt;&lt; X 1 1 1 ◎ ◎ best ~~Δ 1 1 1 | 2〇xl I 1 1 1 〇~△ &lt; X 1 1 1 ◎ &lt; l 〇1 1 1 1 18x1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 o~Δ &lt; l 〇〇~△ ◎ ο~Δ 1 1 1 16x1 Light diffuser 3 1 1 1 ο~Δ 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14x1 Light diffuser 4 | 〇Best 〇Best ΔBest ◎Best ◎Best &lt; ◎Best 〇Best ◎Best ◎ 〇◎Best ◎Best&lt; l 〇1〇χ1 | 1 1 1 〇1 1 〇oo 〇〇1 1 1 1 1 1 〇1 1 1 1 1 〇~ △ 〇 best 1 1 1 1 1 1 〇1 X l &lt; Lian 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 No light diffuser _i 〇χ〇XXXX XX XXX XX &lt;&lt;〇&lt;&lt;&lt;1 optics The sheet is equipped with DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/MLF Prism(H)/Prism(V)/DS DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/MLF Prism(H ) /Prism(V)/DS DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/MLF DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/DBEF Prism(H)/Prism(V)/ DS DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/MLF Prism(H)/Pri(V)/DS Border G G=7 Light guide plate substrate 0Q &lt;&lt; P Q &lt; LED pitch 18.8 mm 16 mm 9.4 mm.蜘蛛早Η-έφιαΗΊΧ-Γ 荦侩靖&lt;W 璲咖&gt;3C 甥食甥瑟 Ttt韶-M6 颂W6 : 91 衾ΜΓΟ®#(·^α3β^:#-δ3ι-1农-ffi --e-赛嘁si4食※. 友31:琳^""资斗杷牮哒"^^^友31:琳^食:[1.1^

.. ESI -281 -

157266.doc 201222097 Based on the above criteria, a narrow frame with a frame G=4 mm is assumed, and a preferred combination that can provide good quality is exemplified below in accordance with various arrangements of optical sheets. I57266.doc 282- 201222097

[Si light diffusing sheet (diffusion angle in the first direction x diffusion angle in the second direction) 32x1 1_ 1 1 1 &lt; l 〇27x1 1 1 1 O~Δ 25x1 Light diffusing sheet 5 1 1 1 〇23x1 1 1 1 ◎ ◎Optimal 20x1 1 1 1 ◎ 18x1 &lt;1 &lt;1 1 〇14x1 Light diffuser 4 〇Best 〇Best 〇Optimum 〇~△ 10x1 &lt;1 〇1 &lt; 1 1 No light diffusing film 〇XXXX optical sheet is equipped with DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/MLF DS/Prism(V)/DBEF DS/Prism(V)/MLF frame GG=4 light guide plate substrate CQ &lt; CQ LED pitch 13.4 mm 11.0 mm = lt'f_-li1-Hi*-asyr#^^&lt;ws,AS's:^w^^WH^^^^fiT€^'f?i'ir?6:9I^ BHfor#^«i:aHh-l^-ffl&lt;-fr-^^¥ft-444^.本^:琳^^?«赛斗杷迨哒"^)龙31:琳*¥衾:|^12 (Total dragon 蚺 婼 婼 umbrella wl: 钿va^wa31^i^^lsN^4f&gt;* «&lt;) K^^: (A) u - 157266.doc -283 - 201222097 &lt;Production Example H&gt; A description will be given of a manufacturing example. In the following Production Example H, the longitudinal direction of the surface uneven structure of the diffusion sheet (the direction in which the diffusion angle is low) is set to be perpendicular to the point light source row. [Production Example Η-1] When the diffusion sheet of Production Example Η-1 was produced, the photosensitive medium was exposed to S by using the interference light diffused by the holographic diffuser described in Japanese Patent No. 3413519, and it was developed. A sub-master mold having a non-periodic surface relief structure formed by a speckle pattern is produced. As the holographic diffuser when the photosensitive medium is exposed, a diffusion plate having a diffusion angle of 30 degrees' in the horizontal direction with respect to the diffusion sheet and a diffusion angle of 〇 8 degrees in the direction of the vertical direction is used. The photocurable resin (optical adhesive ν manufactured by Norland) was applied to the main mold and the substrate (PET substrate Α 4300 manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., thickness 8 〇μηι) at a thickness of about 2 μm. Α 63) After photocuring the photocurable resin, the sub-master mold is peeled off, whereby a diffusion sheet having a surface layer having a surface uneven structure is formed on the substrate. The following five kinds of diffusion sheets are obtained by adjusting the size, shape and direction of the speckle pattern. Furthermore, the direction of the speckle pattern needs to be adjusted in consideration of the up and down and horizontal directions of the manufactured diffusion sheet. 157266.doc -284· 201222097 [Table Hl] [Table 27] Minimum value of average spacing of diffuser names (m) Maximum value of average spacing (mm) Ratio of maximum to minimum DS174-4 11 7.1 645 DS175- 1 9.6 8.4 875 DS175-2 10.8 9.2 852 DS176-1 15.6 3.6 231 DS176-2 6.5 2.1 323 [Manufacturing Example H-2] For the minimum value of the diffusion angle of each diffuser obtained in Manufacturing Example H-1, use A light beam analyzer (NanoScan) manufactured by Photon Inc. was measured by irradiating a Heis-Ne laser (1107P) of JDS Uniphase Co., Ltd. from the surface having the surface uneven structure of each of the diffusion sheets, and the results as described below were obtained. [Table H-2] [Table 28] Minimum value of diffusion angle of diffusion sheet name (degrees) DS174-4 0.13 DS175-1 0.08 DS175-2 0.08 DS176-1 0.21 DS176-2 0.20 [Manufacturing example H-3] The maximum value of the diffusion angle of each of the diffusion sheets obtained in Example H-1 was measured by a variable angle photometer 157266.doc-285-201222097 (GC-5000L) manufactured by Nippon Denshoku Industries Co., Ltd., from each of the diffusion sheets. The surface of the surface uneven structure was irradiated with light from a light source to measure, and the results as described below were obtained. [Table H-3] [Table 29] The minimum value of the diffusion angle of the diffuser name (degrees) The ratio of the maximum value of the diffusion angle to the minimum value DS174-4 65 500 DS175-1 44 550 DS175-2 40 475 DS176-1 52 248 DS176-2 70 350 [Manufacturing Example H-4] A linear illumination system in which five point light sources 1 are horizontally arranged with respect to the irradiation surface 3 as shown in Fig. H1 on the back surface of the diffusion sheet 2 is produced. As the point light source 1, an LED having a wavelength of 48 8 nm, a power of 0.18 W, a Gaussian distribution, and an intensity of 最大/e2 of a maximum intensity of 3 mm was used. The distance between the adjacent point sources is set to 80 cm. The distance between the diffusion sheet 2 and the irradiation surface 3 was set to 1 m, and the 918D-UV-OD3 detector was placed on each of the irradiation surfaces using the power meter 1936-C manufactured by Newport Corporation, and the irradiation surface 3 was measured at this time. The intensity distribution of the horizontal direction of the illumination light 4. Figure H3 shows the intensity distribution when DS174-4 is used as the diffusion sheet 2, Figure H4 shows the intensity distribution when DS175-1 is used, Figure H5 shows the intensity distribution when DS175-2 is used, and Figure H6 shows the strength when DS176-1 is used. Distribution, Figure H7 is the intensity distribution when using DS 176-2. For comparison, find the maximum and minimum values of the intensity of light between -800 mm and 800 157266.doc -286-201222097 mm in Figures H3 to H7 and the minimum value of the intensity of light relative to The ratio of the maximum values is obtained as follows. [Table H-4] [Table 30] Diffusion sheet name Maximum strength (mW/cm2) Minimum strength (mW/cm2) —---- Minimum strength/maximum strength DS174-4 7.4 7.0 0.95 DS175-1 10.5 8.2 0.78 DS175 -2 11.0 7.8 0.71 DS176-1 5.6 4.8 0.86 DS176-2 5.3 5.1 0.96 When using any diffuser, the intensity is approximately 4 mW/cm2 or more, and the ratio of the minimum intensity of light to the maximum intensity is 0.7 or more. Irradiated on the illuminated surface in a uniform line. In addition, when DS174-4, DS175-1, and DS175-2 are used, the light intensity is preferably 7.0 mW/cm2 or more even at the minimum. [Production Example H-5] The DS176-2 in each of the diffusion sheets obtained in Production Example H-1 was subjected to sandblasting in a direction inclined by 1 degree with respect to the direction in which the diffusion angle of the emitted light showed the minimum value. The surface of the diffusion sheet having the surface uneven structure forms a stripe pattern. The processed diffusion sheet was set to DS 176-2S. Under the optical microscope, the distance between the striped patterns of the DS176-2S was measured, and the average spacing was 0.2 mm. Then, one part of the DS 176-2S was cut, and the height of the stripe pattern was measured from the shape of the section. The average height was 〇.〇 2 mm. 157266.doc -287-201222097 [Production Example H-6] When the diffusion sheet of Production Example H-6 was produced, the photosensitive light was diffused by the interference light which was diffused by the holographic diffuser described in Japanese Patent No. 3413519 When the medium exposure '1胄行_' is used to produce a sub-master mold having a non-periodic surface relief structure formed by a speckle pattern, the size and shape of the speckle pattern during exposure are locally adjusted', thereby obtaining The secondary main mode of the sub-master having a stripe pattern in a direction in which the direction in which the diffusion angle of the emitted light shows a minimum value is 8 degrees. Then, the sub-master transfer pattern 'obtained from the present manufacturing example' was obtained in the same manner as in Production Example H-1, whereby the diffusion sheet DS177-1V was obtained. Under the optical microscope, the density of the speckle pattern of the DS177-1V was measured, and the average pitch was 1 mm. [Production Example H-7] The minimum value of the diffusion angle of the diffusion sheet obtained in Production Examples Η5 and Η6 was measured in the same manner as in Production Example H-2, and the results described below were obtained. [Table H-5] [Table 31] Name of the diffusion sheet——- Minimum value of diffusion angle (degrees) DS176-2S 0.25 DS177-1V 0.15 [Production Example H-8] 'In the same manner as in Production Example H-3 The maximum value of the diffusion angle of the diffusion sheet obtained in Production Example h_5 was measured, and the result 157266.doc 201222097 as described below was obtained. [Table H-6] [Table 32] Maximum value of diffusion angle of diffusion sheet name (degree) Ratio of maximum value of diffusion angle to minimum value DS176-2S 70 280 DS177-1V 62 413 [Manufacturing example H-9] The diffusion sheets obtained in Production Examples H-1, H-5, and H-6 were subjected to a abrasion resistance test using a pencil having a hardness of HB and rubbing five times on the surface having the surface uneven structure. Holding the upper part of the pencil with two fingers, with a load of about 10 g, forming an angle of about 30 degrees with respect to the surface of the test piece, contacting the surface having the surface uneven structure, and displaying the maximum value along the diffusion angle of the emitted light. Direction, move the pencil by hand at a speed of about 5 mm/s on the test piece. The results are as follows. Further, the 〇 in the table indicates that the scratch formed by the pencil scratching was not recognized, and the X indicates that the scratch was recognized and the film was unacceptable.

[Table H-7] [Table 33] Diffuser name abrasion resistance test result DS176-2 XXOXX DS176-2S OXOOO DS177-1V 〇〇xx〇 It is known that the wear resistance of the diffusion sheet formed with the stripe pattern in the oblique direction is improved. . 157266.doc -289-201222097 [Production Example H-ll] In the same manner as in Production Example H-1, the following three types of diffusion sheets were obtained by adjusting the size, shape, and direction of the speckle pattern. As the holographic diffuser when the photosensitive medium is exposed, a diffusion plate having a diffusion angle with respect to the horizontal direction of the screen and a diffusion angle of 5 degrees in the horizontal direction is used. [Table H-8] [Table 34] Minimum value of average spacing of diffuser names (μιη) Maximum value of average spacing (mm) Ratio of maximum to minimum DS142-8 34 7.7 226 DS154-1 9.2 0.4 43 DS156 -1 6.1 0.3 49 [Production Example H-12] The minimum value of the diffusion angle of each of the diffusion sheets obtained in Production Example Η-11 was measured in the same manner as in Production Example H-2, and the results as described below were obtained. [Table H-9] [Table 35] Minimum value of diffusion angle of diffusion sheet name (degrees) DS142-8 0.08 DS154-1 1.0 DS156-1 1.0 [Production Example H-13] In the same manner as in Production Example H-3 The maximum value of the diffusion angle of each of the diffusion sheets obtained in Production Example Η-11 was measured, and the results as described below were obtained. 157266.doc •290- 201222097 [Table H,10] [Table 36] Maximum value of diffusion angle of diffuser name (degrees) Ratio of maximum value of diffusion angle to minimum value DS142-8 20 250 DS154-1 40 40 DS156 -1 60 60 [Production Example H-14] The intensity distribution of the irradiation light 4 on the irradiation surface 3 in the linear illumination system produced was measured in the same manner as in Production Example H-4. Fig. H8 shows the intensity distribution when DS142-8 is used as the diffusion sheet 2, and Fig. H9 shows the intensity distribution when DS154-1 is used as the diffusion sheet 2, and Fig. H10 shows the intensity distribution when DS156-1 is used as the diffusion sheet 2. For comparison, in the same manner as in Production Example H-4, the maximum and minimum values of the light intensity between -800 mm and 800 mm in the positions in FIGS. H8 to H10 were obtained, and the minimum value was compared with the maximum value. In comparison, the results as described below were obtained. When the DS154-1 and DS156-1 are used, since the light is also diffused in the vertical direction, the maximum intensity in the horizontal direction is reduced as shown in Table -11. [Table Η-11] [Table 37] Diffusion sheet name Maximum strength (mW/cm2) Minimum strength (mW/cm2) Minimum strength/maximum strength DS142-8 20.2 1.3 0.06 DS154-1 1.4 1.0 0.71 DS156-1 1.2 1.1 0.92 157266.doc -291 - 201222097 When DS 142-8 is used as the diffusion sheet 2, the intensity of light on the irradiation surface 3 is large and cannot be used. When using DS154_1&amp;DS1561' Although the intensity of light is uniform, the intensity is much less than 5 mW/cm2, and the illuminated surface cannot be sufficiently brightly illuminated. &lt;Production Example 1&gt; Hereinafter, Production Example 1 will be described. The optical film used in the production example I was obtained by a light-diffusing sheet having the following light-diffusing layer on a transparent base film (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd. Α 4300) containing polyethylene terephthalate and having a thickness of 125 μm. On the side of the side of the light-diffusing layer, an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive film (PD_S1 manufactured by Panac Co., Ltd., adhesive film thickness: 25 μm) laminated on a release paper was laminated, and the light diffusion layer was coated with a surface. The speckle pattern is exposed to form an ultraviolet curable resin cured product having a plurality of depressed portions having openings having a shape elongated in one direction. In Production Example 1, the following operations were carried out, and the extrusion of the bubbles was visually observed. Work 1: First, the release paper was peeled off from the optical film. Next, hold the ends of the optical film and align it with the angle of one end of the 713 mmx3 of the 713 mm x 410 mm rectangular and 3 mm thick light guide. Then, the left end portion of the optical film is attached to one end surface of the light guide plate. Then, the right end of the hand-held optical film is held, and a portion of about 25 cm from the left end of the optical film is crimped onto one end surface of the light guide plate (hereinafter referred to as "temporary pasting"). Thereafter, the left hand was moved by about 25 cm each time, and the optical film was crimped to one end surface of the light guide plate at intervals of about 25 cm. Most 157266.doc »292- 201222097 After the use of the bonding fixture, one side of the optical film layer pressure, the surface is twisted once. Work 2: Stacking 25 sheets of light guide plates with a main surface of 713〇1111&gt;&lt;41〇111111 and a thickness of 3 mm, and collating the unevenness of the adjacent light guide plates (offset of the end faces) The optical film was temporarily adhered piece by piece on a surface of 713 mm x 3 mm in a state of 5 pm to 1 mm. After all the 25 sheets were temporarily pasted, a pressure was applied to the optical film layer using a bonding jig, and the adjacent 5 to 6 sheets were simultaneously pushed up i times. 〇 (Measurement of hardness) The hardness of the elastomer was measured in accordance with JIS K 6253. The type A durometer was used as a standard. For a porous body such as a porous body or a sponge having a large pore size, it is difficult to measure it, and it is expressed by the rubber hardness of the E-type hardness tester or by the Asker c-type hardness tester described in SRIS 0101, and is expressed by the sponge hardness. (Production Example 1-1) In Production Example 1-1, a bonding jig was formed by molding a polyoxyethylene rubber Silastic J-RTV manufactured by D〇wc〇rning &amp; (Rubber hardness: 55) 'As shown in Fig. 18, it is wrapped in a polyethylene plastic bag to impart a slidable bonding jig. The contact length of the bonding jig with respect to the light guide plate is about 3 mm under application of pressure. In the case where the operations 1 and 2 are performed, the bubble can be removed. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure, and even if the light guide plate is slightly retracted, the air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. (Production Example 1-2) 157266.doc -293- 201222097 In the production example 1-2, a bonding jig was used to form a polyoxyethylene rubber Silastic J-RTV manufactured by D〇wc〇rning Co., Ltd. as shown in Fig. 17 In the case of the shape of the one shown (the rubber hardness is 55), as shown in Fig. 19, the Cellotepe (registered trademark) manufactured by Nichiban Co., Ltd. is bonded to the slidable bonding jig. The contact length of the bonding jig with respect to the light guide plate is about 3 mm under application of pressure. Air bubbles can be removed during the first and second operations. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure, and even for the light guide plate which is slightly retracted, the air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. (Manufacturing Example 3 3) In Production Example 1-3, 'as a bonding jig, a commercially available chloroprene rubber sheet (3 mm x 5 〇 rubber hardness: 62) was wrapped in a polyethylene plastic bag to give Sliding fixture. Although the rubber hardness of the bonding jig is higher, but thinner, the contact length of the bonding device with respect to the light guide plate is about 10 mm longer when pressure is applied. Into the 'work 1 and 2 can remove bubbles. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure, and even for the light guide plate which is slightly retracted, the air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. In comparison with Production Example 1-1, the hardness of the rubber was slightly deteriorated, and the shape followability was slightly deteriorated, so that a higher pressure was required, and the workability was slightly deteriorated, but it was in the range of no problem. (Manufacturing Example 1_4) In Production Example 1-4, 'As a bonding jig, Sanshin is used.

En e prises s〇rb〇 (5〇mmx50 mm&gt;&lt;3 mm' rubber hardness of 32) manufactured by Co., Ltd. is wrapped in a polyethylene plastic bag and imparted sliding 157266.doc -294· 201222097 The fit is lost. The bonding jig is soft and thin, so that the contact length of the bonding jig with respect to the light guide plate is about 15 mm longer in a state where the force is applied. Air bubbles can be removed when performing operations 1 and 2. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure, and even for the finely indented light guide plate, air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. Compared with the manufacturing example 1_丨, the efficiency of the stress applied to the direction perpendicular to the end face is lowered due to the lower hardness of the rubber, and the higher the pressure is required, although the workability is slightly changed. Poor but within the scope of no problem. (Production Example 1-5) In the case of the example I5, Valqua Code-Seal Soft (35 mm x 10 mm x 3 mm, rubber hardness: 55) was manufactured by Nippon Valqua IndUStneS Industrial Co., Ltd. as a bonding jig. The fitting jig has a strong plastic deformability, so that the contact length of the bonding jig with respect to the light guide plate is about 2 mm in a state where pressure is applied. Air bubbles can be removed when performing operations 1 and 2. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure by Ο. Even for the light guide plate which is slightly retracted, air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. Compared with the production example, since the shape followability is gradually hardened each time it is used as a plastic deformable body, the life of the jig is slightly shorter, but it is within a problem range. (Production Example 1-6) In the production example 1-6, a commercially available eva foam (95 mm x 25 mm x 10 mm, rubber hardness 28) was wrapped in a polyethylene plastic bag as a bonding jig. Sliding fit fixture. Rubber hardness of the bonding fixture 157266.doc •295 - 201222097 Lower 'but the thickness is larger, so the contact length of the bonding fixture with respect to the light guide plate is about 3 mm ° under the condition of applying pressure At 1, 2, the bubbles can be removed. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure, and even for the light guide plate which is slightly retracted, the air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. Compared with the manufacturing example 1, since the hardness of the rubber is low, the applied stress is reduced in the efficiency of the stress in the direction perpendicular to the end surface, so that a higher pressure is required, and although the workability is slightly deteriorated, there is no problem. Within the scope. (Production Example 1-7) In Production Example 1-7, as a bonding jig, a polyurethane was used.

The resin (for earthquakes manufactured by Debika Co., Ltd., 3 mmMO mm multi-rubber hardness of 8) is wrapped in a polyethylene plastic bag to impart a sliding conforming jig. The bonding jig is soft and thin, so that the contact length of the bonding jig with respect to the light guide plate is about 15 mm longer when pressure is applied. Air bubbles can be removed when performing operations 1 and 2. In the work 2, the bonding jig is changed in shape by applying pressure, and even for the light guide plate which is slightly retracted, the air bubbles can be removed by applying pressure. Compared with the manufacturing example, since the stress applied by the rubber is low, the stress applied to the direction perpendicular to the end face is lowered, so that a higher pressure is required, and although the workability is slightly deteriorated, there is no problem. Within the scope. (Production Example 1-8) In Production Example 1-8, a bonding jig was used for molding a polyoxyethylene rubber Silastic J-RTV manufactured by Dow Corning Co., Ltd. as shown in Fig. 110 157266.doc -2% ' 201222097 A laminated jig which is provided with a slidability is attached to Cellotea (registered trademark) manufactured by Nichiban Co., Ltd. as shown in Fig. Iu, as shown in Fig. Iu. The contact length of the bonding jig with respect to the light guide plate under application of pressure is about 8 mm. Air bubbles can be removed in job 1. In the operation 2, the bubble was not removed because the shape of the guide interfered with the light guide plate. (Production Example 1-11) In the production example 1-11, a bonding jig was attached to a commercially available bamboo squeegee (rubber hardness: 98) and attached to Cellotape (registered trademark) manufactured by Nichiban Co., Ltd. Sliding fixture. The contact length of the bamboo to the knife relative to the light guide plate is 〇 3 mm under pressure. In operation 1, in the step of expanding the optical film layer, the jig was tilted and the contact area was reduced, so that the bubbles were not successfully removed. In the operation 2, since the shape followability was not obtained, the bubble of the slightly indented light guide plate could not be removed. (Manufacturing Example 1-12) _ When the bonding jig of the above-described manufacturing example 1-8 or the like is used, since the light guide plate can be squeezed out of the light guide plate one by one (not applicable in the work 2) In addition to removing the light guide plate in a state in which a plurality of layers are stacked, it is necessary to take out the light guide plates one by one, and there is a problem that the workability of squeezing out the air bubbles is complicated. Therefore, a rubber roller having a width substantially the same as the thickness of the light guide plate as shown in FIG. 112 is used as the bonding jig: the roller is polished by the light-incident surface of the light guide plate in the /13 overlapping state. Efficiently remove 'bubbles. It is particularly suitable to use a soft material such as rubber as the material of the surface of the roll, (manufacturing example 1-13), and the surface is set to be smooth. In general, (4) Na Yuanzhi as a fit clip 1 push ~ H &lt; view) Shiyan arrangement dry open, order 2. Specifically, the surface is lightly pressed against the light-incident surface of the light guide plate by the operation of the surface shown in Fig. m. It is possible to remove bubbles efficiently. When the bonding jig is used, only one tap is given from #B, and three bubbles can be continuously removed by light, so that the bubble extrusion efficiency is improved. [Industrial Applicability] *This: The light source device of the Ming Dynasty can be used for various display devices such as notebook PCs, portable information terminals, desktop PC screens, digital cameras, and general lighting devices. Although the surface light source device of the present month uses a plurality of point light sources as the light source', the uneven brightness (hot spot) near the light entrance surface is less, and uniform brightness can be obtained throughout the light exit surface, and low cost can be provided. / Large or thin liquid crystal display device (television receiving device) with a narrow bezel. In addition, since the surface light source device of the present invention can obtain uniform illumination in a wide range, it can realize natural illumination that does not cause discomfort or irritability even if it is directly viewed, and thus can be applied to (indoor) ceiling illumination. Or the appearance of the refuge indicator light strictly regulated by the law. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Fig. 1 is a schematic view showing an example of a light guide plate included in a surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a view showing the surface distribution of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions (groove structure) formed by the light incident surface of the light guide plate of 157266.doc - 298 « 201222097 included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Figure. Fig. 3 is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions (groove structures) formed by the light incident surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/telephone receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 4 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a method of manufacturing the uneven structure. Fig. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing a multilayer film for producing a light guide plate having a concavo-convex structure. Fig. 6 is a schematic view showing a sealing sheet of a multilayer film (sealing strip) for producing a light guide plate having a concave-convex structure. Fig. 7 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a method of producing a multilayer film (tape) for producing a light guide plate having a concavo-convex structure. Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the diffusion angle. Fig. 9 is a front schematic view showing a surface light source device of the present invention. Fig. 10 is a schematic view showing a point light source (LED) usable in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 11 is a front schematic view showing a liquid crystal display panel using a light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a view showing an example of the configuration of a television receiver of the present invention. Fig. 13 is an explanatory view showing the pitch and depth of the concave portion of the light guide plate included in the light incident surface of the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 14 is a photomicrograph showing an example of a concave portion formed by the light incident surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. 15(A) and (B) are transmitted light from a normal direction to a direction in which a plurality of concave portions or 157266.doc -299-201222097 mold (岔 seal) are formed in a straight direction with the concave portion (protrusion portion) Long-length vertical distribution diagram of the opening (bottom surface) of the multilayer for manufacturing the light guide plate of the angle convex portion of the strength. Fig. 16 is a photomicrograph of a specific example of a moth eye structure. Mirror Photograph 17 is a micrograph of a specific example of a plurality of concave portions having a moth-eye structure on the surface, and is shown in the light-emitting surface and/or opposite direction of the light guide plate of the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. A conceptual diagram of an example of light scattering processing performed on a surface. Fig. 19 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 20 is a view showing the luminance distribution of Production Examples A1 to 4. Fig. 21 is a cross-sectional view showing a preferred example of the liquid crystal display device of the surface light source device of the present invention, showing the standard deviation of the luminance of the light-emitting surface of the manufacturing example 4; Fig. 24A is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24B is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24C is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24D is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24E is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24F is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24G is a view showing a surface distribution of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. 157266.doc • 300· 201222097 Surface distribution of one of the examples. A surface distribution map of one of the parts. Fig. 24H shows a plurality of concave portions or convex portions 241 showing a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Fig. 24J shows a surface distribution diagram of an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions. Figure 25 is a light guide plate system that can be used to manufacture a plurality of recesses or protrusions.

Figure 26 is an explanatory diagram of dot density. Fig. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a liquid crystal display device including the surface light source device of the present invention. Fig. 28 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the package 3 of the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 29 is a partially enlarged view showing a specific example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 30 is a view showing light scattering processing performed on the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the surface light source device of Production Example A-5. Fig. 3 is a view showing the relationship between the luminance unevenness (S D. value) and P/G of the surface light source device of Production Example A_5. Fig. 32 is a view showing light scattering processing performed on the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the surface light source device of Production Example A-6. Fig. 3 is a view showing light scattering processing performed on the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the surface light source device of Production Example A-11. Fig. 34 is a graph showing the relationship between the luminance unevenness (S.D. value) and p/G in Production Example A-11. 157266.doc -301 · 201222097 Figure 35 shows the brightness unevenness (8.0. value) and manufacturing example 8-13. / Diagram of the relationship between 〇. Fig. A1 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. A2 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. A3 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 4 is a view showing the present invention. A partially enlarged view of an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device. Fig. 5 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. 6 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of a light-emitting surface of a light guide plate included in the present invention. The light scatter pattern Α7 of the surface light source device/television receiving device and/or the opposite surface is shown in the guide, the device/television receiving device, the large surface: the smooth surface and/or the opposite surface. 157266.doc -302. 201222097 A partially enlarged view of an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate. Fig. A9 is a view showing the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. A partially enlarged view of an example of light scattering processing performed on the light exit surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate. Fig. A10 is a partially enlarged view showing an example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. Al 1 is a view showing the arrangement of the reflection sheets attached to the side faces of the light guide plate in Production Examples a to 14 to 15. Fig. A12 is a view showing the arrangement of the reflection sheets attached to the side faces of the light guide plate in Production Examples A-14 to 15. Fig. A13 is a view showing the arrangement of the reflection sheets attached to the side faces of the light guide plate in Production Examples a_14 to 15. Figs. B(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of essential parts of a light source unit for explaining the relationship between the distance between the light source and the optical sheet, the distance between the light sources, and the unevenness in brightness. σ Figure B2(a) shows the projection area of the line source constituting the light source unit and the projection area between the line sources. Fig. B2(b) shows a projection area of a point light source constituting the light source unit and a projection area between the point light sources. Fig. B3(a) shows an explanatory diagram of the diffusion angle. Fig. B3(b) is a schematic diagram showing the intensity of transmitted light when light is incident from the normal direction of the diffusion sheet. The distribution of the WB4 diffusion angle with respect to the relative position in the plane of the diffusion sheet (1 157266.doc 201222097. Figs. B5(a) to (f) show the distribution of the diffusion angle of the diffusion sheet of the first invention of the present specification with respect to the relative position in the plane. Fig. B6 shows an example of the arrangement of the high diffusion angle region and the low diffusion angle region of the diffusion sheet of the first invention of the present specification. Fig. B7 shows the arrangement of the high diffusion angle region and the low diffusion angle region of the diffusion sheet of the second invention of the present specification. An example of the arrangement of the high diffusion angle region and the low diffusion angle region of the diffusion sheet of the present invention is shown in Fig. B8. Fig. B9(a) is a schematic perspective view showing an example of the light source unit according to the second aspect of the present invention. B9(b) is a schematic perspective view showing another example of the light source unit according to the second aspect of the present invention. Fig. B10(a) is a schematic perspective view showing an example of the light source unit of the present invention. Fig. B10(b) shows the present specification! A schematic perspective view of another example of the light source unit of the invention. Fig. B11(a) shows an example of the light source unit of the jth invention of the present specification in the diffusion angle period and the light source. Fig. BU(b) is an explanatory view showing a diffusion angle period and a light source interval in another example of the light source unit of the first invention of the present specification. Fig. B12 shows a diffusion angle distribution and a light source of the diffusion sheet of the first invention of the present specification. Fig. B13 (a) to (C) are schematic perspective views showing the light source unit of the first invention of the present specification. Fig. 8 (a) and (b) show the description of the present specification. A schematic perspective view of a specific configuration of a light source unit according to the invention. 157 157266.doc -304. 201222097 Fig. B15(a) to (d) are schematic perspective views showing a specific configuration of a light source unit according to a first invention of the present specification. (b) is a schematic perspective view showing a specific configuration of a light source unit according to a first aspect of the present invention. Fig. B17 is a view showing a layout pattern of an LED light source in Production Example B. Fig. B1 8(a) shows the diffusion of the manufacturing example B-7. An explanatory diagram of the relative positional relationship between the diffusion angle distribution and the light source in the sheet. Fig. B18(b) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the diffusion angle distribution and the relative position of the light source in the diffusion sheet of Production Example B-8. Surface light source device A front view of a liquid crystal display panel including a light guide plate. Fig. C18 is a view showing an example of light scattering processing performed on a light-emitting surface and/or a facing surface of a light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. C19 is a conceptual diagram showing an example of light scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate included in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. (Examples of the luminance distributions of the production examples (M to C-3 and C-11). Fig. C21 is a diagram showing the standard deviation of the luminance of the light-emitting surface of the manufacturing example ~ (:_3 and (:_11). Figure C22 is a diagram showing the relationship between light scattering processing and the overlap of the frames and the in-plane luminance. Figure C23 is a graph obtained by plotting the results of reference experiment C2 (1 &gt; / relationship between 〇 and p2 / pi). Figure C2 is a schematic view of an example of a lighting device (ceiling lighting device). 157266.doc •305 - 201222097 Figure C2-12 is a front view of an example of a lighting device (a refuge light). Fig. C3-13 is a view showing the luminance distributions of Production Examples C-21 and 31 to 33. Fig. D16 is a view showing the relationship between the distance between the light-emitting surface and the light-incident surface and the luminance in the light guide plate of Production Example D and the reference example. Fig. D17A is a view showing the relationship between luminance unevenness and p/G in Production Example D and Reference Example. Fig. D1 to 7B are diagrams showing the relationship between the luminance unevenness and the p/G in the manufacturing example D and the reference example. Fig. D17C is a diagram showing the relationship between luminance unevenness and p/G in Production Example D and Reference Example. Fig. D17D is a diagram showing the relationship between luminance unevenness and p/G in Production Example D and Reference Example. Fig. D17E is a view showing the relationship between luminance unevenness and p/G in Production Example D and Reference Example. Fig. D17F is a diagram showing the relationship between luminance unevenness and p/G in Production Example D and Reference Example. Fig. D1 8 is a view showing the relationship between the luminance unevenness in the manufacturing example D and the reference example and the direction of the vertical grooves. Fig. D19 is a view showing luminance unevenness when a gap structure is formed and a groove structure is formed on the light incident surface. Fig. D20 is a view showing luminance unevenness when a gap structure is formed and a groove structure is provided on the light incident surface. Fig. D21 shows Production Examples D-16 and D-17 (surface light source device using a light guide plate including a vertically long depressed portion) and Production Examples D·35 and d_36 (using a groove including 158266.doc -306 - 201222097) A graph showing uneven brightness of the surface light source device of the light guide plate of the depressed portion. Fig. D22 is a graph showing the relationship between luminance unevenness and p/G in Production Example D and Reference Example. Figure D23 is a graph showing the relationship between the diffusion angle of the light incident surface and uneven brightness. Fig. E3(a) is a surface distribution diagram showing an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions (groove structures) formed in the light incident portion of the light guiding member. Fig. E3(b) is a surface distribution diagram showing an example of a plurality of concave portions 凸 or convex portions (groove structures) formed in the light incident portion of the light guiding member. Fig. E3(c) is a surface distribution diagram showing an example of a plurality of concave portions or convex portions (groove structures) formed in the light incident portion of the light guiding member. Figure E4 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a light guiding member. Fig. E1 7 is a luminance distribution of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate of the surface light source device of Production Example E-1a. Fig. E18 is a luminance distribution of the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate of the surface light source device of Production Example E_1B. 0 Figure E19 is a diagram showing the relationship between GI and G〇. Fig. F28 is a partially enlarged view showing a specific example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate in the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. Fig. F29 is a partially enlarged view showing a specific example of light-scattering processing performed on the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate of the package 3 of the surface light source device/television receiving device of the present invention. The figure is shown in the pair of light guide plates of the surface light source device of the manufacturing example F-11. 157266.doc • 307 - 201222097 The light scattering processing performed on the face. Fig. F3 1 is a graph showing the relationship between the luminance unevenness (S t) value of the surface light source device of Production Example F-11 and P/G. Fig. F32 is a view showing light scattering processing performed on the pupil plane of the light guide plate of the surface light source device of Production Example F-12. Fig. G1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light-emitting pattern curve in the entire direction of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate according to the second invention of the present invention. Fig. G2 is a perspective schematic view showing an example of a light guide plate according to a second invention of the present specification. G3 is an example of a plurality of concave portions (grooves) formed in a region (first partial region and second partial region) having anisotropic light diffusion characteristics on a light incident surface in the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention. Top view. In the light guide plate according to the second aspect of the present invention, the plurality of concave portions (grooves) formed in the region (the first partial region and the second partial region) having anisotropic light diffusion characteristics on the light incident surface A top view of an example. Fig. G5 (a) to (f) are schematic views showing an example of a partial region formed on the light incident surface of the light guide plate according to the second invention of the present specification. Fig. G10 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining the angular distribution (diffusion angle) of the exit pupil strength t of the material region when the size of the partial region is smaller than the laser diameter of the laser light source used for the measurement. Figure G16 is an angular distribution of the intensity of the outgoing light in the first direction of the first partial region alone. Fig. G18 is a view showing an example of a bright line which is generated on the light-emitting surface when a light-incident surface of the light guide plate is formed with a diffusion structure. 157266.doc 201222097 Fig. G19 is a schematic view showing an example of a shape of a lentil lens which can be formed on the first surface and/or the first surface of the light guiding plate of the second invention of the present specification. Fig. G20 is a cross-sectional view showing the shape of a lentil lens which can be formed on the first surface and/or the second surface of the light guide plate of Production Example g. Figs. G21A and B are perspective views showing a plurality of random grooves which can be formed on the first surface and/or the second surface of the light guiding plate of the second invention of the present specification. Fig. G22A (a), (b), and (c) are the light-emission pattern curves of the light-incident surface of the light guide plate of the production example g in the first direction. G) Fig. G22B(d) and (4) are the light-emission pattern curves of the entire light-incident surface of the light guide plate of Production Example G in the first direction. Fig. G23 is a surface shape of the light diffusion sheet 3 used in Production Example G. Fig. G24 is a surface shape of the light diffusion sheet A used in Production Example G. Fig. G26 is a view showing the evaluation direction of the manufacturing example. Fig. H1 is a plan view showing an example of a linear illumination system including a diffusion sheet according to a third embodiment of the present invention. Fig. H2 is a view showing the relationship between the direction in which the diffusion angle of the emitted light shows the minimum value and the stripe pattern in the diffusion sheet according to the second embodiment of the third invention of the present invention. Fig. H3 is a view showing the distribution of light intensity in the horizontal direction of the irradiation surface in Production Example H-4. Fig. H4 is a view showing the distribution of light intensity in the horizontal direction of the irradiation surface in Production Example H-4. Fig. H5 is a view showing the distribution of light intensity in the horizontal direction of the irradiation surface in Production Example H_4. 157266.doc -309- 201222097 Figure H6 is a diagram showing the cloth in Production Example Η-4. The light intensity in the horizontal direction of the irradiation surface is shown in Fig. 7 to show the distribution of the light intensity in the water direction of the irradiation surface in the manufacturing example Η-4. Fig. 8 is a view showing the light intensity distribution in the horizontal direction of the incident surface in the manufacturing example Η-14, in which the upper τ 丫 &quot;. Fig. 9 is a view showing the light intensity distribution in the horizontal direction of the incident surface in the manufacturing example Η-14. Fig. 1 0 is a diagram showing the light intensity distribution in the horizontal direction of the 例 S S - r - table j 14 制造 制造 。 。 。 J J J 14 Fig. η is a perspective view showing an aspect in which a strip-shaped member is adhered to the end surface of the plate-like member according to the embodiment of the fourth invention of the present invention. Fig. 12 is a perspective view showing a state in which the end surface of the multi-plate-stacked plate-like member of the embodiment of the fourth embodiment of the present invention is adhered to the strip-shaped member. Fig. 13 is a perspective view showing an aspect in which a belt-like member is adhered to the end surface of the plate of the embodiment of the fourth invention. Fig. 14 (a) is a schematic side view showing a method of bonding a belt-shaped member to an end surface of a plate-shaped member using a reel of a belt-shaped member of the embodiment of the present invention. Figure I4(b) is a schematic plan view of the bonding portion of Figure I4(a). Fig. 15 (a) is a conceptual view showing a method of bonding a strip member to one end surface of a plate member by using a bonding jig according to an embodiment of the fourth invention of the present specification. 157266.doc -310· 201222097 Fig. 15 (b) and (0) are schematic cross-sectional views showing the deformation of the contact portion of the bonding jig at the time of bonding. (a), (b), and (c) of FIG. Fig. 17 (a) is a perspective view of a bonding jig of the manufacturing examples 1_1 and 1_2. Figure i7(b) is a cross-sectional view of the bonding fixture of Examples 1 and 2. Fig. I8(a) is a perspective view of a bonding jig of a manufacturing example wrapped in a plastic bag. Figure 18 (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the fitting failure of the manufacturing example w wrapped in a plastic bag. Fig. 19 (a) is a perspective view of a bonding jig to which slidability is provided in Production Example 1-2. Fig. 19 (b) is a cross-sectional view showing a slidable bonding jig of Production Example 1-2. Fig. 110 (a) is a perspective view of the bonding device of the manufacturing example j_8. Fig. 9 (9) is a cross-sectional view of the bonding jig of the manufacturing example 1-8. Figure in (4) is a manufacturing example! The material of _8 has a three-dimensional view of the sliding fixture. Figure IU(b) is a cross-sectional U-sectional view of a bonding fixture for imparting slidability to a chest. Fig. 112 is a schematic view showing an example of a bonding jig according to the embodiment of the fourth invention.

Fig. 113 is a photograph of the bonding jig 1 of the embodiment of the fourth invention of the present specification. J Fig. 114 is an explanatory diagram (photograph) of the bubble removal step of the production of the ruthenium, ruthenium, ..., and τ in the production example 1-13. Fig. J1 is an explanatory view of a bonding method (step Α 1) of a manufacturing step of a longitudinal grooved reel to which an adhesive material is attached. 157266.doc • 311 . 201222097 Fig. J2 is an explanatory view of a coating method (step A2) of a manufacturing step of a longitudinal grooved reel to which an adhesive material is attached. Fig. J3 is an explanatory view showing the flow of the manufacturing step B of the half-cut sheet (in the case of high diffusion in the TD direction). Fig. J4 is an explanatory view showing the flow of the manufacturing step C of the half-cut sheet (in the case of high diffusion in the MD direction). Fig. J5 is an explanatory diagram of the step C2 (marking at the same time as the reel slicing (single piece)). Fig. J6 is an explanatory view of the details of step C3 (B3 is also substantially the same) (for half slit processing of a single sheet). Fig. J7 is an explanatory view of the step C4 (removing the half-cut slits at both ends (the slit-side peeling) for adjusting the dimensional accuracy). Fig. J is an explanatory view of the flow of the manufacturing step D (the rotary mode) of the half-cut small-roll reel. Figure J9 is a cutting step of the half-cut small roll reel Figure D2 (cutting of the small roll reel). Figure J1 is an illustration of the marking step D3 (marking a single sheet) of the tangent-cut semi-cut slit sheet. Figure J11 is an explanatory view of the warpage direction of a suitable sheet. Fig. J12 is an explanatory view of a suitable depth of the slit reaching the heavy peeling separation membrane. Fig. J13 is the expression of the pancreas τ in the heavy peeling separation membrane. The deviation of the slit and the strip in the figure J14 is the deviation of the slit and the short strip in the heavy peeling separation membrane. 157266.doc -312^ 201222097 Mingtu. Figure K1 is an illustration of the Lambertian LED. Figure K2 is a schematic diagram of a high diffusion LED. Fig. K3 is a view showing the light-emitting characteristics of light incident from the LED to the light guide plate. Fig. K4 is a view showing the diffusion of light obliquely incident on the light incident surface having no uneven structure on the surface inside the light guide plate. Fig. K5 is a schematic view showing the diffusion of light incident on the surface of the light guide plate by a person having a concave-convex structure on the surface.

Figure K6 shows a diagram of the invention using a high diffusion lEd. Summary of the embodiment

[Main component symbol description] 1 The light guide plate 5a includes a layer 5b formed with a groove structure, and includes a layer 9 having a groove structure. The surface of the light source device 11 is emitted. 10 LED 11 Liquid crystal display panel 12 Light-emitting surface/television receiving device 13 The thickness direction 15 of the light guide plate is parallel to the direction of the light-emitting surface. 16 The normal direction of the light-incident surface 26 The multi-layered multilayer of a specific point 臈I57266.doc •313- 201222097 26a~f Connecting the center point and the adjacent point of a specific point Vertical bisector of the line segment at the center point of the point 41 Transparent substrate 42 Transfer roller 51 Release film 52 Next layer 53 Base film 54 Layer formed with a groove structure 55 Adhesive layer 56 Backing film 61 Groove 71 contains grooves formed Multilayer film 72 of layer of groove structure Reel 91 Light guide plate 92 Point light source 93 Light incident surface 94 Area corresponding to display area 101 Light emitting surface 102 Horizontal width of light emitting surface 112 Display area 113 Black matrix 114 Source wafer 115 Gate wafer 121 Display device 157266.doc -314- 201222097

122 Front case 123 TV tuner circuit board 124 Power circuit board 125 Control circuit board 126 Rear case 127 Bracket 1221 Speaker 262 Polygon A~F surrounding a specific point Adjacent point B1 Light source B2 Optical sheet Bll Line source (cold Cathode Tube (CCFL)) B12 Point Light Source (LED) B13 Reflector B14 Optical Sheet, Diffuser Plate B15 Diffuser B16 Surface Shaped Diffuser B17 Bake B18 Reflective Polarizer B101 Cold Cathode Tube (CCFL) B102 LED B103 Projection area directly above the light source B104 Projection area between light sources B301 High diffusion angle area 157266.doc -315- 201222097 B302 Low diffusion angle area B303 13⁄4 diffusion angle area B304 Low diffusion angle area C2-9 Illumination unit C2-90 Frame C2- 91 Light guide plate C2-901 Opening E41 Substrate E42 Next layer E43 Light diffusing layer G Horizontal distance between the light incident surface of the light guide plate and the display area G2 Light guide plate G21 First surface G22 Light incident surface G23 Groove G24 Light Face length direction (first direction) G25 is perpendicular to the length direction of the entrance surface (second direction) HI spot light Source H2 diffuser H3 Irradiation surface H4 Irradiation light H5 Stripe pattern in the oblique direction H6 The direction showing the minimum value of the diffusion angle of the emitted light H7 The diffusion angle of the stripe pattern 5 with respect to the emitted light 157266.doc -316- 201222097

Angle of the minimum direction of Ο 11 Angle of the plate member 12 Ribbon member 13 Marking 14 Bonding and cooling 15 Peeling paper 16 Contact portion 17 Sliding imparting layer 18 Shape following layer 19 Pressure roller 110 Guide roller J1 Vertical groove Sheet reel J2 Vertical grooved sheet reel with adhesive material J3 Vertical grooved sheet with adhesive material (single piece) J4 Semi-cut sheet (single piece) J5 Longitudinal groove seal with adhesive material (short strip) J6 reaches the slit in the heavy peeling separation film J21 The longitudinal groove sheet reel with the adhesive material (high diffusion in the TD direction) J22 The longitudinal groove sheet reel with the adhesive material (high diffusion in the MD direction) J31 Marked longitudinal groove sheet J41 Semi-cut sheet with marking (single piece) J42 Half-cut sheet with peeled edge (single piece) J43 Stripped edge with marked mark Half-cut sheet (single piece) J221 Vertical grooved sheet reel with adhesive material (MD high diffusion) -317- 157266.doc 201222097

J222 P Half-cut small roll reel The arrangement distance of point light source 157266.doc 318·

Claims (1)

201222097 VII. Patent Application Range·· A television receiving device includes: a surface light source device, comprising: a surface having a surface, a (4) surface opposite to the surface, and a surface of the light emitting surface and the opposite surface a light guide plate between the light incident surfaces and a plurality of point light sources disposed in the vicinity of the at least one light incident surface of the light guide plate; and the display panel disposed to face the light emitting surface of the light guide plate , And a display area for displaying the light by adjusting the transmission of the light, and a light-shielding frame for defining the display area; and a buffer for receiving the broadcast image signal; and the at least one light-incident surface of the light guide plate includes The opening or the bottom surface has a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in a direction perpendicular to the light-emitting surface. 2. The television receiving device according to claim 2, wherein the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate in the vicinity of the light-incident surface of the light-shielding portion shielded by the light-shielding frame is configured to be positive The light scattering degree of the light scattering degree of the partial region of the point source is lower than the light scattering degree of the partial region of the portion between the point source and the point source. 3. The television receiving device of claim 2, wherein the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or the opposite surface further has a light-scattering process in the region A covering the non-light-shielding portion not covered by the light-shielding frame, and is disposed In the region C between the region A and the region B near the light incident surface of the light-shielding portion shielded by the light-shielding frame, at least a portion of the portion between the point light source and the point light source is not provided with light scattering. Add 157266.doc 201222097 work. 4. The television receiving device of claim 2 or 3, wherein the light scattering is performed in a partial region of a portion between the point source and the point source in the region B near the light incident surface of the light shielding portion shielded by the light shielding frame Processing, with a gradient of light scattering toward the middle of the point source and the point source. 5. The television receiving device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or the facing surface of the light guide plate is not covered by the light-shielding frame The light scattering degree of a partial region of the point source and the partial scattering of the portion between the point source and the point source are substantially equal. 6. The television receiving device according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or the region B of the light-emitting surface of the light-shielding portion of the opposite surface that is shielded by the light-shielding frame is positive The light scattering degree of a partial region of a portion between the point light source and the point light source is twice to 2 times the light scattering degree of the region A covering the non-light-shielding portion. 7. The television receiving device according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the plurality of point light sources are arranged at substantially equal intervals, the arrangement pitch p, and between the at least one light incident surface and the display region The horizontal distance G satisfies the following relationship: P/G &gt; 1.0. 8. The television receiver according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein, when the plurality of point light sources are illuminated, the light-shielding portion of the light-emitting surface that is shielded by the light-shielding frame and the non-light-shielding portion that is not shielded by the light-shielding frame are substantially One of the intersections of the rectangles, that is, substantially parallel to the light-incident surface and closest to the upper surface 157266.doc 201222097 The measured value of the brightness of each measurement point divided by the average value is 0.02. the following. The television receiver of any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the light guide plate comprises: a substrate; an adhesive layer laminated on at least one end surface of the substrate; and a laminate layer on the adhesive layer, the surface comprising The opening or the bottom surface has a plurality of layers of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction. 10. The television receiving device of claim 9, wherein the adhesive layer is formed of a material having a storage elastic modulus G of 1 〇, 〇〇〇 45,000 Pa.电视 π. The television receiving device of claim 9 or claim 1, wherein the surface comprises a layer of a plurality of recesses or protrusions having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape in a direction including a base film layer and a surface a resin layer comprising a plurality of recesses or protrusions having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape in a direction; the surface comprising a plurality of recesses having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction or The resin layer of the convex portion comprises: an addition polymerization monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group: 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (Β) photopolymerization initiator: 0.1 to 30 mass The cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition of °/〇, and the above-mentioned addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group contains a biphenyl group and has the following formula (I) Compounds of the structure shown: General formula (I) [Chemical 12] 157266.doc 201222097 (wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and χ represents a part or all of a divalent organic group having at least an alkylene group). 12. The television receiver of claim 11, wherein the compound having the structure represented by the above formula (1) has a structure represented by the following formula (π): Formula (II) [Chem. 13] (In the formula (II), R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and A each independently represents a stretching group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, and η represents an integer of 1 to 3). The television receiver of claim 1, wherein said layer 13 is attached to said substrate and said surface comprises an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction The layer of the plurality of concave portions or the convex portions is an end surface of the bonding clip, and the label includes a sliding property imparting layer of the sliding imparting material, and the inner side of the sliding property imparting layer includes a shape having a shape of a material of 10 to 70. Floor. The surface and the surface include a plurality of concave surface surfaces having an anisotropic shape of an opening or a bottom surface, and the bonding fixture is provided on the surface providing layer 'and a television receiving device including the rubber hardness term having shape followability The above interface. The layer having a longer concave portion or a convex portion in a direction is attached to one end surface of the substrate by the following 157266.doc 201222097 bonding method, and the bonding method comprises the following steps: preparing the laminated body Step, the build-up volume layer has an adhesive layer and a layer including a plurality of concave portions or convex portions on the surface, and has a width substantially the same as or narrower than a thickness of the one end surface of the substrate; and a laminating step to make the laminated body The adhesive layer is disposed on the one end surface of the laminated layer opposite to the one end surface; and the bonding jig including the member having the shape followability is used in the joining step, and pressure is applied to the surface along the one end surface The layer having a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an anisotropic shape elongated in one direction in the longitudinal direction of the upper surface, the opening portion or the bottom surface of the surface layer 3 is expanded more than once. 15. The television receiver of any of clauses 9 to 14, wherein the plurality of anisotropic shapes having a longer direction are included when the light is incident from the normal direction to the surface including the opening or the bottom surface. In the case of the layer of the concave portion or the convex portion, the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the above one direction is 65. the above. 16. The television receiver of any of clauses 9 to 15, wherein the plurality of anisotropic shapes having a longer direction are included when the light is incident from the normal direction to the surface including the opening or the bottom surface. In the case of the layer of the concave portion or the convex portion, the diffusion angle in the direction parallel to the above one direction is 5. the following. The television receiving device according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein, in the light incident surface, a diffusion angle of the light emitted from the normal direction thereof indicates a maximum value direction and a display minimum value. The direction is such that the ratio of the maximum value to the minimum value is 200 or more. 18. The television receiver of any of the preceding items, wherein the plurality of recesses or projections of the 157266.doc 201222097 smooth surface are parallel to the average spacing U) 〇_T. In the direction of the fascinating surface, for example, the television of any one of the items of the ninth aspect of the invention receives the cross-sectional shape of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions, wherein: at least one of the above-mentioned complexities is irregularly different. The invention relates to a surface light source device comprising: a light-emitting surface; a surface opposite to the light-emitting surface; the ancient stone is a confrontation surface, and the upper light-emitting surface and the pair a plane between the facing faces; a frame of a plurality of light guide surfaces in the vicinity of the light incident surface of the surface light source device; a frame disposed on the light emitting surface side light region of the light guide plate; and the above-mentioned light guide plate disposed on the light guide plate At least one of the point light sources; and the at least one light entering the light guide plate having an anisotropic shape having an opening or a bottom surface has a plurality of concave portions or convex portions longer in a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface. The surface light source device of claim 20, wherein the light-emitting surface of the first plate such as the above-mentioned slab and/or the opposite surface is in the region B near the light-incident surface of the light-shielding portion shielded by the frame A light-scattering process having a light scattering degree that is configured such that a light scattering degree of a partial region of the point light source is lower than a partial region of a portion between the point light source and the point light source. 22. The surface light source device of claim 21, wherein the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light guide plate further has a light-scattering process in a region A covering a non-light-shielding portion not covered by the frame, and 157266. Doc 201222097 The area ct between the area B sandwiched between the area A and the light-incident surface of the light-shielding part shielded by the frame is not set at least in a partial area of the portion between the point source and the point source There is light scattering processing. 23. The surface light source device of claim 21 or 22, wherein the light scattering processing is performed in a partial region of a portion between the point source and the point source in the region B near the light incident surface of the light shielding portion shielded by the frame A gradient having a degree of light scattering that rises toward an intermediate position between the point source and the point source. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 20 to 23, wherein in the region A of the non-light-shielding portion of the light-emitting surface and/or the opposite surface of the light-guiding plate that is not covered by the frame, The light scattering degree of a partial region of the point source and the partial scattering of the portion between the point source and the point source are substantially equal. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 20 to 24, wherein the light-emitting surface of the light guide plate and/or the region B of the opposite surface of the light-receiving portion of the opposite surface that is shielded by the frame is directly opposite The light scattering degree of a partial region of a portion between the point light source and the point light source is 2 times to 2 times the light scattering degree of the region covering the non-light-shielding portion. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 20 to 25, wherein said plurality of point light sources are arranged at substantially equal intervals, an arrangement pitch p thereof, and between said at least one light incident surface and said display region The horizontal distance G satisfies the following relationship: P/G &gt; 1.0. 27. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 20 to 26, wherein, when the plurality of point light sources are illuminated, the light-shielding surface on the light-emitting surface is shielded by the frame 157266.doc 201222097: 2: the frame is shielded from non-shading The standard deviation value of the value obtained by dividing the value of the measured value of the brightness of each of the measurement points which are substantially parallel to the light-incident surface and the side closest to the light-incident surface is 0 02 the following. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 2 to 27, wherein the light guide plate comprises: a substrate; an adhesive layer laminated on at least the end surface of the substrate; and laminated on the adhesive layer, the surface comprises The opening or the bottom surface has a plurality of layers of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in both directions. 29. The surface light source device of claim 28, wherein the adhesive layer is formed of a material having a storage elastic modulus G· at a c· of 1 〇, 〇〇〇 45,000 Pa. 30. The surface light source device of claim 28 or 29, wherein the surface comprises an opening or a bottom surface having a plurality of directions in a direction that are longer in a direction (four) of the plurality of recesses or protrusions, the base film, and the surface comprising the opening a resin layer having a plurality of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in the direction; the surface includes a plurality of concave portions or convex portions having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction The resin layer of the portion comprises: an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group: 70 to 99.9% by mass, and (Β) photopolymerization initiator: 〇·ι~30 mass ° a cured product of the photopolymerizable resin composition of the oxime; the above-mentioned (additionally) an addition polymerizable monomer having at least one terminal ethylenically unsaturated group, which comprises a phenyl group and has a structure represented by the following formula (1) Compound: General formula (I) 157266.doc 201222097 [Chemical 14] (wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and X represents a part or all of a divalent organic group having at least an alkylene group). The surface light source device according to claim 30, wherein the compound having the structure represented by the above formula (I) has a structure represented by the following formula (II): Formula (II) [Chem. 15] (In the formula (II), 'R' represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group 'A each independently represents a stretching group having a carbon number of 1 to 4, and η represents an integer of 1 to 3). The surface light source device according to any one of claims 28 to 31, wherein said adhesive layer and said surface comprise a plurality of recesses or projections having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape that is long in one direction And attaching to one end surface of the base material by using a bonding failure, the bonding failure is provided on the surface with a slidability providing layer containing a sliding imparting material, and is provided inside the slidability providing layer, and has a shape following The shape of the material with a rubber hardness of 10 to 70 follows the layer. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 28 to 32, wherein the above-mentioned adhesive layer and the surface include a plurality of concave or convex portions having an opening or a bottom surface having an anisotropic shape of 157266.doc 201222097 which is long in one direction. The layer of the part is attached to one end surface of the substrate by the following bonding method, and the bonding method comprises the following steps: a step of preparing a layered body having an adhesive layer and a plurality of concave portions and a surface Or a layer of the convex portion having a width substantially equal to or narrower than a thickness of the one end surface of the substrate; and a laminating step of causing the bonding layer of the laminated body to face the one end surface, and depositing the laminated volume layer The one end surface; and the adhesion step, using a bonding device containing a shape-following member to apply pressure, and having an opening or a bottom surface on the surface along the length direction of the one end surface is long in one direction The layers of the plurality of concave or convex portions of the anisotropic shape are stretched more than once. 34. A surface light source device according to any one of π to 28 to 33, which is incident from the normal direction to the surface including the opening or the bottom surface has 吏:! In the case of a plurality of layers of concave or convex portions having an anisotropic shape that is long in the direction, the diffusion angle in the direction perpendicular to the above-described one direction is 65. the above. 35'. The device of claim 28, wherein the light is incident on the surface to the surface, and the opening or the bottom surface has a plurality of concave portions having an anisotropic shape that is longer in the upward direction. Or the layer of the convex portion has a diffusion angle of 5 in a direction parallel to the above-described direction. the following. • ^The surface light source device of the item 2G to 35, wherein the direction of the diffusion angle of the light emitted from the normal direction of the above-mentioned entrance surface is not the maximum value and the county is not the smallest The direction of the value, and the ratio of the above maximum value to the above minimum value is 200 or more. The surface source device of any one of claims 2 to 36, wherein the plurality of concave portions or convex portions of the light incident surface are in an average direction in a direction parallel to the light emitting surface It is below 100 μηη. The surface light source device according to any one of claims 20 to 37, wherein at least one of a cross-sectional shape, a depth or a height, and a pitch of the plurality of concave portions or convex portions are irregularly different. 39_ is an indoor ceiling lighting comprising the surface light source device of any one of claims 20 to 38. ¢) 40. The indoor ceiling illumination of claim 39, which has a maximum brightness of 10,000 cd/m2 or less when illuminated. 157266.doc